1. home and garden
2. home improvement and repair
3. plumbing

The Corporation of the City of St. Catharines
New Performing Arts Centre
City’s Project No. P10-170-2
Project Manual Title Page
Section 00 01 01
Page 1
April 9, 2013
A
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Issued for Construction
Brain Health Complex
Research Renovations
Diamond Schmitt Architects
384 Adelaide Street West, Suite 300
Toronto, ON
M5V 1R7
Tel: 416-862-8800
Fax: 416-862-5508
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
ALTERATIONS RESEARCH OFFICES
3RD, 4TH & 5TH FLOORS
TORONTO, ONTARIO
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
“ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION”
April 25, 2013
CROSSEY
ENGINEERING
LTD.
JOB NO.: 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15000
Page 1
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL
15010
15051
15065
15190
Mechanical General Provisions
Demolition
Work Within Existing Buildings
Identification
SOUND, VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
15241
Vibration Isolation
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15260
15270
Thermal Insulation for Piping
Thermal Insulation for Ducting
FIRE PROTECTION
15300
15305
15330
Fire Protection - General
Portable Fire Extinguishers
Sprinkler System
PLUMBING
15412
15413
15415
15430
15440
Domestic Water Supply Piping - Copper
Drainage & Vent Piping - Cast Iron, Copper
Drainage & Vent Piping - Plastic
Plumbing Specialties and Accessories
Plumbing Fixtures and Trim
HEAT TRANSFER
15602
15701
15702
15703
15705
15715
15717
15720
HVAC Water Treatment System
Water Cooled Packaged A/C Units
Steel Piping Valves And Fittings Heating & Cooling
Copper Piping Valves & Fittings Heating & Cooling
Copper Tubing and Fittings Refrigerant
Water Specialties - Heating and Cooling
Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints
Pumps
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15000
Page 2
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
AIR DISTRIBUTION
15801
15811
15820
15828
15825
15831
15845
15846
15853
15854
15875
Ductwork - Low Pressure - Metallic
Flexible Ductwork
Duct Accessories
Acoustic Duct Lining
Dampers - Balancing
Commercial Fans
Dry Coolers
Packaged Roof Exhaust Fans
Dampers - Operating
Dampers - Fire
Grilles, Registers and Diffusers
CONTROLS
15900
Controls
SUBCONTRACTORS
15950
Testing, Adjusting & Balancing (TAB)
SCHEDULES
15999
Schedules
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 1
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification is an integral part of the Contract Documents and shall be read
accordingly.
.2
The General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary Conditions and all Sections of Division
0 and 1 - General Requirements shall be deemed to apply and be a part of this section of the
specification as fully as if recited in full herein. They shall be read and fully adhered to by the
contractor for Division 15.
.3
All portions of the Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical shall be submitted by bidders on this
Division of the Work.
.4
The mechanical contractors have been prequalified for this project. Refer to Section 00100.
1.2
Intent
.1
Bidders for work under this Division shall include for all labour, material, equipment and all other
related cost including all applicable taxes and fees to provide the complete mechanical work
specified in Division 15 and shown on the mechanical drawings, and all mechanical work noted in
the specifications and shown on the drawings for other Divisions of this Contract as being the
responsibility of Division 15.
.2
Misinterpretation of any requirement of the drawings and specifications will not relieve the
Mechanical Subcontractor of responsibility. If in any doubt, the Subcontractor shall contact the
Consultant for written clarification prior to submitting a bid for the Work.
1.3
Interference
.1
Provide information and cooperate with the General Contractor for the preparation of interference
drawings.
.1
Interference drawings shall be provided to make clear the work intended or to show how it
affects other trades.
.2
Interference drawings shall be provided to scale 1/4" = 1'-0" for the basement mechanical
room and the penthouse showing both plan and sections.
.3
Interference drawings shall also be provided for areas where there are potential conflicts
in positioning the mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, electrical conduits and
cable trays.
.2
For equipment substitutions and alternates a complete interference drawing of the area affected
by the revision shall be provided by the Division 15 Contractor.
.3
Interference drawings shall be provided showing both plan and sections and shall incorporate all
services including ductwork, plumbing and drainage and electrical services.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 2
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
The Division 15 Contractor shall submit dimensioned sleeving drawings showing the location and
dimension of sleeves through all floors and structural walls for review by the Mechanical and
Structural Consultants.
.5
Dimensioned drawings shall be provided for all roof penetrations for review by the Mechanical and
Structural Consultant.
.6
The Division 15 Contractor shall submit a plan layout showing all of the equipment provided and
the actual weights of the equipment for review as soon as possible after contract award. The
drawings shall also show areas where there are concentrated loads due to piping and equipment
suspended from the roof or slab above.
.7
Installation of the Division 15 work shall not proceed until final interference drawings have been
submitted.
.8
Should there be interference between the Division 15 and Division 16 work a meeting shall be
called within one week of the discovery of the interference to allow prompt remedial action to take
place.
1.4
Contract
.1
The mechanical drawings do not show all the Architectural and structural details, and any
Specifications information involving accurate measuring of the building shall be taken from the
building drawings or at the building. Make without additional change, any necessary changes or
additions to the runs of drains, pipes, ducts, etc., to accommodate the above conditions. The
location of equipment may be altered without charge providing the change is made before
installation and does not necessitate major additional material. The Architectural, Structural, and
Electrical drawings may show details relevant to the mechanical systems and should be referred
to equally with the Mechanical drawings.
.2
Wherever differences occur between plans and riser diagrams or schematics and drawings, the
maximum conditions shall govern and the bid shall be based on whichever indicates the greater
cost.
.3
Field verifications of dimensions on plans shall be made since actual locations, distances, and
levels will be governed by actual field conditions.
.4
Discrepancies between different plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between
plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Consultant for a decision.
.5
As the work progresses and before installing apparatus, equipment, fixtures and devices which
may interfere with the interior treatment and use of the building or with the work of other trades,
provide interference drawings and consult with the Consultant for instructions for the exact
locations of all drains, pipes, ducts, and equipment. Refer to Division 1 specification section 01300
and provide information and interference drawings as may be required by this section.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 3
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.6
Install all mechanical services including but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, to conserve
headroom and interfere as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass.
All drains, pipes, ducts, etc., particularly those which may interfere with the inside treatment of the
building, or conflicting with other trades, shall be installed only after the locations have been
approved by the Consultant. Special care shall be taken in the installation of all mechanical
services including, but not exclusive to drains, pipes, and ducts, which are to be concealed to see
that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls, and ceilings. Where such drains, pipes,
ducts, etc., have been installed in such a manner as to cause interference, they shall be removed
and re-installed in suitable locations without extra cost to the owner.
.7
Before commencing work, check and verify all grade and invert elevations, levels, and dimensions,
to ensure proper and correct installation of the work.
.8
In every place where there is space indicated as reserved for future or other equipment, leave
such space clear, install blank offs, shut off valves with blind flanges and other work so that the
necessary connections can be made without any stoppages to the system. Consult with the
consultant whenever necessary for this purpose.
.9
In addition to the work specifically mentioned in the specifications and shown on the drawings,
provide all other items that are obviously necessary to make a complete working installation,
including those required by the authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
.10
Install all ceiling mounted components (diffusers, grilles, etc.) in strict accordance with reflected
ceiling plans, and instructions from the Consultant.
.11
The mechanical plans show approximate locations for wall mounted devices. Obtain Consultant's
approval of mounting heights and locations before commencement of work.
.12
The Mechanical Contractor shall provide a list of the foreman for each trade who will be involved
with this project prior to the start of construction. The list is to contain their credentials and a list of
previous projects that they have been involved with.
.13
The Mechanical Contractor is to provide a list of unit prices for labour rates and overhead and
profit for notice of changes for Mechanical Contractor and sub-contractor's prior to the start of
construction. Refer to Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical.
1.5
Examine Site
.1
Examine the site and the local conditions and Conditions affecting the work. Examine carefully the
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical and all other drawings and the complete
specifications to ensure that the work can be satisfactorily carried out as shown. Before
commencing work, examine the work of the other Divisions and report at once any defect or
interference affecting the work, the completion, or the guarantee of the work of this Division. No
allowance will be made later for any expenses incurred through the failure to make these
examinations or to report any such discrepancies in writing to the Consultant.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 4
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.6
Subcontractor's Shop
.1
1.7
Provide Job site office, work-shop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to complete
the work of Division 15.
Cleaning
.1
During the performance of the work and on the completion, remove from the place of the work all
debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the performance of the work for Division 15.
Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.2
All equipment shall be thoroughly vacuumed out at the time of final acceptance of the work.
1.8
Temporary Services
.1
1.9
Refer to Section 01500 for requirements on temporary mechanical services for construction,
temporary sanitary facilities, and potable water.
Installation of Work
.1
Be responsible for:
.1
The layout of the work of Division 15, and for any damage caused to the Owner, or other
Divisions of the contract by improper location or carrying out of this work.
.2
The prompt installation of the work of Division 15 in advance of concrete pouring or similar
work.
.3
The protection of finished and unfinished work and equipment and work of other Divisions
from damage due to the carrying out of the work of Division 15.
.4
The condition of all material and equipment supplied under Division 15, and for the
protection and maintenance of work completed.
.2
Coordinate with other trades and schedule all work to suit the date for the substantial performance
established in the construction contract.
.3
Furnish items to be "built-up" in ample time and give necessary information and assistance in
connection with the building in of the same.
.4
Provide drawings showing all sleeving and openings required. Notify the General Contractor of the
size and location of recesses, openings and chases before walls, floors, etc., are erected.
.5
Proceed with the work as quickly as practical so that construction may be completed in as short a
time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.
.6
Ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the building schedule. Provide a
schedule of equipment deliveries to the General Contractor within the time limit stipulated.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 5
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.7
Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.8
Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their installation shall be installed in strict
accordance with those instructions.
1.10
Codes, Permits, Fees And Connections
.1
Conform to Federal, Provincial and Municipal regulations and perform work in accordance with
requirements of By-Laws and Regulations in force in area where the building is to be erected.
.2
Apply for, obtain, and pay for permits, fees and service connections for the work of this Division
and the inspections required by Authorities having jurisdiction in the area where the building is to be
erected.
For information, a specific code or standard might be mentioned. This information must not be
taken as the only code or standard applicable.
.3
When part of equipment does not bear the required CSA label, the contractor shall obtain from
CSA or Hydro Electric Power Commission, when that part of the equipment is an electric
component, a special approval and pay the applicable fees.
.4
Furnish necessary certificates as evidence that the work installed conforms with laws and
regulations of Authorities having jurisdiction. Changes in work requested by an Authority having
jurisdiction shall be carried out without charge.
.5
Mechanical Contractor will be responsible to apply to TSSA for any necessary approvals.
1.11
Materials
.1
Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by the manufacturer,
brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish standards of desired
quality style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Materials so specified shall be
furnished under this Contract, unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two or more
designations are listed, the contractor shall choose one of those listed and state the choice made
on the "Supplementary Bid Form - Mechanical".
.2
The use of equivalent, alternate and/or substitute materials and equipment is subject to the
following:
.1
Where the use of equivalent, alternate or substitute equipment alters the design or space
requirements indicated on the plans, the contractor for Division 15 shall include all items of
cost for the revised design and construction, including cost of all the related trades
involved.
.2
Acceptance of the proposed equivalents, alternates or substitutions shall be subject to the
approval of the Consultant and, if requested by the Consultant, the Mechanical
Subcontractor shall submit samples of both the specified and the proposed items for
review.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 6
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.3
1.12
In all cases where the use of equivalents, alternates or substitutions is permitted, the
Mechanical Subcontractor shall bear any extra costs of independent testing agencies of
evaluating the quality of materials and the equipment to be installed.
Equivalents and Alternates
.1
Should the base Mechanical Subcontractor propose to furnish material and equipment other than
those specified, he shall apply in writing to the Consultant for approval of equivalents at least
fourteen days prior to opening of Bids, submitting with his request for approval complete
descriptive and technical data on the item or items he proposes to furnish. Approval for changes in
base bid specifications will be considered only upon individual requests of the Subcontractors. No
blanket approval for equipment will be given to suppliers, distributors or contractors.
.2
Unless requests for changes in base bid specifications are received and approved prior to the
opening of the bids, as defined above, the Subcontractors will be held to furnish specified items
under his base bid. After the Contract is awarded changes in specifications will be made only as
defined in Article: Material Substitutions (15010 1.13).
.3
Equipment of the Subcontractors' choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the
specifications, in the space provided in the Supplementary Bid Form. Alternate proposals must be
accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the article proposed, together with a
statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid if the alternate is accepted.
Prior approval from the Consultant is not required on items submitted as alternate bids, but the
decision on acceptance of the alternate(s) will rest with the Consultant.
.4
Unspecified materials and/or rejected alternates built into the work shall be replaced with specified
or accepted materials at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.13
Material Substitutions
.1
1.14
After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than those
specifically named in the Contract Documents may be approved by the Consultant as specified in
Division 1, Section 01620.
Shop Drawings and Samples
.1
Submit to the Consultant detailed dimension shop drawings and installation wiring diagrams for all
mechanical equipment. Further details and special requirements called for in these specifications
shall be shown on the shop drawings.
.2
Provide shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 Section 01340.
.3
Ensure that copies of all reviewed shop drawings are available on the job site for reference.
.4
Provide samples of mechanical equipment as requested in the specification in accordance with
Division 1 Section 01340 at the same time as the shop drawing submission.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 7
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.15
As-built Drawings
.1
Maintain up to date Aas built@ drawings on site and submit at completion of the project as specified
in Division 1, Section 01340.
.2
All final as-built drawings shall be submitted in AutoCad Version 2008. Submit to Consultant two
(2) sets.
.3
After completion of the Work, obtain Cad drawings, from the Consultant. The electronic files will
be in AutoCad Version 2008. Update the AutoCad drawings to include as-built conditions. Submit
electronic files on CD Rom disc plus two (2) additional sets of white prints to the Consultant for
review. Any subsequent changes found by the Consultant shall remain the responsibility of the
Contractor at no charge to the Owner.
1.16
Temporary and Trial Usage
.1
After any part of the work for Division 15 has been completed, the Consultant will make an
inspection, and performance tests of such parts shall be carried out under the direction of the
Consultant. If deficiencies are found, they shall be immediately rectified to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. After such deficiencies have been rectified, the work shall be placed in service at such
time and in such order as the Consultant may direct. If, in placing a portion of the equipment in
service, it is necessary to make temporary connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper
operation, such connections shall be provided to the extent and in the manner required by the
Consultant.
.2
Temporary or trial usage of any mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or
materials shall not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3
No claims for damage will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of such work
which may be used.
1.17
Consultant's Instructions
.1
1.18
During construction the Consultant will issue such instructions as may be necessary for verification
and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding as part of the specification.
Additional Work and Changes
.1
Refer to General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions GC 11 and GC 12 for extra work
unless a written order, countersigned or otherwise approved by the Consultant, for such work is
given.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 8
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.19
Warrantee
.1
The Contractor for Division 15 shall guarantee all work and apparatus installed under his contract
against all defects of workmanship and material for a period of one (2) year after the substantial
performance of the work , unless otherwise mentioned in the specifications, and shall make good
any and all defects developing during such time without expense to the Owner. Any materials shall
be further guaranteed as may be called for in these specifications. Where warranties on
equipment extend beyond one (1) years the Contractor for Division 15 shall honor the extended
warranty.
.2
The control system shall be guaranteed for a period of one (2) year as identified in Section 15900
of the Specification.
1.20
Itemized Prices
.1
Provide itemized prices for the items listed in the Supplementary Bid Form - General or
Mechanical. Show itemized prices as individually broken out prices on the Supplementary Tender
Form and DO include them in the overall price.
.2
Submit itemized prices for the following:
1.21
.1
Replacement of control valve, wall mounted thermostat and associated isolating valves for
the entire reheat coils for all the three floors. Itemized price shall be broken down into unit
pricing.
.1
Replacement of all flex connections serving existing perimeter units for all three floors.
Itemized price shall be broken down into unit pricing.
Separate Price
.1
1.22
Provide separate prices for the items listed as individual prices on the Supplementary Bid Form Mechanical and DO NOT include them in the overall price.
Scheduling of Work
.1
1.23
For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to construction schedule detailed in other
parts of the contract, and/or as prepared by the General Contractor.
Performance Bond - Cash Allowance
.1
1.24
Refer to Division 1 for details of Bonding requirements and Cash Allowances.
Energy Consumption
.1
The Consultant may reject equipment submitted for approval on basis of performance or energy
consumed or demanded.
.2
All equipment installed on the project shall conform to the requirements outlined in ASHRAE 90.1.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 9
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.25
Equipment Requirements And Installation
.1
Permit equipment maintenance and disassembly by use of unions or flanges to minimize
disturbance to connecting piping and duct systems and without interference from building structure
or other equipment.
.2
Provide accessible means for lubricating equipment including permanent lubricated bearings.
.3
For all base mounted pumps, air handling units, fans and other rotating equipment, provide
chamfered edge housekeeping pads a minimum of 100 mm high and 100 mm larger than
equipment dimensions all around. Installation of the housekeeping pads shall be in accordance
with the requirements outlined in Division 03300. Work shall be performed by the trades
specializing in this work.
.4
Pipe drain lines to drains.
.5
Line-up equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items with building walls wherever possible.
.6
Provide supports such as saddles, platforms etc., for equipment including but not limited to heat
exchanger, hot water storage tanks, holding tanks and chemical feed tanks, as required for
complete installation.
1.26
Thermometers And Pressure Gauges
.1
.2
General:
.1
Locate direct reading thermometers and gauges for reading from floor or platform.
.2
Provide remote reading thermometers and gauges where direct reading instruments
cannot be satisfactorily located.
.3
Locate engraved lamacoid nameplate as specified in Section Identification, identifying
medium adjacent to thermometers and gauges.
Thermometers:
.1
Industrial, 228 mm adjustable angle cast aluminum case, CGSB standard CAN/CGSB14.4-M88 red reading mercury, lens front tube, white scale black embossed figures, clear
glass or acrylic window, tapered aluminum stem.
.2
Scale shall be suitable for 2 times the temperature range of service. Scale shall be
combined Celsius and Fahrenheit.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 10
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.3
1.27
Pressure Gauges:
.1
115 mm dial, solid front blow out back, fibreglass reinforced polypropylene case,
phosphor bronze bourdon tube and brass 1/4" N.P.T. socket, bottom connection, stainless
steel rotary type movement, gauge to be registered with the Provincial Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Safety Branch with a registration number and conform to ANSI B40.1. Accuracy to
be grade "A".
.2
On pumps liquid filled gauges shall be utilized.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Weiss, Ashcroft, Trerice.
.4
Provide bronze stop cock, bronze bar stock 1/4" N.P.T. bronze porous core pressure
snubber for pulsating operation and diaphragm for corrosive service.
.5
Use materials compatible with system requirements.
.6
Gauges shall have combined kilopascal and psi scales.
Electric Motors, Equipment And Control
.1
.2
Electrical work to conform to Division 16 including the following:
.1
Except where specified otherwise in Division 16, Division 15 shall provide all control wiring
and interlocks as may be required by the mechanical equipment.
.2
Quality of materials and workmanship shall be strictly in conformance with Division 16.
.3
Division 15 shall review the shop drawings for the motor starters submitted by Division 16
to ensure that all field connections are shown, motor horsepowers and voltages are
correct and that the motor control schematic reflects all mechanical requirements.
.4
Unless specifically noted otherwise on the mechanical drawings, Division 15 shall provide
and install all variable speed controllers for 120V/ 1ph exhaust fans or the On/Off shown
on the mechanical drawings.
Motors
.1
Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2
If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of any equipment, install an
acceptable motor for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until
specified motor is installed.
.3
All motors shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with CSA requirements.
.4
Motor speed shall be 1750 rpm unless otherwise specified.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 11
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.5
All motors shall be "T" frame CEMA Standard Design "B" with Class "B" insulation, 40 C
ambient, standard drip-proof with a 1.15 service factor, or as otherwise specified. Motors
in air stream or exposed shall be TEFC type.
.6
Motors shall be of adequate size to operate associated equipment and drive mechanisms
under all conditions of load and service and to bring equipment up to operating speed
within 13 seconds without overloading, and be not less than the nameplate HP specified
or indicated on the Drawings.
.7
Integral HP motor sizes 1/2HP and above shall be squirrel cage induction motors rated
575 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, unless noted otherwise.
.8
Fractional HP motors up to but not including 1/2 hp shall be rated 120 volt, single phase,
60 hertz and will be capacitor start, induction motors, with adequate thrust capacity when
used with direct mounted equipment, and shall be provided with integral overload and
overheating protection. Shaded pole starting devices will not be accepted.
.9
Multi-speed motors and associated switching devices shall be circuited to protect the
motor at each speed.
.10
All motors, 1 H.P and up shall comply with the Ontario Hydro EnerMark Motor Efficiency
Level as tested either CSA 390 M 1985, or IEEE 112B, and be approved under the
Canadian Electrical Safety Code.
.11
All starter panels shall be lockable in accordance with the requirements outlined in the
Division 16000 Specifications. All panels provided by a single manufacturer shall have a
key which fits all panels and shall be supplied with locks.
.12
Motors shall meet the following levels of efficiency:
Motor
Size (HP)
Efficiency
@ 3600 RPM (%)
Efficiency
@ 1800 RPM (%)
Efficiency
@ 1200 RPM (%)
Efficiency
@ 900 RPM (%)
1
75.5
82.5
80
74
1.5
82.5
84
85.5
77
2
84
84
86.5
82.5
3
85.5
87.5
87.5
84
5
87.5
87.5
87.5
85.5
7.5
88.2
89.5
89.5
85.5
10
89.5
89.5
89.5
88.5
15
90.2
91
90.2
88.5
For motors HP which are not listed the efficiencies shall be interpolated based on this
table.
NOTE: The above Table is the latest at time of writing. Contractor to provide motors as
per latest revisions to Ontario Hydro data for motor efficiency levels.
All motors 20Hp and up shall be provided with thermistor protection. Division 15 to
submit shop drawings for approval. Division 16 to wire thermistors where starters are
supplied by Division 16. For packaged equipments, which Division 15 supplies the
starters, the unit shall be either prewired or the wiring shall be carried out by Division 15.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 12
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.28
V-belt Drives
.1
Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts on unit to be matched set.
.2
Use steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys.
.3
For motors 1.3 HP to 10 HP: standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having +/-10% range. Use
mid-position of range for specified r/min.
.4
For motors over 10 HP: Sheave with split tapered bushing and keyway having fixed pitch unless
specifically required for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size to suit balancing.
.5
Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within
manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts.
.6
Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment.
.7
Tension belts to manufacturer's recommendations before start up and after the first 100 h of
operation using calibrated belt tensioning gauge.
.8
38 mm dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer.
.9
Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place.
.10
Install belt guards to permit movement of motors for adjusting belt tension.
.11
For flexible couplings, provide removable, "U" shaped, 2.7 mm thick galvanized frame and 1.2 mm
thick expanded mesh face.
.12
Provide 19 mm galvanized mesh wire screen on inlet or outlet of exposed fan blades.
.13
Provide belt and rotating shaft guards for exposed drives and shafts.
1.29
Pipe Hangers and Supports
.1
Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. If necessary, use grid system in equipment
room.
.2
For pipes up to 4 NPS, approved type expansion shields and bolts may be used. All drilling for
hangers, rod inserts and work of similar nature shall be completed by Division 15.
.3
Adjustable clevis type hanger: on all sizes of pipes. Use roller type hangers as required.
.1
Standard of Acceptance: Myatt, Grinnell.
.2
Adjust full clevis type hanger to MSS-SP58-1979, type 1, ULC listed.
.1 For all non-copper pipes, typical Grinnell figure 260.
.2 For all copper pipes, use copper plated, Grinnell figure CT-65.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 13
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.3
Riser clamp carbon steel to MSS-SP58-1979, type 42, ULC listed.
.1 Grinnell Figure 261 for steel and cast iron.
.2 Grinnell Figure CT-121 for copper pipes.
.4
Provide spring hangers where required to offset expansion on horizontal runs which follow long
vertical risers.
.5
Govern spacing between pipe rack supports using smallest pipe size.
.6
Use rod diameters and spacing for pipe supports as shown in table with following exceptions:
.1
Support plumbing piping in accordance with more stringent requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction or as specified.
.2
Support NPS 1/2 gas pipe every 1.8 m.
.3
Support NPS 1/2 copper pipe every 1.5 m.
.4
Support flexible joint roll grooved pipe in accordance with table below, but not less than
one hanger for each joint.
.5
Support fire protection piping in accordance with N.F.P.A. codes.
.6
Support plumbing piping in accordance with plumbing code, and the following:
.1 Support all vertical soil pipe, vents, waste stacks and rain water leaders at every floor
with steel pipe clamps.
Pipe
Size NPS
Rod
Diameter
Maximum Spacing:
Steel
Copper
up to, 3/4
10 mm
2.1 m
1.8 m
1
10 mm
2.1 m
1.8 m
1-1/4
10 mm
2.1 m
1.8 m
1-1/2
10 mm
2.7 m
2.4 m
2
10 mm
3m
2.7 m
2-1/2
10 mm
3.6 m
3m
3
10 mm
3.6 m
3m
3-1/2
10 mm
3.9 m
3.3 m
4
16 mm
4.2 m
3.6 m
.7
Place support within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.
.8
Hangers shall be 3 piece minimum standard ie attachment, rod, pipe attachment.
.9
Mild steel wall hooks may be used to support non-expanding piping. Allow 25 mm minimum
clearance for insulated pipe.
.10
Provide riser clamps as indicated and where required.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 14
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.11
On uninsulated copper piping, use Teflon coated hangers.
.12
Provide saddles for all insulated pipes and prefabricated insulation shields with high density
insulation with vapour barriers for domestic cold water and chilled water piping.
.1
Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell Saddles 160 or 165, Grinnell Shields 167:, Myatt: Apex.
.13
Offset hanger pipe and structural attachments in such a manner that rod is vertical when piping
is hot.
.14
Adjust hanger rods to equalize load.
.15
Provide hanger within 600 mm on each side of valve, elbow or tee.
.16
All hangers shall be directly hung from the structure. No hangers shall be installed or supported
off other pipes, ducts, equipment, or steel decks.
.17
Where necessary to support piping from floor, use concrete pier base with cast iron pipe rest with
floor flange and pipe roll stands.
1.30
Sleeves
.1
Pipe and duct sleeves: at points where pipes pass through masonry or concrete.
.2
Sleeves of: minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints at partition walls.
.3
Use cast iron sleeve or steel pipe sleeves with annular fin continuously welded at midpoint:
.4
.1
Through foundation walls.
.2
Where sleeve are specified to extends above finished floor.
Sizes
.1
6 mm clearance all around, between sleeve and pipes or between sleeve and insulation.
.2
Where piping passes below footings, provide minimum clearance of 50 mm between
sleeve and pipe. Backfill up to underside of footing with concrete of same strength as
footing.
.5
Terminate sleeves flush with surface of concrete and masonry and 100 mm above floors. Not
applicable to concrete floors on grade.
.6
For pipes passing through roofs, use cast iron sleeves with caulking recess and flashing clamp
device. Anchor sleeves in roof construction; caulk between sleeve recess and pipe; fasten roof
flashing to clamp device; make water-tight durable joint.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 15
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.7
.1
For sleeves and pipe in foundation walls and below grade floors, provide "seal link" clamp,
manufactured by Thunderline.
.2
Where sleeves pass through walls or floors, caulk space between insulation and sleeve or
between pipe (duct) and sleeve with waterproof fire retardant non-hardening mastic. Seal
space at each end of sleeve with waterproof, fire retardant, non-hardening mastic.
.3
Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.
.4
Fill future-use sleeves with easily removable fire stop filler.
.5
Coat exposed exterior surfaces of ferrous sleeves with heavy application of zinc rich paint.
.8
Where pipes and ducts pass through fire rated walls, floors and partitions, pack space with fire
stopping materials as specified in 07250.
.9
Install sleeves following approval of interference drawings specified in Division 1.
.10
On typical floors, provide one diameter between adjacent sleeves.
.11
Extend sleeves 6" above floors in mechanical rooms and all areas where waterproofing is
required.
.12
All sleeves shall be as per detailed on drawings.
.13
All sleeve locations including dimensions shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer for review.
.14
The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for showing all sleeve locations required by the
Division 15 Sub-Contractors on the interference drawings.
.15
The Division 15 Contractor shall be responsible for installing all of the sleeves required for the
Division 15 Contract and the Division 15 Sub-Contractors.
1.31
1.32
Fill voids around pipes.
Escutcheons and Plates
.1
Provide on pipes passing through finished walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.
.2
Use chrome or nickel plated brass, solid type with set screws for ceiling or wall mounting. All
escutcheons and plates in exhibition spaces shall be flat black.
.3
Inside diameter shall fit around finished pipe. Outside diameter shall cover opening or sleeve.
.4
Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheons or plates shall clear sleeve extension.
.5
Secure to pipe or finished surface but not to insulation.
Tests
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 16
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.1
Do not insulate or conceal work until tested and approved. Follow construction schedule and
arrange for tests.
.1
Hydraulically test piping systems at 1-1/2 times system design pressure or minimum
860 kPa, whichever is greater. Design pressure is defined as the pressure relief valve
setting. Design pressure is defined as the pressure (off) relief valve setting.
.2
Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.
.3
Bear costs including retesting and making good.
.4
Pipe pressure:
.5
1.33
.1
Hydraulically test piping systems at 1- 1/2 times system operating pressure or minimum
860 kPa, whichever is greater.
.2
Maintain test pressures without loss for 4h unless otherwise specified.
.3
Test drainage, waste and vent piping to code.
Prior to tests, isolate all equipment or other parts which are not designed to withstand test
pressures.
Painting
.1
Apply at least one coat of corrosion resistant primer paint to supports, and equipment fabricated
from ferrous metals.
.2
Touch-up paint all damaged equipment with products matching original finish in quality and
appearance.
.3
Provide flat black painting behind grilles and diffusers.
1.34
Special Tools and Spare Parts
.1
.2
Furnish spare parts as follows:
.1
One set of v-belts/bolts for each piece of machinery.
.2
One spare set of filters for each filter bank installed.
Upon completion of project and immediately before hand-over, replace all filters.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 17
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.35
Access Doors
.1
Supply access doors for furred ceilings or spaces for servicing equipment and accessories or for
inspection of life safety or operating devices for installation under section erecting the walls or
ceilings. All parts of the installation requiring periodic maintenance shall be made accessible.
.2
Access doors shall be flush mounted 600 x 600 mm for body entry and 300 x 300 mm for hand
entry unless otherwise noted. Doors shall open 180 have rounded safety corners, concealed
hinges, screwdriver latches and anchor straps. Steel shall be prime coated.
.3
Supply stainless steel access doors for tiled surfaces.
.4
On some drawings, access door locations have been indicated for coordination. The drawings do
not show all access doors required.
.5
The contractor shall provide a set of drawings showing locations and types of all access doors
located in public areas to the Consultant for approval, prior to commencing the installation of any
piping or ductwork within these areas.
.6
Access doors in dry wall and plaster ceilings shall have dish-shaped door and welded metal lath,
ready to take plaster. Provide a plastic grommet for door key access.
.7
Access doors shall have fire rating of wall or ceiling in which they are to be installed.
.8
Provide fire rated access doors as required. Refer to architectural drawings for fire rating of
walls/ceilings.
.9
Conform to the requirements outlined in section 09250 of the specification.
.10
Standard of Acceptance: Mifab, Zurn, Acudor, Watrous.
1.36
Dielectric Couplings
.1
Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.
.2
Provide solating unions for pipe sizes NPS 2 and under and flanges for pipe sizes over NPS 2.
.3
Cast brass adapters may be used on domestic water systems and where approved by the
Consultant.
.4
Provide rubber gaskets to prevent dissimilar metals contact.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 18
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.37
Instruction of Operating Staff
.1
Supply certified personnel to instruct operating staff on operation of mechanical equipment. Supply
maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and adjustment of
mechanical equipment and any changes or modification in equipment made under terms of
guarantee.
.2
Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn-over to operating staff
for regular operation.
.3
Use operation and maintenance data manual for instruction purposes. On completion of
instruction, turn manuals over to the Consultant.
.4
Scheduling of the timing for the training of the operating staff shall be arranged 45 days prior to the
completion of the project.
1.38
Maintenance Manuals
.1
Provide minimum of six (6) copies of Mechanical Maintenance Manuals, in accordance to the
following and Section 01340.
.2
Mechanical Maintenance Manuals to be delivered to the Engineer's office 60 days prior to the
completion of the Contract.
.3
Manuals to be bound in a hard cover neatly labelled: "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS".
.4
The Maintenance Manuals shall be divided into sections with neatly labelled and tabbed dividers
between each section. The sections to be included in the manual are:
.1
Section I - General.
.2
Section II - Piping and Pump Systems.
.3
Section III - Heating, Air Conditioning and Ventilation.
.4
Section IV - Automatic Controls.
.5
Section V - Sprinkler System.
.6
Section VI - Balancing Reports
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 19
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.5
The following information shall be contained within the sections:
.1
SECTION I: A list giving name, address and telephone number of the Consultant,
Engineers, General Contractor, Mechanical Trade and Controls Trade. Written guarantees
for the Mechanical Systems. A copy of the Valve directory giving number, valve location,
normal valve position, and purpose of valve. A framed copy of Valve Directory to be hung
in Mechanical Room. Equipment lists and certificates shall be provided. Certificates shall
be signed and sealed by the appropriate suppliers. All equipment are to be inspected by
the manufacturer to ensure that the equipment has been installed in accordance with their
recommendations.
.2
SECTION II, III, and IV: A copy of all pressure tests and operational tests for pumping
system. A copy of Gas Operational Tests for gas fired equipment. A list giving name,
address and telephone number of all suppliers. A copy of all approved Shop Drawings.
.1 Copies of warranties.
.3
1.39
SECTION IV: Complete Control Diagrams, Wiring Diagrams and description of Control
system and the functioning of the system.
Flashing
.1
Coordinate with requirements for roofing, water-proofing and flashing in Division 7.
.2
Flash mechanical parts passing through, or built into a roof. Leave flashing as directed by the
Roofing Trade to permit Roofing Trade to make a watertight connection.
.3
Provide copper or lead flashing for pipes and ducts passing through waterproof walls.
.4
Provide copper or lead flashing for pipes and ducts passing through waterproof floors.
.5
Co-operate with Division 7 at all times, and do not break any waterproofing seal without consent of
the Waterproofing Trade. Provide piping passing through waterproof walls with extra heavy cast
iron sleeves with asphalt roofing wrapped around so as to leave a 25 mm x 50 mm recessed on
both sides of wall. These recesses and the space between pipe and sleeve shall be caulked as
specified in Section 07900.
.6
Fit counter flashing over flashing or curb, and make watertight.
1.40
Curbs
.1
Prefabricated curbs for mechanical equipment will be provided by Division 15. Built-up curbs will
be supplied and installed under work of other sections, except as specified herein and noted on the
drawings.
.2
It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Trade to supply detailed requirements for curbs,
including their locations, sizes and materials to be used, and loads imposed on the curbs.
.3
Curbs are required for roof mounted equipment, surrounding holes where groups of pipes and/or
ducts pass through equipment room floors, and where indicated on the Drawings.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 20
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
Roof curbs shall be minimum 305 mm (12") height above finished roof.
.5
Curbs around holes in equipment room floors shall be concrete or steel, extending at least 150
mm 6" above finished floor. Make watertight connection between curb and floor.
.6
Fill spaces between curbs and pipes and ducts with glass fibre material. Caulk with fire resistant
waterproof compound to make watertight connection.
1.41
Concrete
.1
All concrete work required by Division 15 shall be done by this Division in accordance with Sections
03100, 03200, and 03300.
.2
Refer to Article 26, Section 15010 for requirements for housekeeping pad.
1.42
Metals
.1
1.43
Steel construction required solely for the work of Mechanical Subcontractor and not shown on
Architectural or Structural Drawings shall be supplied and installed by this Subcontractor in
accordance with applicable requirements of Division 5, Metals, Structural and Miscellaneous.
Cutting and Patching
.1
Cutting and patching shall be in accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions, and
Section 01450 and the following:
.1
All cutting and patching shall be done by the trades specializing in the materials to be cut
and is covered by the appropriate Divisions of this specification. Prepare drawings in
conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings for passage through
structure and all insert sizes and locations. Where this information is not furnished in time,
the Subtrade contractor for this Division shall bear the cost of all sleeving, provision for
inserts, cutting and patching.
.2
Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a
location and manner as approved by the Consultant.
.3
Where slabs in the portions of the building which are existing must be sawcut or core
drilled, all locations shall be x-rayed prior to sawcutting or core-drilling. All X-raying shall
be done by personnel qualified in the use of the type of equipment required to x-ray the
sawcuts shall be permitted to perform this work on the site. No allowance will be made
later for expenses incurred through the failure of performing these x-rays.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 21
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.44
Excavation and Backfill
.1
Refer to Division 2 Section 02200 - All Excavation and Backfill, shall be carried out by Division 2 in
accordance herewith except as modified by this Article. Division 15 to co-ordinate with Division 2.
Preparation of final pipe bedding and backfilling the first 150 mm will be by Division 15.
.2
Where rock or shale is encountered, arrange to have this excavated and removed by
Section 02220 expense. After excavation, backfill with a bedding of 10 mm crushed stone.
.1
Pipe bedding as a minimum shall meet the requirements of the local municipality.
Minimum Class B bedding to be provided. Bedding shall conform to the following: Pipe
bedding as a minimum shall meet the requirements of the local municipality. Minimum
Class B bedding to be provided. Bedding shall conform to the following: The bedding
material should be placed in lifts not exceeding 150 mm and compacted to a minimum of
100% standard Proctor maximum dry density (SPMDD). The performance of the pipe is
dependent on good compaction of the bedding material. The compaction at the bottom
and adjacent to the pipe should be stringently carried out. If any water from more previous
sand seams and layers results in wet trench conditions 19 mm HL6 clear stone may be
used to provide a stable base. Clear stone must be wrapped with an approved geotextile
(Terrafi 270R or equivalent) to prevent the migration of fines which could result in
differential settlement. Where rock or shale is encountered, this shall be excavated and
removed by the Contractor. After excavation, backfill with a bedding of 0.40" (10mm)
crushed stone.
.3
Prepare new bedding under the pipe in unstable soil, in fill, and in all cases where pipe bedding
has been removed in earlier excavation, particularly near perimeter walls of buildings, at manholes
and catch basins. Compact to maximum possible density and support the pipe by 200 mm (8
inches) thick firm supports. Install reinforcing steel in cradle or construct piers every eight feet or
closer, down to solid load bearing strata. Provide a minimum of one pier per length of pipe. Use
same method where pipes cross.
.4
Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any footing, backfill with
25 mPa concrete to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Proximity is determined by the angle
of repose as established by the consultant.
.5
Provide support over at least the bottom one half segment of the pipe in all bedding methods.
.6
Before backfilling, obtain approval. Remove all shoring during backfill.
.7
Backfill trenches within building, with clean sharp sand or gravel in individual layers of maximum
150 mm (6") thickness, compacted to a density of 100% Standard Proctor. Hand compact the first
layers up to a compacted level of minimum 300 mm (12") above the top of pipe. Hand or machine
compact the balance up to grade, using approved equipment.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 22
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.8
Fill all depressions to a correct grade level with appropriate material. After a period has passed
adequate to reveal any settlement, use maximum possible compaction. Pay all costs required to
make good all damages caused by settlement.
.9
Dispose of excavated materials as specified in Section 02220.
1.45
Performance Tests
.1
After all equipment has been installed, adjusted, balanced and started up, subject equipment to a
series of performance tests, as soon as conditions permit.
.2
The timing of the tests shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Consultant, and the
manner and duration shall be as the Consultant deems necessary. Record the daily start and stop
times, operating hours and functions performed. Ensure that the performance tests are witnessed
by the Consultant.
.3
Operate equipment under varying load conditions, demonstrate start-up sequence, normal
shutdown, simulated emergency shutdown, operation of temperature, etc., and safety controls.
Operate switches and electrical devices for correct wiring sequences. Adjust components to
achieve a proper functional relationship among all the components of all the systems. Repeat
these functions as many times as deemed necessary by the Consultant to achieve reliable
operation.
.4
Repair defects and repeat tests as necessary. During test maintain lubrication schedule, set, align
and tension drives.
1.46
Mechanical Systems Commissioning
.1
At the successful completion of Performance Tests and all testing and balancing, make the
systems ready for final inspection and subsequent acceptance of the Owner. Replace and clean
filters, clean out ducts and casings, flush out lines and equipment, remove and clean strainers, fill
liquid systems and purge air, clean fan wheels and air coils. Provide water treatment to pipes and
report in accordance to Section 15602.
.2
Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet under "Warrantee@.
.3
Conduct tests to demonstrate operation and ability to meet requirements of all equipment and
freedom from undue noise and vibration at the time of final inspection, having ensured that it has
previously been subjected to Performance Tests.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 23
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.47
Mechanical Project Completion
.1
1.48
1.48.1
1.49
Thirty days prior to substantial performance of work obtain documentation and/or prepare
certification of the following times and submit them to the Owner's representative:
.1
All inspection certificates including Boiler and Plumbing.
.2
Guarantee certificates as called for under "Guarantee".
.3
Record drawings.
.4
Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.5
Test certifications as called for under "Testing".
.6
Provide a signed statement to the effect that all tests for mechanical systems and
equipment have been completely carried out in the Trade Sections of these Specifications
and to the manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with the requirements of
all authorities having jurisdiction.
Work Within The Existing Building
Refer to Division 15 Section 15065 for the requirements for work within existing buildings.
Requests For Information - RFI
1.49.1
The successful Contractor may submit if he chooses, a Request for Information also known as an RFI
to the Consultant Team for clarification to an item within his Scope of Work.
1.49.2
It is understood that an RFI is a form of dialogue between the Contractor and Consultant(s).
1.49.3
In order to expedite the RFI response time, the RFI must be clearly identified and directed to the
Consultant responsible for that work.
1.49.4
All RFI’s that involve a site interference issue shall include the Contractor’s proposed solution to the
interference.
1.49.5
RFI’s must be submitted in a timely manner. The Contractor shall never place the Consultant’s in a
situation where, due to poor planning by the Contractor an RFI requires an immediate response by the
Consultant in order to avoid a delivery date being put in jeopardy.
1.49.6
The Contractor shall submit all RFI’s in a timely manner to ensure that the Construction Schedule is
not impacted.
1.49.7
All RFI’s that are received after 15:00 hrs by the Consultants will be dated for the next working day if it
is a weekday and the following Monday (Tuesday if it is a Statutory Holiday) if it is received on a Friday.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 24
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.49.8
It is the Mechanical Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that RFI’s are directed to the appropriate
Consultant. For example, a slab core drilling request shall be directed to the Structural Engineer, the
Mechanical and Prime Consultants shall be copied.
1.49.9
The Contractor shall submit Individual RFI’s for items that are not related.
1.49.10
The Mechanical Consultant will respond to each RFI within five (5) working days. The Contractor shall
factor this response time into the Schedule and shall submit the RFI’s in a timely manner taking this
into account.
1.49.11
The Contractor should submit RFI’s as issues arise rather than accumulating multiple RFI and
submitting them together. Where multiple RFI’s are issued at the same time the Contractor shall
identify the order of priority for each RFI. If an order of priority is not received they will be dated and
processed in the order of receipt. If Multiple RFI’s are received at the same time the five (5) working
day response time may not be applicable.
1.50
Division 15 / Division 16 Work
.1
All starters, motor control centres etc., along with input and output power wiring will be by
Division 16. This is with the exception of packaged units.
.2
Packaged units will have integral starters and only power feeders need be provided. The
packaged unit starters will be by Division 15.
.3
Division 16 to provide all lugs and terminals for line and load power wiring terminations.
.4
Division 16 to provide all remote disconnect switches.
.5
All control wiring except fire alarm shall be by Division 15. Fan shutdown connection shall be by
Division 16.
.6
Voltage for motors 1/2 HP and larger will be 600 V 3 phase. Under 1/2 HP will be 120 V.
.7
All multi-speed motors to be consequent pole.
.8
All motors shall be by Division 15.
.9
No two-speed double winding motors to be used unless prior notice is given by the Consultants.
.10
Thermistor protection to be provided in motors 20 HP and larger using approved thermistors.
.11
Thermistors imbedded in the motor will be provided by Division 15.
.12
Division 16 to provide manual reset devices for motor starters for thermistor interface. Division 15
to provide wiring from the motor thermistor to motor starter (resettable).
.13
Division 15 shall provide (1) one set of reviewed shop drawings to Division 16 Contractor for review
of Division 15 shop drawings for electrical content.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15010
Page 25
April 25, 2013
MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.14
Division 16 to wire smoke dampers with end switches.
.15
All end switches will be by Division 15.
.16
Division 16 to wire EP switches for smoke damper control.
.17
All relays required for Division 15 will be by Division 15.
.18
Division 15 to provide all pressure switches, supervisory valves, flow switches, dry pipe alarm
valves, etc. for interface to fire alarm system. All wiring of these items shall be by Division 16.
.19
All electric tracing will be by Division 15 with power connections by Division 16. All electric tracing
will be 208V single phase. All electric tracing will be self-limiting type of cable. Exception: Gutter
tracing shall be by Division 16.
.20
All electric heating units will be supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 16 as per
Division 15 layout.
.21
All power wiring between electrical panels, to point of use will be by Division 16. All control wiring
associated with the Work of Division 15 shall be by Division 15 and Section 15900. Power wiring
for control panels shall be by Division 15900. Division 16 to allow additional outlets in the electrical
panels. All control transformers shall be supplied and installed by Division 15. All power wiring
shall be by Division 16, the only exception being electrical wiring for packaged equipment, supplied
by Division 15, from equipment control panel to point of use will be by Division 15, unless otherwise
noted on electrical drawings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15051
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DEMOLITION
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
The General Conditions, Instructions to Bidders, Division 1, any Supplements and/or Addenda
thereto form an integral part of this specification and must be read in conjunction herewith.
.2
Co-ordinate with Division 02070 - Demolition.
1.2
Description
.1
Review drawings, site conditions, and other specification sections to ascertain the extent and
nature of work of this section. The contractor shall visit the site during the tender period to evaluate
the extent of demolition work.
.2
Dimensions indicated on the drawings are approximate and are for information only. Reference
shall be made to existing base building drawings. Contractors can review these drawings at the
office of Crossey Engineering. Viewing is by appointment only.
1.3
Submittals
.1
1.4
Submit a pre-demolition inspection report unless otherwise specified. Ensure the Owner of
premises being inspected is represented at inspection.
Quality Assurance
.1
Conform to requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.
.2
Temporary protection: Unless otherwise specified, provide and maintain all necessary protection
including hoarding, shoring, bracing, barricades, warning lights and signs, before and during
demolition work.
.3
Conform to all Ministry of Environment requirements and regulations.
1.5
Site Access
.1
1.6
Maintain proper access to site. Provide adequate protection to curbs, sidewalks and the like,
making good any damage at no cost to the Owner. Station guards at vehicular access to direct
traffic and protect public.
Schedule and Method
.1
Prepare schedule in conjunction with overall project schedule, and outline proposed methods.
Obtain approval before commencing demolition work.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15051
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DEMOLITION
1.7
Remaining and Adjacent Structures
.1
Do not interfere with, encumber, endanger or create nuisance, from any cause due to demolition
work, to public property or any adjacent attached and/or detached structures in possession of
owner or others, which are to remain, whether occupied or unoccupied during this work.
.2
Make good damage to such structures resulting from work under this section at no cost to Owner.
Make good adjacent building surfaces damaged by work of this section.
1.8
Protection of Services and Structures
.1
1.9
Take necessary precautions to guard against movement, settlement or collapse of existing
adjacent utility services, public property and/or structures, whether to remain or not. If these or
other unforeseen conditions develop, take immediate emergency measures, report to Consultant,
confirm in wiring, and await instructions before proceeding with any further related demolition work.
Disconnection of Services
.1
Advise proper authorities before disconnecting any existing utility services. Only after receiving
official written clearance from utility concerned shall such services be dismantled. these shall be
disconnected and/or capped off in accordance with utility instructions and established procedures
by tradesmen skilled in work of particular service.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Debris, Salvaged Material and Equipment Disposal
.1
All materials and/or equipment salvaged from demolition work outlined in this Section becomes
property of the mechanical Contractor unless designated otherwise.
.2
Repair or replace satisfactorily, any Owner's material and/or equipment damaged by demolition
work, at no cost to him. Do not sell any salvaged material or equipment directly from project site.
.3
Remove waste debris continually and entirely from project site during demolition work. Do not
load vehicles transporting such debris beyond their allowable capacity or allowable capacity of
local roadways or in manner which might cause spillage on public or private property. Waste
debris must be deposited at authorized dump sites. If spillage does occur, clean up immediately to
prevent traffic hazards or nuisance.
.4
The Scope of Work includes the following:
.1 Removal of mechanical piping and all their associated supports as indicated on the drawings.
.2 Division 15 to coordinate with Division 02070 for demolition work
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15051
Page 3
April 25, 2013
DEMOLITION
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
3.2
Exercise caution in dismantling, or disconnecting work adjacent to existing work designated
to remain.
Completion
.1
3.3
Leave project site graded as directed, reasonably clean and presentable, free from above grade
debris, any salvaged material and/or equipment except those designated to remain property of
Owner and to be stored on-site.
Blank-off
.1
Install blank-off using blind flanges on all removed piping and valves, and as indicated on the
drawings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15065
Page 1
April 25, 2013
WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Reserved
3
EXECUTION
.1
Scheduling of Work:
.1
.2
Owner’s Use of Existing Building:
.1
.3
Notify and obtain agreement from Owner before connecting or making modification to
existing electrical or mechanical services. Disruptions shall be kept to a minimum.
Whenever the Contractor contemplates entering any occupied areas and any existing
floors to carry out Work or to obstruct or take out of use any area, he shall make such
request to the Owner in writing 72 hours before he intends to do the Work. Coordinate all
work with the General Contractor.
The existing buildings will remain in full use and occupancy throughout the majority of the
construction of the Work. Refer to the Schedule provided by the General Contractor.
Protection:
.1
Work shall include temporary, weather tight dust tight partitions between areas, and
enclosing areas within the building where Work is performed.
.2
Protection of existing building, including roofs, shall be substantial enough to prevent
damage to them by falling objects, demolition, and mandatory construction traffic during
new Work.
.3
Protection of property in, or on, existing building shall include equipment, furniture, and
other similar furnishings, hardware, trim, and supplies, whether fixed to building or not.
.4
Take all precautions to ensure that no structural damage is caused to existing building by
demolition and alternation Work.
.5
Ensure during demolition and construction Work that materials, components, and similar
items to be reused are protected from damage, and that measures are taken to keep
down dust and noise at all times.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15065
Page 2
April 25, 2013
WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS
.4
.5
.6
Take extraordinary means to protect relics, weathered surface, and materials and
components which cannot be replaced.
.7
Provide all necessary coverings to protect existing surfaces from damage during course of
renovation.
Removal of Existing Work:
.1
Remove building elements, components, materials, and equipment. Store and protect
materials from damage for re-installation when Work above is complete.
.2
Store and protect relocated items until built into new locations.
.3
Limit removal of items to smallest areas possible, and make good disturbed existing Work.
.4
Remove debris and accumulated dirt from existing building immediately as it accumulates,
on a daily basis. Ensure that during removal operations through the existing building that
existing Work is not damaged and dirt, debris, and dust is not spread.
.5
Maintain Work areas in existing building constantly broom clean to avoid tracking of dirt
into adjacent areas. Immediately clean up debris resulting from Work of Contract that is
deposited in existing building outside of Work areas. Make a daily inspection to ensure that
Work and construction access areas are maintained clean and undamaged as specified.
New and Replacement Work:
.1
Where existing work is altered, do all necessary cutting and fitting required to make
satisfactory connections with existing work so as to leave entire work in a finished and
acceptable condition.
.2
Execute work with least possible interference and disturbance to occupants, public and
normal use of premises. Arrange with Consultant to facilitate execution of work.
.3
Make good all existing materials and finishes, which are not to be removed nor altered, but
which are damaged or disturbed during the progress of work under this contract.
.4
Where existing work is to be made good, match the new work exactly to the old work in
material, form, construction and finish, unless otherwise specified or approved.
.5
Existing ductwork serving adjacent areas shall not be removed until all material for
ductwork replacing it is on site.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15065
Page 3
April 25, 2013
WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS
.6
Where ductwork is being removed and replaced to improve available ceiling heights, the
interference drawings shall show:
.1 All existing services including current duct location;
.2 New duct and service locations;
.3 New ceiling height.
.7
.6
.7
No work shall proceed until interference drawings have been submitted and revised by the
Consultant.
Contractor's Use of Existing Building:
.1
Access of construction personnel to the buildings will be permitted only at locations
approved by the Owner and General Contractor.
.2
Ensure that construction personnel perform Work in existing building only as required
under the Contract, and that they do not use it as access to Work areas, except for Work in
existing building, or for other approved purposes. Access for construction personnel to
their Work areas shall be approved by the Owner before the Work commences.
.3
Use of washroom and other services in existing building by construction personnel is
prohibited, unless agreed upon with the Owner. The Contractor shall clean all spaces
needed at the completion of the job to the satisfaction of the Owner and
General Contractor.
.4
Construction personnel shall use areas of the existing building for their purposes only as
designated by the Owner and the General Contractor only while Work is in progress.
Prohibit lounging and smoking in assigned areas. Keep assigned areas clean under Work
of Contract, and return them to an "as was" condition at completion of construction. Make
good damage to building, fixtures, and fittings caused during use by construction personnel
by replacement with new Work. Include cost of installation and making good of other
Work thereby affected in replacement.
.5
Construction personnel shall use areas of the existing buildings only in a manner as
determined by the Work.
.6
All noisy and disrupted work shall be identified to the Owner and General Contractor with
48 hours minimum notice. Cooperate with the Owner in regards to any special
arrangements which may have to be made as a result.
Existing Services:
.1
Ensure that existing services are not damaged during demolition and construction.
Immediately cut off and cap concealed services uncovered during Work by qualified
mechanical and electrical workers.
.2
Relocate exposed existing mechanical and electrical services where alteration
Work occurs.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15065
Page 4
April 25, 2013
WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS
.3
Do not interrupt mechanical or electrical services of the existing building except for
temporary close-downs to make connections to new Work, and as approved by prior
arrangements with Consultant and Owner. Give the General Contractor, Consultant and
Owner three working days written notice of intention to interrupt mechanical or electrical
services in existing building in any area, and obtain written permission from Owner and
General Contractor.
.4
In no case shall services interruptions affect the total building.
.5
Should existing services be accidentally uncovered and disrupted, make complete
restoration immediately, and provide adequate protection to avoid further disruption until
alternative means of providing permanent continuation of the services are made.
.6
Payment for Work specified in the foregoing shall be made by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner, if, in the opinion of the Consultant, such Work could have
been foreseen at time of tendering and which has been caused by lack of proper care and
protection.
.7
Payment for Work specified in the foregoing shall be paid for by the Owner at standard
rates established in the industry if, in the opinion of the Consultant, such Work could not
have been foreseen at time of tendering.
.8
Advise the General Contractor, Consultant and Owner of the commencement, duration
and termination dates of this Work. Contractor shall keep a record of work hours, number
of workers, tools, equipment rentals, quantities of material used, mileage, etc. to present
with his claim if requested by Consultant or Owner.
.9
Unless otherwise specified, restore services on which Work is performed to
original condition.
.10
Where services such as mechanical equipment, piping or ductwork are to be removed as
part of the demolition work and/or services needs to be removed to facilitate installation of
new services or equipment, the mechanical contractor shall review the site and ensure that
these services are not " live" and that their removal/demolition will not cause any damage
or any disturbance to the building or its occupant.
.11
If there are existing isolation valves in the piping, prior to cutting any of the piping, the
contractor shall examine all of these isolating valves to ensure they are in good working
condition. If they are not in good condition and they can not be counted on to provide
isolation of the system the Contractor shall either freeze the piping or drain it down prior to
making the connection.
.12
If the Contractor discovers any issues or deficiencies with respect to the existing services
during his/her site review the Contractor shall report these issues or deficiencies to the
Consultant prior to any demolition work taking place. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any damage caused by their failure to review the existing systems prior to proceeding
with the work.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15065
Page 5
April 25, 2013
WORK WITHIN EXISTING BUILDINGS
.8
Return Air Ductwork
.1
Install temporary filters on all return air ducts within the construction zone prior to the start
of construction.
.2
Clean exhaust/return ductwork at level 3, 4 and 5.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15190
Page 1
April 25, 2013
IDENTIFICATION
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements outlined in Section 15010.
References
.1
1.3
CGSB 24-GP-3a - Identification and Classification of Piping Systems.
Submittals
.1
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit samples and lists of proposed wording for approval before ordering materials or
engraving nameplates.
.2
Submit a full list of all services to be labelled and the colour and legend proposed for each
service.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Manufacturers
.1
.2
Pipe Labels, Identification Tapes and Tags
.1
Brady
.2
Safety Supply Co.
.3
S.M.S.
.4
Revere-Seton.
Cable Markers
.1
Electrovert Type Z
.2
Brady
.3
Mystik.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15190
Page 2
April 25, 2013
IDENTIFICATION
2.2
Equipment
.1
.2
2.3
Manufacturer's nameplates:
.1
Provide metal nameplate on each piece of equipment, mechanically fastened with raised
or recessed letters.
.2
Provide Underwriters' Laboratories or CSA registration plates, as required by
respective agency.
.3
Manufacturers nameplate to indicate size, equipment model, manufacturer's name, serial
number, performance rating, voltage, cycle, phase and power of motors.
.4
Locate nameplates so that they are easily read. Do not insulate or paint over plates.
System nameplates:
.1
Provide laminated plastic plates with black face and white centre of minimum size 90 x 40
x 2.5 mm nominal thickness, engraved with 6 mm high lettering. Use 25 mm lettering for
major equipment.
.2
Fasten nameplates securely in conspicuous place. Where nameplates can not be
mounted on cool surface, provide standoffs.
.3
Identify equipment type and number (eg Pump No. 2) and service or areas or zone of
building served eg "Canada Customs Secondary Heating".
.4
Submit list of nameplates for review prior to engraving.
Piping
.1
Identify medium in piping with markers showing name and service including temperature, pressure
and directional flow arrows in accordance with CGSB 24-GP-3a.
.2
Apply primary colors and secondary color bands on finished piping surfaces, in exposed areas only
to indicate type and degree of hazard.
.3
Primary color paint to conform to CGSB 1-GP- 60M.
.4
Manufactured pipe markers and color bands:
.1
Plastic coated cloth material with protective over coating and waterproof contact adhesive
undercoating, suitable for continuous operating temperature of 150°C and intermittent
temperature of 200 C. Apply to prepared surfaces.
.2
50 mm wide tape single wrap around pipe or pipe covering with ends overlapping one pipe
diameter but not less than 50 mm for colour bands.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15190
Page 3
April 25, 2013
IDENTIFICATION
.5
.6
.3
Block capital letters 50 mm high for pipes of 75 mm nominal and larger OD including
insulation and not less than 20 mm high for smaller diameters.
.4
Direction arrows 150 mm long by 50 mm wide for piping of 75 mm nominal or larger OD
including insulation and 100 mm long by 20 mm wide for smaller diameters. Use double
headed arrows where direction of flow is reversible.
.5
Waterproof and heat resistant plastic marker tags for pipes and tubing 20 mm nominal
and smaller.
.6
Black pipe marker letters and direction arrows, white on red background for fire protection
pipe markers.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: WH Brady identification tapes, bands, markers; Seton Name
Plate Corporation; Setmark pipe markers.
Location:
.1
Locate markers and classifying colors on piping systems so they can be seen from floor or
platform.
.2
Piping runs at least once in each room.
.3
Maximum 15 m between identifications in open areas.
.4
Both sides where piping passes through walls, partitions and floors.
.5
At point of entry and leaving, where piping is concealed in pipe chase or other confined
space, and at each access opening.
.6
At start and end points of runs and at each piece of equipment.
.7
At major manual and automatic valves immediately upstream of valves.
.8
Identify branch, equipment or area served after valve.
Table: pipe and valve identification.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15190
Page 4
April 25, 2013
IDENTIFICATION
.7
.8
2.4
Coding shall be in accordance with the following schedule with 2" wide painted or approved plastic
bands.
PIPE MARKER
LEGEND
VALVE TAG
LEGEND
PRIMARY
COLOUR
SECONDARY
COLOUR
City water
CI.W
Green
None
Cold water
C.W.
Green
None
Chilled Water Supply
CHWS
Green
None
Chilled Water Return
CHWR
Green
None
Condenser Water Supply - Glycol
COND. W.S. E.G
Green
None
Condenser Water Return - Glycol
COND. W.R. E.G
Green
None
Hot water heating supply
H.W.H.S.
Yellow
Black
Hot water heating return
H.W.H.R.
Yellow
Black
Secondary hot water heating supply
S.H.W.H.S.
Yellow
Black
Secondary hot water heating return
S.H.W.H.R.
Yellow
Black
Make-up water
M.U.W.
Yellow
Black
Treated water
T.W.
Green
None
Storm Water
S.S.
Green
None
San sewer
SAN.S.
Green
None
Fire protection water
F.P.W.
Red
White
Sprinkler water
S.W.
Red
White
Vent
V.P.
Brown
None
Domestic Hot Water
DHW
Yellow
Dark Green
domestic Hot Water Recirc.
DHWR
Yellow
Dark Green
All piping shall be coloured painted as per the above primary colour associated to each system.
Ductwork
.1
Use 50 mm high black stencilled letters, eg "Supply", "Return", "Sanitary Exhaust", with directional
flow arrow.
.2
Maintain maximum 15 m distance between markings.
.3
Identify ducts each side of dividing walls or partitions and beside each access door.
.4
Stencil over final finish only.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15190
Page 5
April 25, 2013
IDENTIFICATION
2.5
Valves and Controllers
.1
Provide brass tags with 12 mm stamped code lettering and numbers filled with black paint,
secured with non-ferrous chains or "S" hooks for valves and operating controllers except at
plumbing fixtures and radiation.
.2
Provide Consultant with six identification flow diagrams of approved size for each system.
Include tag schedule, designating number, service, function, and location of each tagged item and
normal operating position of valves.
.3
Install where directed one copy of flow diagram and valve schedule mounted in glazed frame.
Provide one copy in each operating and maintenance instruction manual.
.4
Consecutively number valves in systems.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15241
Page 1
April 25, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATION
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This Section of the Specification Shall Be Read in Conjunction with and Be Governed by the
Requirements of Section 15010.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Provide separate shop drawings for each isolated system complete with performance and product
data.
.3
Submit type of isolator, size, height when uncompressed and maximum allowable static deflection
weight of all isolated equipment, loads on each isolator and static deflection of each isolator under
the specific design load.
.4
Submit marked up plans indicating all locations where pipes are to be isolated in mechanical
rooms, crossing acoustic joints and as specified.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
The static deflection of isolators shall be given in the equipment schedule and as specified.
.2
Vibration isolator sizes and layout shall be determined by the vibration isolator supplier.
.3
All mechanical equipment not specifically identified in this specification that contains rotating or
vibrating elements shall be installed on Type P1 isolators.
.4
Elastomeric elements that will be exposed to temperatures below freezing shall be fabricated from
natural rubber instead of neoprene.
.5
All isolators to be installed outdoors or exposed to weather shall be hot dipped galvanized and
shall be furnished with neoprene mounting sleeves for hold-down bolts to prevent any metal to
metal contact.
.6
Standard of Acceptance (All vibration isolators): Mason, Vibron, Vibro-Acoustics, Korfund,
Masdom.
.7
Model numbers for Mason isolators are indicated for reference purposes.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15241
Page 2
April 25, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATION
2.2
Elastomeric Pads
.1
Type P1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading
350 kPa. Mason type W
.2
Type P2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber; maximum
loading 415 kPa. Mason type W.
.3
Type P3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprene bonded to 1.71 mm steel
plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers. Mason type
WSW.
.4
Type P4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubber bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate;
30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers.
Mason Type WSW
.5
Pads to be selected for 15% strain.
2.3
Elastomeric Mounts
.1
Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; laterally stable maximum durometer of 60; threaded
insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces. All metal surfaces to be covered
with neoprene. Mounts shall have levelling bolts rigidly secured to the equipment. Mason Type ND.
.2
Pads to be selected for 15% strain.
2.4
Isolator Springs
.1
Design stable springs so that ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times
the ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units to be
complete with levelling devices.
.2
Cadmium plate for outdoor and internal air handling installations.
.3
Colour code springs. The spring diameter shall be not less than 80% of the compressed height of
the spring.
.4
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum static deflection for equipment mounted on grade slabs
shall be 25 mm and the minimum static deflection for equipment mounted above the lowest level
shall be 50 mm.
.5
Two isolation pads sandwiching a 1.71 mm steel plate shall be bonded to the isolator base plate.
.6
Unless otherwise specified, isolators need not be bolted to the floor for indoor installations. If the
base plates are bolted to the structure, a neoprene vibration isolation washer and sleeve shall be
installed under the bolt head between the steel washer and the base plate.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15241
Page 3
April 25, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATION
2.5
Spring Mount
.1
Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.
.2
Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber
friction and acoustic pad. Mason Type SLFSW.
.3
Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and
acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; internal adjustment; equipment
bolting not necessary. Mason Type SLFSW.
.4
Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed
neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates.
Minimum clearance of 25 mm shall be maintained around restraining boots and between the
housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring operation. Limit stops shall be out of
contact during normal operation, backed away from contact by at least 12 mm; a neoprene
washer shall be installed beneath the bolt head/washer used to restrain the isolator.
Mason Type SLR.
.5
Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 23 kg maximum.
2.6
Hangers
.1
Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Swivel arrangement to permit
hanger box or rod to move through a 30° arc without metal to metal contact.
.2
Unless specified otherwise, the static deflection shall be 9 mm, with a strain not exceeding 15%,
and spring hangers to have minimum static deflection of 50 mm.
.3
A neoprene sleeve shall be provided where the lower hanger rod passes through the steel hanger
box such that the hanger rod cannot contact the steel hanger. The diameter of the clear hole in
the hanger box shall be at least 19 mm larger than the diameter of the hanger rod.
.4
Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear. Mason Type HD.
.5
Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer. Mason Type 30.
.6
Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element. Mason Type 30N.
2.7
Riser Guide
.1
For vertical isolated piping, riser guides shall be M-1 type isolators bolted to the vertical edge of a
90 degree steel angle. The angle shall allow the pipe to move axially but shall limit lateral
movement to approximately +/- 25 mm.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15241
Page 4
April 25, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATION
2.8
Inertia Base Forms
.1
Type B1 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place reinforcing
rods running in both directions; provide metal pans integrally welded on sizes up to 2400 mm on
smallest dimension, bolted on sizes over 2400 mm on smallest dimension; spring mounted units
carried by gusseted height saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housing pads be
50 mm minimum.
.2
Provide concrete in accordance with section 15010.
2.9
Vibration Isolation Rails for Exhaust Fans
.1
Curb mounted exhaust fans shall be isolated on a continuous rooftop isolation consisting of
galvanized sections formed to fit curb and equipment with a flexible air and weather seal joining
the upper and lower rail sections.
.2
Rails shall have stable springs which are cadmium plated and properly selected to provide
minimum deflection with 50 percent additional travel to solid.
.3
Isolation assembly shall have neoprene cushioned wind restraints which allow 3 mm movement
before engaging in resisting wind loads in any lateral direction.
.4
Isolation rail assembly shall be shop assembled.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Vibro-Acoustics type RTR, Vibron, Mason
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Provide vibration isolation for new equipment as noted in the specification, listed in the schedule
and shown on the drawings.
.2
Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and adjust
mountings to level equipment.
.3
Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce
system flexibility.
.4
Ensure that piping and ducting passage through walls and floors do not transmit vibrations. A
minimum of 25 mm clearance shall be allowed around the entire perimeter of the penetration. The
clearance shall be packed with fibreglass and sealed with non-hardening mastic on both sides.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15241
Page 5
April 25, 2013
VIBRATION ISOLATION
.5
Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring mounts or
spring hangers with 25 mm minimum static deflection as follows:
.1
Up to NPS 4: first 3 points of support.
.2
First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated equipment,
but not more than 50 mm.
.6
Unless specified otherwise, isolators indoors need not be bolted to the floor. Where isolation is
bolted to floor avoid short circuiting of sound pads by using vibration isolation rubber washers.
.7
Provide suitable supports for all equipment which does not have a frame with adequate rigidity.
.8
All steel bases shall clear the sub-bases by at least 50 mm. All bases shall be blocked and
shimmed level so that all ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system, at
operating level, before the isolation adjustment is made. The clearance shall be checked by the
contractor to ensure that no scraps have been left to short circuit the vibration isolators.
.9
There shall be a minimum of 100 mm clearance between isolated equipment and the walls,
ceiling, floors, columns and any other equipment not installed on vibration isolators.
.10
Piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment shall not be hung from or supported on other
equipment, pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. It shall be supported on or
suspended from building structure.
.11
Equipment connected to fluid piping shall be erected on isolators or isolated foundations at correct
operating heights prior to connection of piping. Equipment should be blocked-up with temporary
shims to final operating height. When the system is assembled and fluid is added, the isolators
shall be adjusted to allow removal of the shims, and the Contractor shall confirm that the isolators
for the fluid-filled pipes, pumps and other elements deflect the specified amounts and no more.
.12
All wiring connections to mechanical equipment on isolators shall be made in a 360 degree loop;
minimum conduit length: 1 m. Cut any ties used to install this loop prior to adjusting the isolators.
-END-
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 1
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
.2
Do thermal insulation in accordance with ASHRAE 90-1 Standards.
1.2
Reference Standards
.1
ANSI/NFPA 90A - 1999
Installation of Air conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.2
ANSI/NFPA 90B - 1999
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.3
ASTM.A167-92B
Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip.
.4
ASTM C335
Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal
Pipe Insulations
.5
ASTM C411-82(1992)
Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature
Thermal Insulation
.6
CAN/CGSB-51.20M
Type 2: Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings
.7
CAN/CGSB-51.12
Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing.
.8
CAN/CGSB-51.40
Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and Pipe
Covering.
.9
CAN/ULC-S102
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials and Assemblies.
.10
CGSB 51-GP-9M
Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Sleeving for Piping and Round
Ducting.
.11
CGSB51-GP-11M
Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting, Machinery
and Boilers
.12
CGSB51-GP-52M
Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment
Thermal Insulation.
.13
CGSB51-GP-53M
Jacketing Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and
Round Ducts.
.14
CSA HA Series
CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 2
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
1.3
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe,
fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
.3
Prior to ordering insulation materials submit a sample board demonstrating the cross section of
each type of insulation that will be utilized on the project for approval. Submission to include
insulating material, exterior jackets and adhesive for each type of insulation. After review and
acceptance the sample board shall be kept on site for the duration of the project for
reference purposes.
1.4
Definitions
.1
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in trenches, chases, furred
spaces, pipe shafts or hung ceilings.
.2
"EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.
.3
ARUNOUTS@ - piping to individual terminal units not exceeding 3650 mm (12 feet).
1.5
Quality Assurance
.1
Insulating materials shall be new, undamaged and of the respective types specified for each
specific application.
.2
Pipe insulation shall be preformed and furnished in standard lengths with ends cut square,
conforming with the dimensional requirements of ASTM C 585.
1.6
Regulatory Requirements
.1
Comply with all requirements of Local and Provincial Authorities having jurisdiction, Ontario
Building Code and Underwriters= Laboratory of Canada.
.2
Fire retardant type insulation materials, coverings and adhesives with maximum flame spread
rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50 when tested in a accordance with
CAN/ULC-S102 and NFPA 255-1996. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-96 shall
not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at temperature to which exposed in service.
.3
Properly identify insulation materials, coverings and adhesives when required by Federal and/or
Provincial Health and Safety WHMIS legislation.
1.7
Qualifications
.1
Use a licensed insulation applicator specializing in, and with an established reputation for this type
of work.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 3
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
1.8
Delivery, Storage and Handling
.1
Insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives coatings etc. to be shipped to the site in factory
fabricated containers with the manufacturer=s stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of
products.
.2
Retain insulation materials in their original containers until immediately prior to application. Keep
materials dry during shipping and storage.
.3
Keep adhesives in their original cartons or containers with manufacturer=s name and catalogue
number clearly identified. Protect contents against freezing.
.4
Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage before, during and after
installation. Do not install damaged insulation and remove it from the project site.
.5
Installed insulation which has not been weatherproofed shall be protected from inclement weather
by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. Any wet or damaged insulation
shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor at no additional cost.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
P-1 Formed Fibrous Glass
.1
.2
Application: insulation system P-1 for piping, valves, and fittings.
.1
Hot water heating and all other associated piping connected to hot water circulating
heating system.
.2
Domestic hot water, tempered water and recirculating piping.
Materials:
.1
All piping shall be insulated with a preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, complying with
ASTM C 547, Class 3 (to 850oF), rigid, moulded pipe insulation, non combustible.
.2
Ak@ (ksi) @ 75oF Mean Temperature 0.23 max (0.033 @ 24C)
.3
Maximum service temperature 850oF (454 C).
.4
Rated 25/50 per ASTM E 84, UL 723 and NFPA 255.
.5
When being utilized over stainless steel the product must comply with ASTM C 795.
.6
Vapour retarder jacketing: White kraft paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and
.7
onded to an aluminum foil, with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 4
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.8
Standard of Acceptance:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.3
Fiberglass Canada 850 with ASJ-SSL jacket
Manson Alley K with all purpose APT Jacket
Knauf
Johns Manville
Thickness:
.1
Refer to table below for pipe thicknesses.
Hot Systems Insulation Thicknesses
Fluid Design
Operating
Temperature
Range oF
Nominal Pipe Size
Insulation Thickness
Runouts
up to 2
1 and
less
1 1/4 to 2 2 2 to 4
6
8 & Up
Dom. Hot Water &
Recirc Piping &
Tempered Water
Up to 140oF
Up to 60o C
12 mm
1/2"
25 mm
1.0"
25 mm
1.0"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
Hot water Heating
Up to 200oF
Up to 93 C
12 mm
1/2"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
40 mm
1.5"
Service
2.2
P.2 Formed Fibrous Glass with Vapour Barrier
.1
.2
Application: insulation system P2 for piping, valves and fittings for temperatures up to 850°F
(454 C).
.1
Domestic cold water.
.2
Horizontal and vertical runs of storm piping for 10 m from roof drain. Where multiple storm
drain runouts shorter than 10 metres connect into a storm main insulate the entire length
of storm main up to 10 metres beyond the last runout.
.3
Equipment installed in domestic cold water piping systems.
Material:
.1
All piping shall be insulated with a preformed fiberglass pipe insulation, complying with
ASTM C 547, Class 3 (to 850oF), rigid, moulded pipe insulation, non combustible.
.2
“k” (ksi) @ 75°F Mean Temperature 0.23 max (0.033 @ 24°C)
.3
Maximum service temperature 850°F (454°C).
.4
Rated 25/50 per ASTM E 84, UL 723 and NFPA 255.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 5
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.5
When being utilized over stainless steel the product must comply with ASTM C 795.
.6
Vapour retarder jacketing: White kraft paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded
to an aluminum foil, with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglas 850 with ASJ-SSL jacket, Manson Alley K with all purpose
APT jacket, Knauf and Johns Manville.
.4
Thickness:
.1
.2
Domestic Cold Water
Line Size Nominal
Thickness
NPS 1 and under
12 mm (1/2")
NPS 1 1/4 and over
25 mm (1")
Chilled Water Piping:
Line Size Nominal
Thickness
NPS 4 and under
1" (25 mm)
NPS 6 and over
1.5" (40 mm)
2.3
P-3 Flexible Fibrous Glass with Vapour Barrier
2.4
Fastenings
.1
For insulation systems P-1, P-2, P-3:
.2
Tape: colour matching, pressure sensitive, self adhesive vinyl tape rated under 25 for flame
spread and under 50 for smoke development.
.3
Lap Seal Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers. Flame
spread 10 smoke development 0.
.1
Standard of Acceptance: Foster 85-75 Drion.
.4
Lagging Adhesive: fire retardant coating approved by CFFM and authorities having jurisdiction prior
to application.
.5
For Insulation System P-4:
.1
Contact Adhesive: quick-setting adhesive for seams and joints of flexible unicellular
insulation. Flame spread 5, smoke development 0.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong 520 Adhesive
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 6
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
2.5
Jackets
.1
.2
Canvas
.1
Apply in exposed areas: compact, firm ULC listed heavy plain weave, cotton fabric at
220 g/m2 (6 oz per sq. yd) treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.2
On concealed valves and fittings use ULC listed plain weave cotton fabric at 120 g/m2
(3 oz per sq. yd).
.3
Standard of Acceptance: S. Fattal Thermocanvas and John Manville.
PVC
.1
Piping
.1
.2
ULC listed PVC moulded type jacketing material, gloss white that meets 25 flame
spread and 50 smoke devloped ratings.
Fittings
.1
ULC listed PVC, gloss white, one piece, pre-moulded fittings that meet 25 flame
spread and 50 smoke developed ratings.
.3
Application of PVC shall be strictly in accordance Authority Having Jurisdiction
requirements.
.4
Ultraviolet resistant.
.5
Fastenings standard to manufacturer.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Application
.1
Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by the Consultant.
Insulation and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish.
.2
Work shall be performed by insulation journeymen.
.3
Apply insulation under ambient temperature conditions in accordance with insulation or adhesive
manufcturer=s recommendations.
.4
Apply insulation neatly and tightly in unbroken lengths and with ends of sections firmly and
squarely butted or engaged together. Lap canvas or other specified wrapping over all joints and
thoroughly cement down with adhesive. Vapour barriers and insulation to be complete over full
length of pipe or surface, without penetration for hangers, and without interruption at sleeves, pipe
and fittings.
.5
Extend insulation through sleeves in walls (except fire walls) or other openings in the building to
make insulation and vapour barrier continuous and of uniform diameter.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 7
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.6
Terminate insulation at each side of fire walls and pack the space between the wall sleeve and
pipe as specified in Section 15010.
.7
Replace insulation removed from existing piping to make tie in connections with new insulation.
Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make a neat and firm butt joint between old and
new insulation.
.8
Protect insulation on domestic cold water water lines with insulation shields consisting of high
density insulation and sheet steel support. Alternatively bury pipe hanger in insulation and apply
insulation up hanger rod not less than 4 times the insulation thickness. Insulation inserts shall be
sized as follows:
Pipe Size
Length
Inches
mm
Inches
mm
1 1/2 to 2 1/2
40 to 65
10
250
3 to 6
75 to 150
12
300
.9
Specified adhesives, mastics and coatings shall be applied at the manufacturer=s recommended
minimum coverage per gallon.
.10
Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
.11
Where piping is indicated to be heat traced provide oversized insulation to accommodate heat
tracing cable.
.12
Apply insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.2
Pipe Insulation
.1
Preformed insulation: sectional insulation up to NPS 12, sectional or curved segmented above
NPS 12.
.2
Multi-layered, insulation: use staggered butt joint construction.
.3
Vertical pipe over NPS 3: use insulation supports welded or bolted to pipe directly above lowest
pipe fitting. Thereafter locate on 4.5 m centres and at each valve and flange.
.4
At expansion joints in piping, apply insulation over a 16 gauge sleeve fabricated to fit around
expansion joint without restricting its movement. Fabricate sleeves so that it can be removed to
allow for the repacking and lubrication of expansion joint without damaging the adjoining insulation.
Extend sleeves a minimum of 75 mm (3") longer than expansion joint, fit with insulation retaining
flanges and with a means of maintaining the position of sleeve over expansion joint.
.5
Terminate insulation at each end of unions and flanges on hot lines, and at other points where
indicated, with insulation cement, to CGSB 51-GP-6M, trowelled on bevel.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15260
Page 8
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
.6
Gouge out insulation for proper fit where there is interference between weld bead and insulation.
Bevel away from studs and nuts to permit their removal without damage to insulation, and closely
and neatly trim around extending parts of pipe saddles, supports, hangers, and clamp guides and
seal with insulating cement.
.7
Insulation is not required on chrome plated piping and fittings.
.8
Surface temperature on outside of insulation shall not exceed 150oF (66 C).
.9
Insulate flanges, valves and fittings with segments of insulation of the same type an thickness as
the insulation on the pipe, secured in place with soft annealed galvanized wire. Finish with cement
and canvas while the cement is still wet.
3.3
Mechanical Fasteners
.1
3.4
Secure pipe insulation by straps. Space straps at not more than 900 mm on centres and use at
least 3 rows per length of insulation section.
Sizing
.1
Provide fire retardant coating on canvas jackets.
.2
Fire retardant coating shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction and CFFM prior to
application.
.3
Coat canvas covering exposed in finished spaces with diluted coat of lagging adhesive.
As recommended by insulation manufacturer for priming.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 1
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements outlined in Section 15010 of the specification.
.2
Do thermal insulation in accordance with ASHRAE 90-1 1989.
1.2
Fire Resistance
.1
Meet NFPA 90A-1999. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating
of 50 in accordance with NFPA 255-1996 and CAN4-S102.
.2
Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-82 shall not flame, smoulder, glow or smoke at
temperature to which exposed in service.
1.3
Reference Standards
.1
ANSI/NFPA 90A-1999
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
.2
ANSI/NFPA90B-1999
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
.3
ASTM A167
Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet and Strip
.4
ASTM C335
Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal
Pipe Insulations
.5
ASTM C411
Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature
Thermal Insulation
.6
ASTM E84
.7
CAN/CGSB-51.2M
Type 2, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings
.8
CAN/CGSBB51.12
Cement, Thermal Insulating and Finishing
.9
CAN/CGSB-51.40
Thermal Insulation, Flexible, Elastomeric, Unicellular, Sheet and
Pipe Covering.
.10
CAN/ULC-S102
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies
.11
CGSB 51-GP-9M
Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Sleeving for Piping and Round
Ducting.
.12
CGSB 51-11M
Thermal insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting,
Machinery and Boilers.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 2
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
.13
CGSB 51-GP-52M
Vapour Barrier Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and
Equipment Thermal Insulation.
.14
CGSB 51-GP-53M
Jacketing, Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet for Insulating Pipes, Vessels and
Round Ducts.
.15
CSA HA Series
CSA Standards for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys.
1.4
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe,
fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
1.5
Quality Assurance
.1
Deliver all materials to the job site and protect the insulation against dirt, water, chemical and
mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not install damaged insulation and
remove it from the project
.2
Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, coatings etc. to the site in factory fabricated
containers with manufacturer=s stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products,
name of manufacturer and brand.
.3
Installed insulation which has not been weatherproofed shall be protected from inclement weather
by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. Any wet or damaged insulation
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost..
1.6
Qualifications
.1
1.7
Use a licensed insulation applicator specializing in, and with an established reputation for this type
of work.
Definitions
.1
"CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in chases, furred spaces, pipe
shafts or hung ceilings.
.2
"EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 3
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
D-2 Mineral Fibre Blanket With Vapour Barrier
.1
Application: Apply on round or oval ducting or concealed rectangular ductwork less than 850 mm
(32") wide, either cold or dual temperature, where such ducts would otherwise be insulated as
described for D-4.
.2
Material:
2.2
.1
Duct wrap insulation complying with facing meeting ASTM C 533.
.2
“k” ksi @ 75°F mean temperature 0.31 max (0.045 @ 24°C) when material compressed
25%.
.3
Maximum service temperature 450°F (232°C).
.4
Rated at 25/50 per ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 255.
.5
When being used over stainless steel product must comply with the requirements of
ASTM C 795.
.6
Material faced with FSK shall have a permeance of 0.02 or less.
.7
Material must conform to ASHRAE 90.1.
.8
Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglas Flexible Reinforced Foil and Flame Retardant Kraft,
Knauf, Manson and Johns Manville
D-4 Fibrous Glass Rigid With Vapour Barrier
.1
Application: insulation system D4 for ducting temperature up to 232°C (450°F) on cold or dual
temperature rectangular ducting as follows:
.2
Material:
.1
Rigid board insulation complying with ASTM C 612, Type 1
.2
“k” ksi @ 75°F mean temperature 0.23 max (0.033 @ 24°C)
.3
Maximum service temperature 450°F (232°C).
.4
Rated at 25/50 per ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 255.
.5
When being used over stainless steel product must comply with the requirements of
ASTM C 795.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 4
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
2.3
.6
Vapour retarder jacketing: a bleached kraft paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and
bonded to an aluminum foil or aluminum foil reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and
laminated to fire resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or
outward clinched expanded staples and vapour barrier mastic as needed.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: Fiberglas Reinforced Foil and Fire Retardant Kraft Facing,
Knauf, Manson and Johns Manville
Applications For D-2 And D-4
.1
Outside intake from louvre to mixing box, including plenum between louvres and ductwork.
.2
All supply ductwork from air handling unit in the mechanical room and shafts.
.3
All exhaust air ductwork from (return ) fan to exhaust louvre or 3 metres from outside whichever is
greater.
.4
Do not externally insulate ductwork which is internally lined to insulation thickness required.
2.4
Thickness:
.1
In accordance with table below:
Insulation Thickness
Thickness
Operating Temperature
50 mm (2")
65 to 232 C (149 to 450oF)
25 mm (1 A)
10 to 65 C (50 to 149oF)
50 mm (2")
-40 to 10 C (-40 to 50oF)
.2
Where insulation is installed on ductwork that has flanged connections increase duct insulation as
required to provide 12 mm (1/2") cover on flanges and duct angles.
.3
For duct sizes 500 mm (20") to 850 mm (34") utilize either 40 mm (1 1/2") flexible wrap or 25 mm
(1") rigid board insulation.
2.5
Fastenings
.1
Tape: self adhesive, 100 mm (4") wide rated under 25 for flame spread and under 50 for smoke
development.
.2
Contact adhesive: quick-setting, non-flammable fire resistive adhesive to adhere fibrous glass to
ducts. Flame spread 15 smoke development 0.
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Acceptable Products Foster 85-20 Asbestos Free, Armstrong 520.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 5
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
.3
Lap Seal Adhesive: Quick-setting adhesive for joints and lap sealing of vapour barriers. Flame
spread 10 smoke development 0.
.1
.4
.5
2.6
Acceptable Products Foster 85-75, Asbestos Free, Drion.
For Canvas:
.1
Washable adhesive for cementing canvas lagging cloth to duct insulation.
.2
Acceptable Products: Foster 30-36 Asbestos Free.
Pins:
.1
Weld pins 4 mm diameter, with 35 mm diameter head for installation through the
insulation. Length to suit thickness of insulation.
.2
Weld pins: If duct is over 600 mm (24") wide, use on bottom of duct.
.3
Acceptable Products: Duro Dyne, Clip-Pin.
.4
Weld pins 2.0 mm for installation prior to applying insulation. Length to suit thickness of
insulation. Nylon retain clips 32 mm square.
.5
Acceptable Products: Duro Dyne spotter clips or stop clips as required.
Jackets
.1
Canvas:
.1
Apply in exposed areas: compact, firm ULC listed heavy plain weave, cotton fabric at
220 g/m5 (6 oz./sq. yd) treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.2
Acceptable products: S. Fattal Thermocanvas and John Manville.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Application
.1
Apply insulation after required tests have been completed and approved by Engineer. Insulation
and surfaces shall be clean and dry when installed and during application of any finish.
.2
Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring and beveling insulation if
necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires or bands.
.3
Fill joints, cracks, seams and depressions with bedding compound to form a smooth surface.
On cold equipment, use a vapour retardant cement.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15270
Page 6
April 25, 2013
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
.4
Provide vapour retardant jacket. Seal all vapour retardant jacket seams and penetrations with
UL listed tapes or vapour retardant adhesive. Where service access is required bevel and seal
ends of insulation.
.5
Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers and other duct penetrations except where
prohibited by code.
.6
Work shall be preformed by insulation journeymen.
.7
Apply insulation and coverings at ambient conditions as required by manufacturers of insulations,
adhesives and mastics.
.8
Install insulation with smooth and even surfaces.
.9
Replace insulation removed from existing ductwork to make tie in connections with new insulation.
Cut back existing insulation a sufficient distance to make a neat and firm butt joint between old
and new insulation.
.10
Secure insulation on exposed rectangular ductwork with welded impaling pins and speed washer
type fasteners at 300 mm (12") on centre. Provide a minimum of two rows of fasteners on each
side of the duct.
.11
In addition to the mechanical fasteners adhere insulation to the duct with fire resistive adhesive
applied to the duct in 150 mm (6") wide strips at 450 mm (18") centres. Tightly butt all joints and
breaks in the insulation and seal with fire resistive mastic and 75 mm (3" ) wide scrim foil pressure
sensitive tape. Cut off protruding ends of welded pins and cover speed washers with same tape to
ensure a smooth application of exterior jacket.
.12
Fasten insulation to rectangular ductwork less than 31" (787 mm) wide and round ductwork with
adhesive applied in 150 mm (6") wide strips at 450 mm (18") centres. Tightly butt all joints and
breaks in the insulation and seal with fire resistive mastic and 75 mm (3") wide scrim foil pressure
sensitive tape. Use tying cord only to temporarily secure insulation until adhesive has set.
Remove prior to application of exterior jacket.
.13
Insulate access doors or removable panels in ductwork as separate units to permit opening or
removal without damage to the adjoining insulation.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15300
Page 1
April 25, 2013
FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
.2
The Sprinkler and Mechanical Contractors shall refer to the requirements outlined in
Sections 15241 and 15242 regarding isolation of piping and equipment.
1.2
Reference Standards
.1
Do work to the following except where specified otherwise:
.1
The Ontario Building Code.
.2
The Ontario Fire Code.
.3
The City of Toronto.
.4
National Fire Protection Association Standards:
.5
1.3
.1
NFPA 10 portable fire extinguishers.
.2
NFPA 13 installation of sprinkler systems
.3
NFPA 14 installation of Fire Stand Pipe
Ontario Fire Marshall
Description of Systems
.1
1.4
Provide the following fire protection systems:
.1
Automatic sprinkler systems.
.2
Portable fire extinguishers.
Certificates
.1
Provide written certificate that components are compatible, and where applicable, certified for
intended use by a nationally recognized testing agency.
.2
Provide written certificate that the Fire Protection system installation conforms to OBC, local
building codes, NFPA, and mechanical requirements.
.3
All submitted shop drawing hydraulic calculations and certificates shall be signed and stamped by
a professional engineer.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15300
Page 2
April 25, 2013
FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL
1.5
Scope of Work
.1
Supply and install a complete sprinkler system as per specifications and drawings. Design and
installation shall be strictly to NFPA 13 and 14, OBC and Authorities having jurisdiction. The
installation shall be based on providing separate main sprinkler risers, and no deviation shall be
accepted. Scope includes upgrading the main fire standpipe piping up to the risers.
Mechanical Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations and detailed drawings to the Consultant
and authorities having jurisdiction prior to installation.
.2
Division 15 and sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate location of sprinkler and fire mains with other
trades prior to installation of any piping. No extras will be considered for on site conflicts with other
trades due to the lack of co-ordination.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Pipe and Fittings
.1
Steel pipe:
.1
Joined by Welding or Roll Grooved
.1
Welding methods shall comply with all of the requirements of ANSI D10.9,
Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and
Tubing, Level AR3.
.2
Pipe joined with grooved fittings shall be joined by a ULC listed combination of
fittings, gaskets, and grooves. Grooves cut or rolled on pipe shall be
dimensionally compatible with the fittings.
.3
Nominal wall thickness for pressures up to 2070 kPa shall be in accordance with
following table:
Pipe Size
Thickness
Up to NPS 5
NPS 6
Schedule 10.
0.134 in. (3.40 mm)
Use of light wall piping system will be accepted for sprinkler and standpipe system
provided the piping system is an approved system, ie: meets ULC and NFPA 13
and NFPA 14.1.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15300
Page 3
April 25, 2013
FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL
.2
Joined by Thread Fittings or by Fittings Having Cut Grooves
.1
All threaded pipe and fittings shall have threads cut to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads,
General Purpose.
.2
Nominal wall thickness for pressures up to 2070 kPa shall be in accordance with the
following table:
.3
.3
Pipe Size
Thickness
Under NPS 8
NPS 8 and over
Schedule 40
Schedule 30
Victaulic Pressfit system may be utilized for piping 50 mm and under. Pipe shall be
approved schedule 5 conforming to ASTM A-795. UL/ULC listed and FM approved for
175 psi fire protection service. Refer to section 15704.
Fittings: 1200 kPa working pressure.
.1
Cast iron screwed to ANSI B16.4-1977, 1000 kPa.
.2
Malleable iron, screwed to ANSI B16.3-1977, 1000 kPa.
.3
Cast iron flanged to ANSI B16.1-1975, 1000 kPa.
.4
Mechanical groove coupling to ANSI B31.3- 1980, 1000 kPa.
.4
Flange bolts: square or hex head bolts with heavy hex nuts to ASTM A307-82a.
.5
Flange gaskets: 1.6 mm thick plain or cloth inserted red rubber to ANSI B16.20-1973 and
ANSI B16.21-1978.
2.2
Pipe Hangers
.1
To NFPA 13 and Section 15010 for sprinkler systems.
.2
To NFPA 14 and Section 15010
2.3
Signs
.1
2.4
Fabricated from metal with chain suspension; white letters on red background.
Gate Valves
.1
NPS 2 and under: bronze to ASTM B61-82a double disc and screwed ends.
.2
NPS 2 1/2 and over: Underwriters' Laboratories pattern, iron body, bronze mounted, with
OS&Y double disc or wedge, flanged ends.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15300
Page 4
April 25, 2013
FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Inspection
.1
3.2
Do not recess, paint or conceal piping accessories or work prior to inspection and approval by
authorities having jurisdiction or authorized representative.
Installation
.1
Install systems in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
.2
Allow for expansion and contraction when installing pipe hangers.
.3
Discharge drains to safe location in interior of building to visible point of free discharge.
.4
Install signs required by local fire protection department.
.5
Secure outdoor signs with stainless steel bolts.
3.3
Field Quality Control
.1
Subject systems and equipment to operational test.
.2
Upon complete installation of piping and apparatus for sprinkler systems, test joints for tightness
and good condition of piping inspected in presence of Consultant. When testing with water, install
pressure gauge at highest point of installation. If impossible to test whole installation in single
operation, subdivide into several zones and test each zone in manner described.
.3
During tests, stop any leaks and remove and repair any defective part. Perform test over again
until satisfactory results are obtained.
.4
Provide hydraulic pump, temporary connections and labour required for tests.
3.4
Adjustment
.1
Adjust equipment to satisfaction of authorities having jurisdiction.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15300
Page 5
April 25, 2013
FIRE PROTECTION - GENERAL
3.5
Protection of Completed Work
.1
3.6
Assume responsibility for protecting sprinkler heads during painting. Replace damaged and
painted components.
Protection of the building During Construction
.1
Mechanical contractor to insure the existing sprinkler system is operational at all times. Contractor
to install additional isolating valve as required. Remove valves after the work is complete.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15305
Page 1
April 25, 2013
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements outlined in section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
1.3
Do work in accordance with the recommendations and requirements of:
.1
NFPA 10 1984 for portable fire extinguishers.
.2
OBC - The Ontario Building Code.
.3
City of Toronto.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
1.4
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Multi-purpose Dry Chemical Extinguishers
.1
Stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labelled for A, B and
C Class protection.
.2
Size:
Office areas, Electrical Rooms, Kitchen:
Mechanical Rooms:
2.2
5.0 kg
5.0 kg
Cabinets
.1
Provide 5.0 kg ABC fire extinguishers in all fire hose cabinets. Contractor to provide tag complete
with date of installation.
.2
Flush type constructed of 1.6 mm thick steel, 180° opening door of 2.5 mm thick steel and latching
device.
.3
Cabinet to maintain fire resistive rating of construction in which they occur.
.4
Cabinet door: metal panel with glass.
.5
Hardware and hinges to have piano hinges.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15305
Page 2
April 25, 2013
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.6
.7
2.3
Finish:
.1
Tub: Primed steel
.2
Door and frame: primed steel
Standard of Acceptance: National Fire Equipment Model No. 102R, Stelpro.
Identification
.1
Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of NFPA 10 1984.
.2
Attach tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for
service dates.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Provide portable fire extinguisher and cabinet and mount in wall during construction. Cabinet to be
surface or recessed as noted on the drawings.
.2
Install or mount extinguishers in cabinets except in mechanical and electrical rooms.
Provide brackets to install extinguishers in mechanical and electrical rooms.
.3
Prior to installing the extinguisher cabinets confirm mounting height and exact location with
Consultant.
.4
Provide fire extinguishers for the following rooms whether shown on the drawings or not:
.1
Main Electrical Room.
.2
Electrical rooms on each floor.
.3
Kitchen/where a stove is being installed.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15330
Page 1
April 25, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
.2
The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a complete sprinkler system.
The Sprinkler Contractor shall be responsible for all of the work associated with this system from
the take-off in the fire main after the fire pump. Division 15 shall be responsible for all piping and
equipment prior to this take-off.
.3
The contractor to submit alternate price for a combined sprinkler and fire stand pipe system
utilizing only one fire pump. The design and the installation shall be strictly in accordance with
NFPA 13 , 14, O.B.C and Authorities having jurisdiction. The installation shall be based on
providing separate main sprinkler risers.
1.2
Reference Standards
.1
Do work in accordance with the following except where specified otherwise.
.1
1.3
NFPA 13, 1994
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
1.4
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010 and NFPA 13 working
plans and design requirements.
Samples
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit samples of following:
.1
1.5
Each type of sprinkler head.
Engineering Design Criteria
.1
Design system to NFPA 13 using following parameters:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Hazard
Space
Hazard
Office Areas/Resident Rooms/Common Areas
Light Hazard - Quick Response
Mechanical/service/storage, main electrical rooms
Ordinary Hazard Group II
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15330
Page 2
April 25, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
.2
Pipe size and layout:
.1
.2
.3
.3
Provide non-standard temperature rating sprinkler heads in accordance to code, including:
.1
.4
1.6
Reserved.
Zoning:
.1
.6
Sprinkler heads in proximity to unit heaters intermediate classification
(107 degrees C).
Water supply:
.1
.5
Pipe size shall be determined using hydraulic design. Existing pipe sizes have
been indicated on the drawings. Contractor to verify existing conditions. The
design shall be strictly in accordance with NFPA 13-96.
Head layout in strict conformance to architectural layout drawings, NFPA 13
and Consultants final approval.
Sprinkler main locations and sizes have been shown on the drawings for
reference only.
System zoning as indicated on drawing.
Pipe locations: To suit specified installation and as shown on the drawings.
Maintenance Data
.1
1.7
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01731 - Maintenance Materials,
Special Tools and Spare Parts.
.2
Provide spare sprinklers and tools as required by NFPA 13, in main sprinkler room.
1.8
Certificates
.1
Provide certificate indicating that the sprinkler installation conforms to NFPA requirements and
specified sprinkler coverage. Certifications, hydraulic calculations and drawings shall be signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Pipe, Fitting and Valves
.1
Pipe:
.1
As indicated in section 15300 and NFPA 13. Where section 15300 is more stringent than
NFPA 13 Section 15300 shall be the minimum standard.
.2
Copper tube: to NFPA 13.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15330
Page 3
April 25, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
.2
Fittings and Joints:
.1
.3
.4
Valves:
.1
ULC listed for fire protection service.
.2
Bronze to NPS 2, cast iron over NPS 2.
.3
Threaded to NPS 2, flanged or rolled grooved over NPS 2.
.4
Ball drip.
Pipe hangers:
.1
2.2
Screwed, soldered, welded, flanged or rolled grooved as indicated in Section 15300 and
NFPA 13. Where Section 15300 is more stringent than NFPA 13 Section 15300 shall be
the minimum standard.
ULC listed for fire protection as specified in Section 15010 and in accordance with
NFPA 13.
Sprinkler Heads
.1
General: to NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service.
.2
Provide head type in accordance to legend and as indicated on the drawings.
2.3
.1
Mechanical Room; Upright brass, intermediate temperature, solder type, Grinnell Model A,
o
Central, Reliable. Activation temperature to be 165 F. Allow for relocation of 10 sprinkler
heads in the mechanical room penthouse.
.2
Upright in Service Areas: Bronze, Grinnell Model A, Central, Reliable.
.3
Side Wall: Chrome, link and lever type with escutcheon, Grinnell; Central, Reliable. Use
extended coverage sprinkler heads as indicated.
.4
All other areas with ceiling: To match existing sprinkler heads.
Signs
.1
Signs for control drain and test valves: to NFPA 13.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15330
Page 4
April 25, 2013
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 13.
.2
Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.3
Testing to be witnessed by or authorities having jurisdiction.
.4
Provide interference drawings as required to coordinate work with other trades. Refer to details on
drawings and locate sprinkler lines to avoid interference with lights, ductwork and other equipment
in the ceiling space.
.5
Locate sprinkler heads as shown on architectural reflected ceiling plans and/or at centre lines of
panels as required to produce orderly and symmetrical patterns with other ceiling-mounted
devices, and to meet or exceed the requirements of authorities and insurance underwriters.
Sprinkler head layouts in non service areas shall be strictly in conformance to architectural
layout drawings; NFPA 13, and Consultants final approval.
.6
All sprinkler piping shall be installed so that all parts of each system may be thoroughly drained,
preferably at the main drain valve. All trapped heads in excess of five heads shall be provided with
drain valves and cast iron plug. Low points where more than twenty heads are trapped shall be
provided with an auxiliary drain valve.
.7
Provide sprinkler head guards in mechanical rooms, storage rooms, sprinkler heads within 2.0 m
of finished floor, and as shown on drawings.
.8
Installation of sprinkler mains in exposed areas shall be in accordance with main locations shown
on the mechanical drawings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING - COPPER
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference Standards
Section 15412
Page 1
April 25, 2013
.1
Do the work in accordance with Plumbing Code under the Ontario Building Code and
local authority having jurisdiction.
.2
ASTM B88-83.
1.2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate following: valves.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Piping
.1
Domestic hot, cold and recirc tubing, within building.
.1
.2
2.2
Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, Type L: to ASTM B88M-85.
All piping shall have certification markings for compliance with ASTM B88-83.
Fittings
.1
Brass or bronze flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.24-1979.
.2
Brass or bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI B16.15-1978.
.3
Cast bronze to ANSI B16.18-1984 or wrought copper and bronze to ANSI B16.24-1980.
2.3
Joints
.1
Rubber gaskets, 1.6 mm thick: to ANSI A21.11-1980 or AIWA C411-80.
.2
Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307-84a, heavy series.
.3
For installation of the potable water system only lead free solder shall be used, as required by the
Ontario Act. Regulation 815/84 of the Ontario Water Resources.
.4
Solder, tin antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B52-83.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY PIPING - COPPER
2.4
Section 15412
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Ball Valves
.1
NPS 2-1/2" and under, branch and equipment isolators, screwed:
.1
Class 125, 860kPa, bronze body, bronze ball, with Teflon seal.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Toyo, Jenkins, Crane, Kitz and Grinnell.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Install tubing close to building structure to minimize furring, conserve headroom and space. Group
exposed piping and run parallel to walls.
.3
Cut square, ream and clean tubing and tube ends, clean recesses of fittings and assemble without
binding.
.4
Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.
.5
All exposed piping in washroom areas to be heavily chrome plated.
.6
Compression fittings are not acceptable.
.7
All valves packing shall be asbestos free.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DRAINAGE & VENT PIPING - CAST IRON, COPPER
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference Standards
.1
PRODUCTS
2.1
Copper Tube and Fittings
2.2
Page 1
April 25, 2013
Do the work in accordance with Plumbing Code under Ontario Water Resources Act and
local authority having jurisdiction.
2
.1
Section 15413
For above ground sanitary, all pumped drain lines, storm and vent piping, Type DWV to:
.1
ASTM B306-81 for copper tube.
.2
CSA B158.1-1976 for cast brass fittings.
.3
ANSI B16.29-1973 for wrought copper fittings.
.4
Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B32-76, type 50A.
.5
ASTM B88-83.
Cast Iron Piping and Fittings
.1
For buried and above ground sanitary, storm and vent piping, minimum NPS 3, to:
CSA B70-M1978 with heavy bituminous coating.
.2
For unburied sanitary, storm and vent piping 100 mm (4") size and larger: Cast iron.
.3
For sanitary, storm and vent piping joints.
.1
Mechanical joints.
.1
.2
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets: to ASTM C564-70 (1982).
SS clamps.
.1
Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space, and to grade indicated, and to suit
installation of related work.
.2
Apply two coats of asphalt paint to pipe laid in, or passing through concrete.
.3
Where piping passes through floor or wall below grade pack and seal in concrete in accordance
with Specification Section 15010.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DRAINAGE & VENT PIPING - CAST IRON, COPPER
Section 15413
Page 2
April 25, 2013
.4
PVC piping in accordance with specification section 15414 is acceptable for below grade piping.
The PVC piping shall be converted to cast iron prior to the point where the pipe penetrates the
floor slab.
.5
No PVC piping shall be utilized above grade.
.6
Provide venting to all plumbing fixtures and fixture groups in accordance to
Ontario Water Resources Act, Plumbing Code most recent edition, and local authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.2
Testing
.1
If tests are required by an authority having jurisdiction, perform tests in the presence of each
governing authority and obtain certification. Repeat tests as often as necessary to
obtain certification.
.2
Perform tests before piping is covered or concealed.
.3
Remove all fittings which will not withstand test pressure, and replace after test.
.4
Eliminate leaks, or remove and refit defective parts.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING - PLASTIC
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Section 15415
Page 1
April 25, 2013
This section shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of
Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
Do the work in accordance with Canadian Plumbing Code and local authority having jurisdiction
except where specified otherwise.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Piping and Fittings
.1
2.2
For buried sanitary storm and vent piping to:
.1
CAN3-B181.2-M85 for PVC DWV or
.2
CSA B182.1-M1983 for plastic DWV.
Joints
.1
Solvent weld for PVC: to ASTM D2564-80.
.2
Solvent weld for ABS: to ASTM D2235-81.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install buried pipe on 150 mm bed of clean sand, shaped to accommodate hubs and fittings, to
line and grade as indicated. Backfill with clean sand.
.2
Install piping parallel and close to walls to conserve space and to grade indicated, and to suit the
installation of related work.
.3
Apply solvent to male end of joints only.
.4
Where piping is connected to a sanitary or storm riser above grade, the plastic pipe shall be
converted to cast iron pipe in accordance with specification Section 15413 prior to the point where
the pipe penetrates the floor slab. No plastic pipe shall be utilized above grade.
-END-
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Page 1
April 25, 2013
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
1.3
Do plumbing specialties and accessories work in accordance with Plumbing Code under
Ontario Water Resources Act and local authority having jurisdiction.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for the following:
.1
Floor drains.
.2
Clean outs.
.3
Water hammer arrestors.
.4
Strainers.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Floor Drains
2.2
Section 15430
.1
General: all floor drains to be provided with trap primer tapping.
.2
Floor Drains - Finished "FD-1"
.1
All epoxy coated cast iron body with reversible clamp device and adjustable 5" diameter
(127 mm) nickel bronze 1/2" (12 mm) thick strainer, secured with stainless steel screws,
4" (100 mm) throat on strainer. In quarry or mosaic tiled areas provide square
SQ
- 6" x 6" (150 mm x 150 mm) polished bronze square ½” (12mm) thick strainer.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: JR Smith 2005-A (round) JR Smith 2005-B (square)
Access Doors
.1
For Gypsum Board Ceilings
.2
Refer to Section 10950 for type of mechanical access doors in acoustic plaster ceilings.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
2.3
Section 15430
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Universal Access Doors
.1
For Walls And Ceilings
.2
Access Doors, 14 GA. (1.7 mm) steel, rust resistant, continuous concealed hinge, with
positive and self opening screwdriver operated lock. Doors in tile walls shall be pan type
and shall suit tile pattern. All other panels shall be prime painted steel. Minimum size of
panels shall be 12" x 18" (300 mm x 450 mm). Wherever possible 24" x 24"
(600 mm x 600 mm) panels shall be used.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Acudor #UF-5000 Access Doors.
2.4
Recessed Access Doors
2.5
For Drywall Applications
.1
Recessed Access Door, 16 GA. (1.5 mm) steel with concealed pivoting rod type hinge and selfopening screwdriver operated lock. Door to be recessed 5/8" (14 mm) to receive drywall. Flange
of door to be galvanized steel taping beading to provide finish of drywall joints.
.1
.2
For Tile Applications
.1
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Acudor #AT-5020.
For ceramic wall tile:
.1
2.6
Standard of Acceptance: Acudor #DW-5015 Recessed Access Door.
Provide stainless steel recessed access door with Allen key lock, located to suit tile
pattern. Standard of Acceptance: Acudor #AT-5020SS.
Fire Rated Access Doors
.1
Insulated
.2
Fire Rated Access Doors, for walls and ceiling ULC 1-1/2 hour 'B' label with maximum
temperature rise of 250o after 30 minutes. Door with 2" (50 mm) insulation, steel, 20 GA. (1 mm)
with 16 GA. (1.6 mm) frame, concealed hinge, self latching ring pull and grey baked enamel finish.
See as required. Where temperature rise is not a factor, access door walls shall be Acudor FB5060 Series.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Acudor Series FW-5050 Fire Rated Access Doors.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
2.7
Section 15430
Page 3
April 25, 2013
Water Hammer Arrestors
.1
Water hammer arrestors with brass piston in a type 'K' copper casting size according to
manufacturer's recommendations chart below to eliminate water hammer and shock from piping
system. Provide water hammer arrestors on hot and cold water supplies to all quick valves,
solenoids, and plumbing fixtures, and locate in an upright position between the last two fixtures on
a line, or horizontally at the end of line closest to supply source.
On projects exceeding three stories in height, provide water hammer arrestors on domestic water
risers as follows. Locate arrestors at the end of riser opposite supply source. Arrestor shall be two
pipe sizes larger than the riser is at the connection point, not exceeding the largest pipe size
diameter in the riser.
Size
A
B
C
D
E
F
.2
2.8
Fixture Units
1 - 11
12 - 32
33 - 60
61 - 113
114 - 154
155 - 330
Model No.
SC - 500
SC - 700
SC - 1000
SC - 1250
SC - 1500
SC - 2000
Conn. Size
1/2" (12 mm)
3/4" (19 mm)
1" (25 mm)
1-1/4" (32 mm)
1-1/2" (38 mm)
2" (50 mm)
Standard of Acceptance: P.P.P. Inc. Water Hammer Arrestors Series 'SC'.
Back Flow Preventers
.1
2.9
Reserved.
Trap Seal Primers
.1
Provide for all floor and hub drains.
.2
Up to Four Drains
.3
Corrosion resistant brass automatic trap seal primer with integral vacuum breaker. Assembly
complete with sediment strainer, union and access door for concealed installations.
.4
Provide NPS 1/2 Type K hard copper tubing connection between trap primer valve and floor drain.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: PPP Model P-1 or P-2 as required, Zurn, Access door with screwdriver
lock, Smith 2699 200 x 200 mm ss or cp access door with screwdriver lock, Enpoco TSP-1 with
access door.
.6
All floor and hub drains shall have their traps primed.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
2.10
Section 15430
Page 4
April 25, 2013
Strainers
.1
860 kPa gauge pressure Y-type strainer with 20 mesh, bronze or stainless steel removable screen.
.2
50 mm nominal and under, bronze, and screwed with brass cap.
Standard of Acceptance: Colton 150 YFB Series, Sarco BT, Armstrong F4SC, Crane 988- 1/2,
Braukmann FY32, Leitch BE, Toyo 380.
.3
65 mm nominal and over, cast iron, flanged with bolted cap.
Standard of Acceptance: Colton BS450B Series, Sarco BF-150, Crane 989-1/2, Armstrong F4FL,
Braukmann FH33, Leitch 528 pipeline basket type.
2.11
Traps
.1
Cast iron body deep seal traps, threaded, hub, or spigot on inlet.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Tests and Certificates
.1
3.2
Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to test back flow preventers, and any other plumbing
equipment and provide certificate as required by local building authority.
Cleanouts
.1
In addition to those required by code, install at base of all soil and waste stacks, and rainwater
leaders and where indicated. Do not locate in stone flooring.
.2
Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.
.3
Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.
3.3
Back Flow Preventers
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
.2
Pipe discharge to nearest drain.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
3.4
Section 15430
Page 5
April 25, 2013
Trap Seal Primers
.1
3.5
Install on cold water supply to nearest plumbing fixture, in concealed space and in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Strainers
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. Allow sufficient room to remove basket.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15440
Page 1
April 25, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
Do the work in accordance with CAN 3-B45 Series-M81 and CSA B125-1975 except where
specified otherwise.
.2
Bath tubs shall be supplied and installed according to CSA C218.1 (C22.2), Bulleting 1260,
Supplement No. 1.
1.3
Shop Drawings
.1
1.4
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
Maintenance Data
.1
1.5
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
Fixtures And Trim
.1
Architectural drawings to govern in determination of number and location of fixtures.
.2
Fixtures to be product of one manufacturer, unless specified otherwise.
.3
Unless specified otherwise, trim to be product of one manufacturer.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Plumbing fixtures shall be as indicated and specified with all required supports, accessories,
wastes, vent and water connections as required to make the fixture complete.
.2
Unless specified otherwise, fixtures shall be white.
.3
Unless specified otherwise, all exposed valves, pipe, escutcheon, etc., shall be polished
chrome finish.
.4
Fixtures and trim shall be new and free of all defects or blemishes. Finished surfaces shall
be clean, smooth, and bright guaranteed not to craze, change colour or scale. Imperfections of
any kind shall be sufficient reason for rejection and the item shall be removed and an acceptable
replacement installed at no additional cost.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15440
Page 2
April 25, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
.5
Provide all lavatory hot and cold water supply lines with a renewable disc, chromium plated lock
shield stop valve.
.6
Provide cast brass chrome plated escutcheon plates with set screws on all water and drain pipes
where such lines pass through, floors, walls and partitions.
.7
Protect fixtures with enamel or glazed surface from damage by covering or coating as
recommended in the Bulletin "Handling & Care of Enamelled C.I. Plumbing Fixtures".
2.2
Water Closets
.1
.2
Type WC-1: Barrier free, Flush Valve, Wall hung, Exposed Flush Valve
.1
Bowl: Wall hung, vitreous china, Ever Clean antimicrobial surface which inhibits the
growth of stain and odor causing bacteria, mold and mildew, elongated syphon jet flush
action bowl, 2-1/8" (54mm) fully glazed internal trapway, 10" x 12" (254mm x 305mm)
large water surface, high efficiency 4.2 LPF (1.1 GPF) to low consumption 6 LPF
(1.6 GPF), 1-1/2" (38mm) top spud with condensate channel, for use with exposed
flush valve. Acceptable Manufacture: American Standard # 3351.001 Afwall flowise
elongated' Toilet, Kohler, Crane
.2
Flush valve: C.P. high efficiency, 4.8 LPF (1.28 GPF) factory set flow, dual filtered bypass, quiet action 'PERMEX' diaphragm type with non-hold open feature, triple seal
handle, high pressure vacuum breaker and seat bumper on back-check angle stop, V.P.
smooth design stop cap. Acceptable Manufacture: : Sloan #111-1.28-YO ROYAL
.3
Seat: Elongated heavy duty solid plastic open front with cover, reinforced stainless steel
check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Acceptable Manufacture: Centoco #820STS
.4
Carrier : block base feet, bolts, cap nuts, adjustable nipple, gasket, test plug and
protection cap.. For Barrier Free Design, mount fixture 16" (406mm) (or as required by
local codes) above finished floor to rim of toilet. Acceptable Manufacture: : Jay R. Smith
#0210Y Single Horizontal Carrier
Type WC-2: Flush Valve, Wall hung, Exposed Flush Valve
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Bowl: Wall hung, vitreous china, Ever Clean antimicrobial surface which inhibits the
growth of stain and odor causing bacteria, mold and mildew, elongated syphon jet flush
action bowl, 2-1/8" (54mm) fully glazed internal trapway, 10" x 12" (254mm x 305mm)
large water surface, high efficiency 4.2 LPF (1.1 GPF) to low consumption 6 LPF
(1.6 GPF), 1-1/2" (38mm) top spud with condensate channel, for use with exposed
flush valve. Acceptable Manufacture: American Standard AFWALL # 3351.001,
Kohler, Crane.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15440
Page 3
April 25, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
2.3
.2
Flush valve: Flush Valve, C.P. high efficiency, 4.8 LPF (1.28 GPF) factory set flow, dual
filtered by-pass, quiet action 'PERMEX' diaphragm type with non-hold open feature, triple
seal handle, high pressure vacuum breaker and seat bumper on back-check angle stop,
V.P. smooth design stop cap. Acceptable Manufacture: : Sloan #111-1.28-YO ROYAL
.3
Seat: Elongated heavy duty solid plastic open front less cover, reinforced stainless steel
check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Acceptable Manufacture: Centoco # 500STSCC
.4
Carrier : block base feet, bolts, cap nuts, adjustable nipple, gasket, test plug and
protection cap. Acceptable Manufacture: Jay R. Smith #0210Y Single Horizontal Carrier
Urinals U-1: Wall hung, Hardwired electronic 'no touch' unit ,Concealed flush valve
.1
Urinal : vitreous china, wash out flush action 1.9 LPF (0.5 GPF)
per flush, extended sides for
privacy, integral flush spreader, 3/4" (19mm) back spud, wall hangers, open trap. American
Standard #047068-0070A Strainer, removable stainless steel. Acceptable Manufacture:
American Standard 6515.005 'WASHBROOK' Low Consumption Urinal
.2
Flush Valve: low consumption, 1.9 LPF (0.5 GPF) factory set flow,
concealed quiet action,
'PERMEX' diaphragm type with proximity sensor, solenoid flush controller, circuitry, and dual
filtered by-pass, high pressure vacuum breaker, back-check angle stop, housed in 13" x 17"
(333mm x 432mm) recessed box with 14-1/2" x 18-1/2" (368mm x 470mm) S.S. face. Sloan #EL154 Transformer, 120/24 VAC 50 VA located in accessible ceiling space.
.3
Acceptable Manufacture Sloan #195-0.5-WB-ES-S ROYAL OPTIMA Electronic 'No Touch' Flush
Valve Unit
.4
Urinal Wall Access Cleanout with round stainless steel face and V.P. screw.
Acceptable Manufacture: JR. Smith #SQ4-1819
.5
Carrier: Steel pipe legs, block base feet supports and bearing plates. Minimum space required for
one to three urinals - 6" (152mm), for four or more urinals - 8" (203mm), finished wall to back of
pipe space. Acceptable Manufacture: Jay R. Smith #0637
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15440
Page 4
April 25, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
2.4
Lavatory : Type L-1 Semi-Countertop - Two Handle Faucet- Barrier free
.1
Basin: 4" (102mm) centres, 22" x 21-1/2" x 6" (559mm x 546mm x 152mm) deep at front edge,
fireclay china, rear overflow, tapered style rim, self-rimming and mounting kit. Provide basin rim
sealant. Acceptable Manufacture: American Standard #9960.403 'MEZZO'
.2
Faucet: C.P. 4"" (102mm) C.C., solid cast brass lead-free body, 1/4 turn ceramic disc valve
cartridges, with aerator vandal-resistant, 1.9 LPM (0.5 GPM)flow aerator outlet. and cast brass 4""
(102mm) blade handles. Acceptable Manufacture: Chicago Faucets #802-V-317-XK/E2805
.3
Drain: C.P., cast brass 1 pc. top, offset open grid with 17ga. (1.5mm), 1-1/4"" (32mm) tailpiece.
Acceptable Manufacture: McGuire #155WC.
.4
Supplies: C.P., polished brass, rigid horizontal nipple 3/8" (9.5mm) x 5" (127mm) long I.P.S., heavy
all brass angle stops, with V.P. loose key, escutcheons and flexible copper risers. Acceptable
Manufacture: McGuire #H165LKN5.
.5
Trap: C.P., polished, cast brass adjustable body, 1-1/4" (32mm) with cleanout plug, seamless
brass wall bend and escutcheon. Acceptable Manufacture: McGuire #8872C.
.6
Sanitary Covering of PVC, vandal-resistant flexible seamless construction, anti-microbial, to
exposed piping (to protect against heat/contusions) as per local codes. Acceptable Manufacture:
McGuire #PW2000WC 'PROWRAP'
2.5
Sink S-1: Counter Mounted - Two Handle Faucet
.1
Sink: countertop mount sink, 2 hole, 4" (102mm) centerset, 392 mm (15-7/16") x 384 mm
(15-1/8") x 152 mm (6"), stainless steel, satin finish rim and bowl, factory applied rim seal, 3-1/2"
(89mm) crumb cup waste assembly, fully undercoated to reduce condensation and resonance,
mounting kit. Acceptable Manufacture: Kindred Commercial #LBS1306-1/2
.2
Faucet: Two handle faucet, 4" (102mm) centerset, solid brass body construction, 89 mm (3-1/2")
rigid/swing gooseneck spout. With Vandal Resistant 8.3 LPM (2.2 GPM) aerator outlet, metal red
and blue index buttons 60 mm (2-3/8") long lever handle with vandal resistant screw. Ceramic 1/4
turn cartridge. Acceptable Manufacture: Chicago Faucets #895-CP-369VP-XK-GN1A-E3VP
.3
Accessories: Supply Provide Faucet Supplies, chrome finish all metal construction, escutcheons
and flexible metal risers.
.4
Provide P-Trap, adjustable all metal construction, 38 mm (1-1/2") inlet, with escutcheon.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15440
Page 5
April 25, 2013
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
2.6
Mop Sink JS-1: Floor Mounted - Precast Terrazzo - Two Handle Faucet
.1
Sink: 36" x 24" x 12" (914mm x 610mm x 304mm) deep, floor mounted, precast terrazzo, with one
piece stainless steel cast integral cap on all four sides and Integral Drain.
Acceptable Manufacture: Stern Williams SB-300 'Serviceptor'
.1
Faucet: C.P. 8" (203mm) C.C., wall mounted, solid cast brass leadfree body, 1/4 turn
ceramic disc valve cartridges, cast brass lever handles, body mounted vacuum breaker,
integral stops, 36" (915mm) hose and hanger. Acceptable Manufacture: Chicago
Faucets #305VB-R-XK-Hose Faucet
.2
Accessories: Stern Williams #T-40 S.S. Mop Hanger, triple. Stern Williams #TC-3 Mop
Sink Drain Gasket, connection for 3" (75mm) pipe. Stern Williams #BP S.S. Back Splash
Panels, number of panels to suit installation. Provide 'p' Trap
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Fixture Installation
.1
Connect fixtures complete with supplies and drains, traps and cleanouts, supported level and
square. Hot water faucets shall be on left.
.2
Provide venting for all plumbing fixtures as required by codes.
.3
All handicap fixtures to be mounted at heights to be in accordance with all codes and
local authorities having jurisdiction.
.4
Provide chrome plated flexible supplies to fixtures with screw driver stops, reducers
and escutcheons.
.5
All piping shall be recessed unless otherwise approved. Piping to be installed in areas shall be run
in neat parallel lines as tight as possible to walls and ceilings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15602
Page 1
April 25, 2013
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference Standards
.1
1.2
Do HVAC water treatment in accordance with ASME Boiler Code Section VII, and requirements
and standards of regulating authorities, except where specified otherwise.
Shop
.1
1.3
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for water treatment equipment for incorporation into maintenance
manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Manufacturer
.1
Equipment, chemicals and service by one manufacturer.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Klenzoid, Drew, Dearborn.
2.2
Bypass Feeder
.1
2.3
Welded steel construction, pressure rating 1400 kPa, temperature rating 90°C.
Bypass Filter
.1
2.4
Welded steel construction, pressure rating 1400 kPa, temperature rating 90°C. Filter Unit to be
5% of total recirculation rate for all closed systems only.
Pumps
.1
Piston type; adjustment range 0 - 100%, pump on or off; plus or minus 1.0% repetitive accuracy;
pressure relief valve, stainless steel piston, double ball valves.
.2
Diaphragm type; adjustment range 0 - 100 %, pump on or off, plus or minus 1.0% repetitive
accuracy, pressure relief valve.
2.5
Glycol Systems
.1
Provide and install an automatic glycol feed system consisting of:
.1
510 litre polyethylene tank complete with stand, agitator bracket, and pump shelf.
.2
Motor driven glycol feed pump; capacity 7.6 litres per hour; fed from tank.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15602
Page 2
April 25, 2013
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
.3
Agitator; complete with 316 stainless steel shaft, 316 stainless steel propeller and 1/4 hp,
110 volt TENV motor.
.4
Glycol control system shall be controlled by the Chemical Demand Controller
specified above.
.5
Provide all required starters for the agitator and the glycol feed pump.
.2
Pressure switch installed on the glycol system to activate the glycol feed panel.
.3
Provide sufficient pre-mixed propylene glycol to form a 40 percent solution in each system.
.4
Provide sufficient glycol to fill the glycol feed tank after the system has been charged.
.5
Provide test kit for glycol.
.6
Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of equipment.
.7
Provide material safety data sheets for chemicals and reagents.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of equipment.
.2
Pipe blow-off connections to nearest drain.
3.2
Pre-Operational Cleaning Of System
.1
Provide a copy of recommended cleaning procedures and chemicals for approval by Engineer.
.2
Provide chemicals and labour for cleaning all heating and cooling water piping systems, including
pumps, heat exchangers, headers and coils.
.3
Prior to chemical cleaning, the systems shall be inspected to ensure removal of heavy debris and
excessive dirt and oil. Temporary strainers shall be installed on the suction side of each pump.
.4
Provisions shall be made for temporary connections between the supply and return mains in the
system to permit circulation of the cleaner. A 25 mm pipe connection shall be provided on the
suction side of the circulating pumps for introduction of the cleaning solution.
.5
Each system shall be flushed to remove loose dirt and shall be hydrostatically tested to ensure
that there are no leaks. Rotation of pumps shall be checked.
.6
The contractor shall introduce a neutral pH cleaner and rust remover into each system at a
dosage recommended by the water treatment supplier. The cleaner shall not attack carbon steel,
copper, stainless steel, bronze, brass, aluminum, plastics or natural and synthetic rubbers.
“Flash rusting” shall not occur after cleaning.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15602
Page 3
April 25, 2013
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
.7
The cleaner shall be circulated at a temperature of 1° C to 80° C for a period of not less than
72 hours. PH adjustment shall be carried out by the water treatment supplier’s representative.
.8
Each system shall be drained, refilled with fresh water, recirculated for a period of 12 hours,
drained a second time, and immediately refilled and treated with the recommended
corrosion inhibitor.
.9
The water treatment company shall provide the loan of a drum pump and dolly to facilitate the
introduction of the cleaner into the system.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNITS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Section 15701
Page 1
April 25, 2013
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
A/C Packaged Units
.1
Provide units of the size, type and characteristics as indicated in the A/C packaged schedule.
.2
All units shall be A.R.I. certified and CSA approved. All units shall have the A.R.I. seal and the
CSA approval label. All units shall have COP’s to meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.
.3
Casings shall be constructed from hot dipped galvanized steel lined internally with 1/2 inch thick,
1-1/2 lb. density, coated acoustic type fibre glass insulation. Edges shall be sealed or tucked
under flanges to prevent erosion. All construction shall meet NFPA 90-A. All piping connections
shall protrude through the cabinet for connection to flexible hoses.
.4
The units shall have a hermetically sealed refrigeration circuit using refrigerant R-22 consisting of:
compressor, reversing valve, water to refrigerant exchanger, expansion device and airside coil.
Compressors shall be hermetic type with spring vibration isolation and thermal overload protection.
The heat exchanger shall be rated for 400 psig on the water side and 450 psig on the refrigerant
side. The finned tube air to refrigerant heat exchanger shall have copper tubes which are
expanded into configured aluminum plate fins. Coil shall be designed for 425 psig operating
pressure. Refrigerant metering devices shall be arranged for reversing refrigerant flow.
Refrigerant circuit shall have 3 Schrader valves for servicing.
.5
The units shall have extra quiet construction consisting of additional sound insulating material,
spring isolated compressors and a heavy gauge sheet metal plate lined with rubber on both sides
to which compressors are then mounted. Rubber in shear blocks are not acceptable.
.6
Operating and safety controls shall include: low suction temperature switch; high refrigerant
pressure lockout switch; compressor overload protection; and supply fan overload protection.
Reset of safety devices shall be interrupting the power supply to the unit.
.7
A/C packaged units shall have removable panels allowing access to all internal components.
Fan access panels shall be individually removable to permit fan operation during compressor
operation checkout. Cabinets shall have separate holes and knockouts for entrance of line
voltage and low voltage control wiring. Supply and return water connections shall be copper RPT
fittings. Condensate connection shall be 3/4" I.D. All connections shall protrude through the
cabinet for connection to flexible hoses.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNITS
Section 15701
Page 2
April 25, 2013
.8
Units up to Size 060 shall have a direct drive forward curved centrifugal fan with a multi-speed,
PSC type motor isolated from the fan housing with integral mounting brackets. Larger sizes shall
be belt drive with an adjustable base for proper belt tension. The fan housing shall have a
removable orifice ring to facilitate fan motor and fan wheel removal. Fan wheels shall be
dynamically balanced.
.9
All ceiling units shall be provided with hanger bracket and rubber isolator kit for field installation.
Provide return air duct collar kit for field installation for those units with ducted return connections.
Unit shall be provided with 2" thick throw away filters.
.10
All vertical units shall be left or right hand piping connections as required on the drawings. Unit
shall have a 2 inch thick throw away filter serviceable from either side with a duct collar for ducted
return connections.
.11
The control box shall contain: controls for compressor, reversing valve, and fan motor; control
power transformer; and a terminal block for low voltage field wiring connections. Operating and
safety controls shall include: low suction temperature (freezestat) switch; high refrigerant pressure
lock out switch; compressor overload protection; and supply fan overload protection. Reset of
safety devices shall be by interrupting the power supply to the unit.
.12
Units shall have microprocessor based control system. Unit control logic shall provide heating and
cooling operation as required by the thermostat. Control system shall provide the following:
.1
time delay compressor operation
.2
delayed de-energization of the reversing valve
.3
compressor short cycle protection
.4
random unit start up
.5
high refrigerant pressure alarm
.6
low suction pressure alarm
.7
condensate overflow alarm
.8
brownout alarm
.9
service diagnosis.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNITS
.13
.14
Section 15701
Page 3
April 25, 2013
The microprocessor shall include the following functions based on remote signals:
.1
load shed
.2
emergency shutdown
.3
night setback and override
.4
pump restart on night setback
Unit shall be provided with the following field installed accessories:
.1
Each unit shall be supplied with fire rated flexible hoses and supply, return and
condensate connection. Hoses to have braided stainless steel outer covering.
Components shall meet the requirements of ASTME 84-81a, NFPA 225 and UL723.
.2
Each unit shall be provided with two (2) combination/balancing/shut-off valves.
.3
Each unit shall be provided with return air duct collar kit.
.15
Each A/C packaged shall include a five (5) year refrigeration circuit warranty. This warranty
includes the labour expense at the warranty repair station but does not include labour or
transportation to cover A/C packaged removal and reinstallation.
.16
Units shall be provided with a refrigerant pressure controlled water regulating valve to be field
installed by the contractor in the leaving water line. Valve shall close when unit is off and modulate
water flow when unit is operating to maintain proper head pressure.
.17
Units shall be designed to start and operate continuously in an ambient of 40 degrees F, with
entering air and water at 40 degrees F.
.18
The unit shall be supplied with a field installed programmable microelectronic wall thermostat for
cooling and heating, night setback, night setup, and day/night time clock operation. The
thermostat shall have a system "On-Off-", temperature "Heat-Auto-Cool" and fan
"On-Auto" switches.
.19
The units shall be provided with relays to energize the pump on demand. Division 15900 to wire all
the units back to the pump starter.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturers
.1
Standard of Acceptance: Base Bid: Mcquay. Florida Heat Pump; Climate Master.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNITS
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
Section 15701
Page 4
April 25, 2013
.1
Install horizontal A/C packaged units, using hanger kit and rubber isolators provided by A/C
packaged units’ supplier, in accordance to detail on the drawings and manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Install all units neat and level.
.3
Install flexible hose and duct connections between A/C packaged units and piping/ductwork.
.4
Ensure condensate drain has minimum 1:100 slope away from unit. Height of trap to suit
manufacturer’s requirements.
.5
Provide system cleaning and flashing for all new A/C packaged units lines before connecting to the
existing system.
.6
Install horizontal A/C packaged units using hanger kit and rubber isolators provided by
A/C packaged units’ supplier.
.7
Install vertical A/C packaged units on neoprene vibration isolation pads.
.8
Install all units neat and level following manufacturer’s instructions.
.9
Install flexible pipe ball valves and duct connections between A/C packaged units and
piping/ductwork.
.10
System cleaning and flushing shall be completed as described in the "General instruction for
Mechanical Sections".
.11
Install loop water controller where shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
.12
Install remote alarm panel where shown on drawings and according to manufacturer’s instructions.
.13
Install wells, flow switch, and thermostat in the main line leaving the closed circuit cooler.
.14
Install all control wiring required to provide a complete and operating system between loop water
controller and water cooled air conditioning units and to all accessories as per manufacturer's
wiring diagrams.
.15
All control wiring, conduit, accessories, etc., shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
specified by Division 16 and the local electrical authority.
.16
All electrical interlock and control wiring between closed circuit cooler, circulation pumps, etc., and
loop water controller shall be the responsibility of this section as part of the Loop Water Control
System.
.17
All power wiring from motor control centres and/or motor starter panels to driven motor of
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER COOLED PACKAGED A/C UNITS
Section 15701
Page 5
April 25, 2013
equipment shall be by Division 16.
.18
Co-ordinate with Electrical Division all power wiring to A/C packaged units, loop water controller
and accessories.
.19
Furnish the services of a trained representative of the equipment manufacturer to supervise the
installation, wiring, set up and testing of the loop water controller. Upon completion of the
installation, the manufacturer shall instruct a representative of the owner on the proper operation
of the loop water control system.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Section 15702
Page 1
April 25, 2013
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
1.3
Do piping system work in accordance with ANSI B31.1-1983.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples
and Mock-ups.
.2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.3
Indicated on manufacturer’s catalogue literature the following: - valves.
1.4
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Pipe
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53-84a Grade B, as follows:
.1
2.2
To NPS 6, Schedule 40.
Pipe Joints
.1
Screwed fittings with pulverized lead paste.
.2
For mechanical rooms and other areas where piping is exposed only, grooved piping concept may
be used in lieu of welded method on all heating and cooling water and other building services,
provided they conform to the following:
.1
The pressure and temperature requirements of the manufacturer.
.2
Recommended usage by the manufacturer.
.3
Exposed piping only.
.4
Rolled grooved: Zero flex couplings for use in the mechanical rooms to give
system rigidity.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
Section 15702
Page 2
April 25, 2013
.5
All grooved products, including couplings, fittings, valves and building service specialty
items for each particular use, to be by one manufacturer. Condenser water piping contains
40% Propylene Glycol. Grooved piping used shall be specially suitable to E.G.
.6
All grooved fittings to be manufactured from ductile iron conforming to ASTM-A-536.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Gruvlock and Newman-Hattersley
.3
NPS 2-1/2 and over: welded fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1-1973.
.4
Roll grooved: standard coupling to CSA B242-M1980. Rigid couplings for use in the
mechanical rooms.
.5
Flanges: plain or raised face.
.6
Flange gaskets: to ANSI B16.21-1978, ANSI B16.20-1973 or ANSI A21.11-1980.
.7
Pipe thread taper: to ANSI B2.1-1968.
.8
Bolts and nuts: to ANSI B18.2.1-1972 and ANSI B18.2.2-1972.
.9
Rolled grooved coupling gaskets: Type EPDM for temperature range minus 35 C to plus 100°C.
2.3
Fittings
.1
.2
2.4
Pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded:
.1
Cast iron pipe flanges: Class 125 to ANSI B16.1-1975.
.2
Malleable iron screwed fittings: Class 150 to ANSI B16.3-1977.
.3
Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ANSI B16.5-1981.
.4
Steel butt-welding fittings: to ANSI B16.9a-1981.
.5
Unions, malleable iron: to ANSI B16.3- 1977.
Fittings for roll grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47- 77 ductile iron to ASTM A536-80.
Gate Valves
.1
NPS 2-1/2 and over in mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
Rising stem: to MSS SP-70-1976, class 125 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, OS& Y
bronze trim.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
.2
2.5
Section 15702
Page 3
April 25, 2013
NPS 2-1/2 and over other than mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
Non-rising stem: to MSS SP-70-1976, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body,
bronze trim, bolted bonnet.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
Globe Valves
.1
.2
2.6
NPS 2 and under, screwed:
.1
To MSS SP-80-1974, Class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable
composition disc.
.2
Lockshield handles: as indicated.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged:
.1
To MSS SP-85-1976, Class 125, 860 kPa, F.F. flange, cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y,
bolted bonnet, bronze disc and seat ring.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
Butterfly Valves
.1
.2
NPS 2-1/2 and over, full lug body:
.1
To MSS SP-67-1976, Class 150, 1 MPa WOG water, cast iron body with cast iron or
bronze disc, stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM liner, locking handle, gear operators
over NPS shutoff up to 200 psi (1720 kPa) rating if downstream equipment is removed.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Centreline, Kitz, Grinnell and
Newman Hattersley.
NPS 2 1/2 and over, for grooved end pipe:
.1
Grooved end butterfly valves shall have dual-seal disc providing bubble tight service up to
300 psi. Ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade E EPDM disc coating. Glycol
service - EPDM disc coating with S.S. trim.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic Vic-300, Gruvlock and Newman-Hattersley.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
2.7
Section 15702
Page 4
April 25, 2013
Swing Check Valves
.1
.2
.3
2.8
NPS 2 and under, screwed:
.1
To MSS SP-80-1974, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,
regrindable seat.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
NPS 2-1/2 and up, flanged:
.1
To MSS SP-70-1976, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, regrind renewable
seat, bronze disc, bolted cap.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
NPS 2 to 4 for grooved end pipe:
.1
To MSS SP-71-1976, Class 125, 860 kPa, ductile iron body, bronze or stainless steel
discs, stainless steel spring, stainless steel shaft, EPDM seat.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Gruvlock and Newman-Hattersley.
Silent Check Valves
.1
.2
2.9
NPS 2 and under:
.1
To ASTM B62-82a, Class 125, 860 kPa cast steel, wafer style, brass seat rings, brass
inner valve, stainless steel spring (heavy duty spring in vertical down flow application).
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Moves & Groves, Kitz, Grinnell and Newman-Hattersley.
NPS 4 and over, for grooved end pipe:
.1
To MSS SP-71-1976, Class 125, 860 kPa, ductile iron body, bronze or stainless
steel discs, EPDM seat.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic, Gruvlock and Newman-Hattersley.
Balancing Valves
.1
General
.1
Valves shall be capable of positive shutoff, circuit drain connection, precision flow
balancing with lockable memory and precise full measurement.
.2
Provide as indicated on drawings and schematics.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
.2
.3
.4
Section 15702
Page 5
April 25, 2013
NPS 2 and under:
.1
Globe style of non-ferrous copper alloy or bronze casting.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong, DeZurich. Bell & Gossett, Tour and Anderson and
Newman-Hattersley.
NPS 2-1/2 and over:
.1
Glove style design.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong, DeZurich, Bell & Gossett, Tour and Anderson and
Newman-Hattersley.
Provide one flow measuring kit, complete with flow/pressure graphs, to leave with the
building operator.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Piping
.1
Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to
conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping
wherever practical.
.3
Slope piping up in direction of flow.
.4
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or
positive venting.
.5
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves
and fittings.
.6
Ream pipes, clean scale and dirt, inside and outside, before and after assembly.
.7
Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains, if branch line is half size or smaller than main.
Hole saw or drill and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to
welding saddle.
3.2
Valves
.1
Install valves as shown on drawings with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise.
.2
Install ball valves for isolating valves up to and including 2-1/2” in diameter.
.3
Install gate valves at all branch take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
STEEL PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS HEATING/COOLING
Section 15702
Page 6
April 25, 2013
.4
Install globe valves where indicated and in by- pass around control valves.
.5
Provide silent check valves on discharge of pumps in vertical pipes with downward flow and
as indicated.
.6
Provide swing check valves as indicated.
.7
Provide balancing valves: as indicated on schematics, plans or details.
3.3
Testing
.1
Test system in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
.2
For glycol systems, retest after cleaning with specified quality of glycol. Repair any leaking joints,
fittings or valves.
3.4
Spare Parts
.1
3.5
Furnish following spare parts:
.1
Valve seats: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.2
Discs: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.3
Stem packing: one for every ten valves, each size. Minimum one.
.4
Valve handles: two of each size.
.5
Gaskets for flanges: one for every ten flanges.
Valve Packing
.1
3.6
All valve packing shall be asbestos free.
Valve Stems
.1
All valves for this project shall be rising stem unless stated otherwise.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS - HEATING
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate on manufacturer’s catalogue literature the following: valves.
1.2
Section 15703
Page 1
April 25, 2013
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Piping
.1
2.2
Type K or L hard drawn copper tubing: to ASTM B88M-85.
Fittings
.1
Cast bronze: to ANSI B16.18-1978.
.2
Wrought copper and bronze: to ANSI B16.22-1980.
2.3
Flanges
.1
Brass or bronze: to ANSI B16.15-1978.
.2
Cast iron: to ANSI B16.4-1977.
2.4
Joints
.1
2.5
Solder, tin-antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32-83.
Gate Valves
.1
.2
NPS 2-1/2 and over, in mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
Rising stem: to MSS SP-70-1976, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body, OS&Y
bronze trim.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell..
NPS 2-1/2 and over, other than mechanical rooms, flanged:
.1
CEL JOB NO.12221
Non-rising stem: to MSS SP-70-1976, class 125, 860 kPa, FF flange, cast-iron body,
bronze trim, bolted bonnet.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS - HEATING
.2
2.6
Section 15703
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell.
Globe Valves
.1
.2
.3
2.7
NPS 2 and under, soldered:
.1
To MSS SP-80-1974, Class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, renewable composition disc,
screwed over bonnet.
.2
Lockshield handles: as indicated.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell.
NPS 2 and under, screwed:
.1
To MSS SP-80-1974, class 150, 1 MPa, bronze body, screwed over bonnet, renewable
composition disc.
.2
Lockshield handles: as indicated.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell..
NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged:
.1
To MSS SP85-1976, Class 125, 860 kPa, F.F. flange, cast iron body, bronze trim, OS&Y
bolted bonnet, bronze disc and seat ring.
.2
Standards of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz.
Butterfly Valves
.1
2.8
NPS 2-1/2 and over, lug body:
.1
To MSS SP-67-1976, Class 150, 1 MPa WOG water, cast iron body with stainless steel or
bronze disc and stainless steel stem, replaceable EPDM-Nordel rubber seat, locking
handle, gear operators over NPS 6.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Centreline, Kitz, Grinnell.
.3
Provide electric actuator for automatic butterfly valves on supply and return lines for
cooling towers.
Swing Check Valves
.1
NPS 2 and under, soldered:
.1
CEL JOB NO.12221
To MSS SP-80-1974, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,
regrindable seat.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS - HEATING
.2
.2
.3
2.9
Section 15703
Page 3
April 25, 2013
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell.
NPS 2 and under, screwed:
.1
To MSS SP-80-1974, class 125, 860 kPa, bronze body, bronze swing disc, screw in cap,
regrindable seat.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell.
NPS 2-1/2 and up, flanged:
.1
To MSS SP-70-1976, class 125, 860 kPa, cast iron body, FF flange, renewable seat,
bronze disc, bolted cap.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Crane, Jenkins, Toyo, Kitz, Grinnell.
Balancing Valves
.1
.2
.3
General
.1
Valves shall be capable of positive shutoff, circuit drain connection, precision flow
balancing with lockable memory and precise full measurement.
.2
Each meter connection to have positive shutoff valves.
.3
Provide as indicated on drawings and schedules.
NPS 2 and under:
.1
Globe style of non-ferrous copper alloy or bronze casting.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong, DeZurich, Bell & Gossett, Tour and Anderson.
NPS 2-1/2 and over:
.1
Glove style design.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong, DeZurich, Bell & Gossett, Tour and Anderson.
.4
Provide chain of sufficient length to extend to within 2 m (7 ft.) of operating platform or floor for free
hanging chains, or to within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of floor in locations where chain can be secured to wall or
column. Provide wall hook as required for securing chain to wall or column.
.5
Provide chain wheels complete with guide, rustproof chain and of size recommended by the valve
manufacturer for proper operation of the valve.
CEL JOB NO.12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER PIPING VALVES AND FITTINGS - HEATING
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Piping
Section 15703
Page 4
April 25, 2013
.1
Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to
conserve headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping
wherever practical.
.3
Slope piping up in direction of flow.
.4
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or
positive venting.
.5
Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves
and fittings.
3.2
Valves
.1
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise.
.2
Install ball valves up to and including 2-1/2", and butterfly valves of 2-1/2" and above at all branch
take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated.
.3
Install globe valves for balancing and in by- pass around control valves.
.4
Provide silent check valves on discharge of pumps and as indicated.
.5
Provide swing check valves and as indicated.
3.3
Testing
.1
3.4
Test system in accordance with Section 15010 - Mechanical General Provisions.
Valve Packing
.1
3.5
All valve packing shall be asbestos free.
Valve Stems
.1
All valves for this project shall only be rising stem unless stated otherwise.
- END -
CEL JOB NO.12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER TUBING & FITTINGS - REFRIGERANT
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Section 15705
Page 1
April 25, 2013
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
1.3
Do tubing system work in accordance with CSA B52-M1983 and ANSI B31.5 (latest edition).
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate detailed piping diagrams, showing traps, slopes, sight glass, accumulator, etc.
1.4
Scope of Work
.1
All other refrigerant piping shown on the drawings and referred to these specification including
rough-ins for future work shall be carried out by Division 15 Contractor.
2
PRODUCT
2.1
Tubing
.1
Provide processed tubing for refrigeration installation, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed.
.2
Hard copper tube, Type K or L, to ASTM B88M- 83.
.3
Annealed copper tube to ASTM B280-83, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52-M1983.
2.2
Fittings
.1
Service: design pressure 2070 kPa and temperature 12°C.
.2
Brazed: wrought copper to ANSI B16.22-1980 or cast bronze to MIL-F-1183E.
.3
Flanged: bronze or brass, Class 150 and Class 300 to ANSI B16.24-1979.
.4
Flare: Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ANSI B16.26-1975.
2.3
Joints
.1
Brazing: Silver solder, 45 Ag-15% Cu or copper-phosphorous, 95 Cu-5%P.
.2
Gaskets: non-metallic to ANSI B16.21-1978.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
COPPER TUBING & FITTINGS - REFRIGERANT
2.4
Section 15705
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Refrigeration Accessories
.1
Supply and install all necessary refrigeration accessories in the refrigeration piping, including, but
not limited to the following:
.1
Vibration absorbers shall be provided on refrigerant line connections as required and
indicated on the drawings. Absorbers shall be all bronze construction with braided wire
exterior jacket.
.2
All refrigerant line clamps shall include a neoprene sleeve.
.3
In general, refrigerant accessories shall be Mueller, Alco, or Henry.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation and Testing
.1
Install and test in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI B31.5 - Latest Edition Code for
pressure piping Section 5 "refrigerant piping" and CSA Standard B52 "Mechanical Refrigeration
Code", latest issue.
.2
Horizontal runs shall be sloped toward compressor to insure oil return.
.3
All refrigerant required for re-charging the system shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
.4
Refrigerant piping shall be evacuated prior to connection to pre-evacuated equipment to ensure
removal of all moisture and non-condensable gases.
.5
The entire refrigeration system, not evacuated by the manufacturer, shall be completely evacuated
and charged in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
.6
Under no circumstances shall the refrigerant compressor be used to evacuate the system. The
evacuation shall be accomplished by the use of a vacuum pump at an ambient temperature not
less than 35°F (1.7°C) to ensure removal of all moisture and non-condensable gases.
.7
After testing, evacuation and charging is completed, the system shall be allowed to operate under
normal conditions for a minimum period of 24 hours. At that time, the moisture indicator shall
indicate a dry system. If it does not so indicate, the dryer shall be changed and the unit allowed to
operate for 24 hours. This procedure shall continue until the moisture indicator indicates a
thoroughly dry system.
.8
The lines should be installed so that they will not obstruct services access to the indoor coil, air
handling system or filter.
.9
Purging of the systems shall be strictly in accordance with M.O.E by-laws and regulations.
Mechanical contractor will be liable for any refrigerants leak.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER SPECIALTIES - HEATING AND COOLING
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings
Section 15715
Page 1
April 25, 2013
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate on manufacturer’s catalogue literature: expansion tanks, air vents, separators, valves,
strainers and vertical in-line pump valving.
1.2
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Automatic Air Vent
.1
Standard float vent with brass body and NPS 1/8 connection and rated at 690 kPa
working pressure.
.2
Industrial float vent with cast iron body and NPS 1/2 connection and rated at 860 kPa
working pressure.
.3
Float: solid material suitable for 115°C working temperature.
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Amtrol Nos. 700, 702; Maid-O-Mist No. 7; Braukman EA122; Taco 417
for standard float vent.
2.2
Air Separator - In-line
.1
In-line air separator.
.2
Working pressure: 860 kPa.
.3
Size: As indicated on Schematic.
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Amtrol, Bell & Gossett Airtrol, Taco.
2.3
Water Make-up Pressure Reducing Valve
.1
Adjustable low pressure: 55 to 172 kPa.
.2
Low inlet pressure check valve.
.3
Removable strainer.
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Bell & Gossett, Taco.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER SPECIALTIES - HEATING AND COOLING
2.4
Section 15715
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Combination Low Pressure Relief and Reducing Valve
.1
Adjustable pressure setting: 206 kPa relief, 55 to 172 kPa reducing.
.2
Low inlet pressure check valve.
.3
Removable strainer.
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Bell & Gossett, Taco, Watts.
2.5
Pipe Line Strainer
.1
NPS 1/2 - 2: bronze body, screwed connections.
.2
NPS 2-1/2 - 12: cast steel body, flanged connections or grooved end.
.3
Size: Line size.
.4
Blowdown connection: NPS 1.
.5
Screen: stainless steel with perforated size of .79 mm for strainers 2 NPS and less, 1.5 mm for
strainers 2 1/2 NPS and larger.
.6
Working pressure: 860 kPa.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: Sarco, Watts, A.S. Leitch
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Install according to piping layout. Pipe drains and blow off connections to nearest drain.
.2
Maintain proper clearance around equipment to permit performance of service maintenance.
Check final location with Consultant if different from that indicated prior to installation.
.3
Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Consultant's directive.
.4
Refer to manufacturer's installation drawings.
.5
Check that all openings for appurtenances and equipment operating weight conform to
shop drawings.
3.2
Strainers
.1
Install in horizontal or down flow lines.
.2
Ensure clearance for removal of basket.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WATER SPECIALTIES - HEATING AND COOLING
3.3
Air Vents
.1
Install at high points of systems.
.2
Pipe overflow to nearest drain.
.3
On large-capacity air vent, install gate valve upstream of air vent.
3.4
Air Separators
.1
3.5
Install where indicated and to manufacturer’s instructions.
Pressure Safety Relief Valves
.1
Install where indicated.
.2
Pipe outlet to nearest drain.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Section 15715
Page 3
April 25, 2013
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate for each item as applicable:
1.2
Section 15717
Page 1
April 25, 2013
.1
Manufacturer, model number, line content, pressure and temperature rating.
.2
Movement handled; axial, lateral, angular and the amounts of each.
.3
Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.
Maintenance Data
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Expansion Joints
.1
.2
2.2
Slip Type:
.1
For axial pipe movement: complete with packing chamber, limit stops, lubrication fittings or
lubricant impregnated packing rings.
.2
Packing material: as recommended by manufacturer with adjustable packing gland.
.3
Slip pipe: hard chrome plated to ASTM A53-82, carbon steel.
.4
Standard of Acceptance: Rockwell, Tube Turns, Flexonics.
Bellows Type:
.1
For axial, lateral or angular movements with stainless steel bellows, guides control rings
travel stops.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Flexonics, Garlock, Badger, Tube Turn.
Flexible Connections
.1
Inner hose: bronze or ss corrugated.
.2
Braided wire mesh ss outer jacket.
.3
Size and end connection: as required.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AND EXPANSION JOINTS
Section 15717
Page 2
April 25, 2013
.4
Complete unit suitable for working pressure of 1034 kPa and working temperature of 93°C.
.5
Capacity to absorb 150 mm transverse movement with length across flexible portion not less than
six diameters. Maximum length of hose: 600 mm.
.6
Standard of Acceptance: Anaconda Flexpipe, Flexonics, United, Vibra-Flo.
2.3
Vibration Flexible Connections
.1
Where shown on the drawings and identified herein, provide single or double sphere design
neoprene flexible connectors.
.2
Provide a neoprene flexible connector for all pumps with an NPS of 50 mm (2") or greater. This
includes all condenser, chilled water, hot water and glycol pumps.
.3
Connectors shall be rated at a minimum of 150 psi at 220°F.
.4
Flexible connectors with control rods will not be accepted.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Mason flex type MFNC, MFNEC or MFTNC.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Provide where shown on the drawings and listed in the specification.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15720
Page 1
April 25, 2013
PUMPS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements outlined in Section 15010.
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit shop drawings of pump curves and motors sizes for review.
.3
Indicate piping, valves and fittings shipped loose by packaged equipment supplier, showing their
final location in field assembly.
1.3
Maintenance Data
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
ASME Standards
.2
CSA B51-95,
.3
National Electric Code Standards
Boiler, Pressure Vessel and Pressure Piping Codes.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Vertical In-line Commercial Duty Circulating Pumps
.1
General:
.1
Pumps 7.5 H.P. and less shall be close coupled type.
.2
Pumps 10 H.P. and larger shall be split coupler type with spacer coupling.
.2
Pump casing shall be cast iron to ASTM A48 Class 30, suitable for 1206 kPa working pressure at
60°C (175 psig at 140°F). Ductile iron to ASTM A536 grade 65-45-12 for working pressures up to
2240 kPa at 163°C (325 psig at 250°F). The casing shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 percent
of the maximum working pressure.
.3
Casing shall be radially split to allow removal of the rotating element without disturbing the
pipe connections.
.4
The casing suction and discharge shall be the same size and shall be provided with drilled and
tapped seal vent, drain and pressure gauge connections.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15720
Page 2
April 25, 2013
PUMPS
.5
Pump impeller shall be bronze, fully enclosed type, dynamically balanced, sized for not more than
90% of maximum impeller diameter which casing can accommodate.
.6
Shaft shall be stainless steel to ASTM A276 Type 416 with bronze shaft sleeve extending the full
length of the mechanical seal area.
.7
Seal assembly:
.1
Pumps 7.5 H.P. and less:
.1
.2
.3
.8
Inside type, single-spring design with carbon rotating face against O-ring mounted
Ni-Resist stationary seat, EPDM elastomer with stainless steel spring and
hardware. Seal vent line shall be factory installed and shall be piped from the
seal area to the pump suction connection.
The seal within the pump shall be internally flushed.
For operating pressures over 1206 kPa (175 psi) provide tungsten carbide rotating
face.
For 10 H.P. and larger pumps,
.1
Coupler shall be self-aligning, split type of high tensile aluminum alloy to permit servicing
of mechanical seal without disturbing the pump. Provide a lower seal chamber
throttle bushing.
.2
For pumps with differential pressures less than 207 kPa (30 psi) (69 ft) provide factory
installed flush lines with manual vent, 50 Micron cartridge filter and floating ball
sight indicator.
.3
For pumps with differential pressures greater than 207 kPa (30 psi) (69 ft) provide a
factory installed cyclone separator with sight flow indicator.
.9
Motor: resilient mounted, open drip proof, sleeve bearing, split type spacer coupling to permit
servicing of mechanical seal without disturbing motor or electric wiring. Coupling to be protected by
guard. Motors shall conform to high efficiency type specified in Section 15010.
.10
Standard of Acceptance: Armstrong Series 4300/4380, ITT, Series 80.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
In line circulators: install as indicated by flow arrows. Support at flanges or near unions on outlets
of unit. Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. Check rotation.
.2
Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or hangers for
this purpose. Refer to drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions for details.
.3
Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.
.4
Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15720
Page 3
April 25, 2013
PUMPS
.5
Change cartridge filter on regular basis prior to, and at turn over to Owner.
.6
Provide strainers, isolating valves and check valves on each vertical in-line pump and base
mounted pump. Provide combination valves as specified in Section 15715 and as shown on
the drawings.
.7
Contractor to provide and install one pressure gauge, piped to pump suction, discharge and
strainer inlet. Pressure gauge tappings with necessary isolating valves to enable differential
pressure reading across pump and strainer to be taken.
.8
Contractor shall cover motor during construction and have area clean of construction debris before
starting the motor.
.9
Contractor to follow the manufacturer's instructions for start-up and venting of mechanical seal.
.10
If pump is used during temporary heating or flushing of system, Contractor shall be responsible for
changing mechanical seal or replacing motor bearings if so instructed by the Consultant.
.11
The pump manufacturer shall coordinate with the hydronic balancer to balance the system to the
required flows. The pump manufacturer shall have a technical representative on site during the
balancing of the variable speed system as required by the hydronic balancer.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE - METALLIC
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
Section 15801
Page 1
April 25, 2013
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate the following:
1.3
.1
Sealants
.2
Tape
.3
Proprietary Joints.
Certification of Ratings
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Classification
.1
Ductwork classification as follows:
Class
Pressure
Pa
I
II
III
IV
.1
12.5
12.5
10.0
10.0
A
B
C
D
All supply and return air ductwork for constant volume air handling units.
Outside air intakes and plenums.
Exhaust air plenums.
Exhaust air ductwork for; general exhaust.
All supply air ductwork not listed elsewhere.
Class IV:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Seal
Class III:
.1
.2
.3
Maximum
Class
Class II:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Maximum
Velocity
m/s
500
250
125
125
All remaining exhaust air ductwork.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE - METALLIC
2.2
Section 15801
Page 2
April 25, 2013
Seal Classification
.1
Class A: seams, joints and connections made airtight with sealing compound and tape.
.2
Class B: seams, joints and connections made airtight with sealing compound.
.3
Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with sealing compound. Longitudinal
seams unsealed.
.4
Class D: seams, joints and connections unsealed.
2.3
Sealant and Tape
.1
Sealant: oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant high velocity duct sealing compound.
Temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 93°C.
.1
.2
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fibreglass tape, 50 mm wide.
.1
2.4
Standard of Acceptance: Foster 30-02; Duro Dyne S-2.
Standard of Acceptance: Duro Dyne FT-2.
Duct Leakage
.1
Class I: 0.50% of total system design L/s at 500 Pa.
.2
Class II: 1.00% of total system design L/s at 250 Pa.
.3
Class III: 1.50% of total system design L/s at 125 Pa.
.4
Class IV: 5.00% of total system design L/s at 125 Pa.
2.5
Fittings
.1
Fabrication: to SMACNA.
.2
Radiused elbows: standard radius.
.3
Square elbows: over 400 mm with double thickness vanes. Not to be used unless specifically
shown on drawings.
.4
Main supply duct branches with splitter damper. If splitter damper is not used, provide branch and
main duct balancing damper.
.5
Sub branch duct with 45° entry and balancing damper on branch.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE - METALLIC
.6
Section 15801
Page 3
April 25, 2013
Transitions:
.1
Diverging: 20° maximum included angle.
.2
Converging: 30° maximum included angle.
.7
Offsets: radiussed elbows as indicated.
.8
Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross- sectional area. Maximum included angles as for
transitions.
2.6
Galvanized Steel
.1
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A525M-80, Z90 zinc coating.
.2
Thickness: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.
.3
Fabrication: to ASHRAE and SMACNA.
.4
Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured
flanged duct joint shall be considered to be a Class B seal.
.1
2.7
Standard of Acceptance: Namasco Ductmate; Exanno Nexus.
Hangers and Supports
.1
Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.
.2
Hanger configuration: to ASHRAE and SMACNA. Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger:
500 mm.
.3
Hangers: galvanized steel angle with black galvanized steel rods to ASHRAE and SMACNA
following table:
Duct Size
(mm)
up to 750
751 to 1050
1051 to 1500
1501 to 2100
2101 to 2400
2401 and over
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Angle Size
(mm)
25 x 25 x 3
40 x 40 x 3
40 x 40 x 3
50 x 50 x 3
50 x 50 x 5
50 x 50 x 6
Rod Size
(mm)
6
6
10
10
10
10
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE - METALLIC
.4
Page 4
April 25, 2013
Upper hanger attachments:
.1
For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.
.1
.2
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Myatt Fig 485.
For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp or steel plate washer.
.1
Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell Fig 61 or 86 for joist clamps.
For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps:
.1
2.8
Section 15801
Standard of Acceptance: Grinnell Fig. 60.
Round Ductwork
.1
All round ductwork up to 60" in diameter shall be of spiro lockseam construction with an
intermediate standard rib to provide the rigidity equivalent to ASHRAE standard gauge spiral duct.
The duct and fittings shall be fabricated from G-90 galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-71 with
a thickness not less than for 28 gauge duct diameters 225 mm to 1050 mm and 26 gauge for duct
diameters 1100 mm to 1500 mm diameters.
.2
For duct diameters less than 225 mm, use 26 gauge spiro duct without ribs.
.3
Fittings:
.4
.1
Elbows 100 mm to 200 mm, shall be die-stamped. Die-stamped elbows are to be
two piece construction with fully welded longitudinal seam.
.2
Elbows 225 mm to 750 mm; shall be standing seam construction.
.3
Fittings shall be one gauge thicker than standard ductwork.
All couplings shall be slipped joint construction with minimum 50 mm insertion length. Duct sealer
to be applied on male end connectors before insertion and afterwards to cover the entire joint and
sheet metal screws. Sheet metal screws shall be installed at a maximum 300 mm spacing, with a
minimum of 3 screws per joint. In large diameters flanging gasketted joints are acceptable in lieu
of slip joints.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Install ducts in accordance with ASHRAE, SMACNA and as indicated.
.2
Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers
100 mm beyond insulated duct.
.3
Support risers in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA or as indicated.
.4
All ductwork exposed in the kitchen and dishwashing areas is to be stainless steel.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DUCTWORK - LOW PRESSURE - METALLIC
3.2
Section 15801
Page 5
April 25, 2013
Hangers
.1
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.
.2
Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.
.3
Hanger spacing as follows:
Duct Size
(mm)
to 1500
1501 and over
3.3
Spacing
(mm)
3000
2500
Watertight Duct
.1
.2
3.4
Provide watertight duct for:
.1
Outside air intake.
.2
As indicated.
Form bottom of duct without longitudinal seams. Solder or weld joints of bottom and side sheets.
Seal all other joints with duct sealer.
Sealing and Taping
.1
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15811
Page 1
April 25, 2013
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
1.2
Reference Standards
.1
.2
1.3
Comply with requirements of:
.1
ULC S110M-1986 for fire tests for air ducts.
.2
UL 181-1981 for factory made air ducts and connectors.
.3
NFPA 90A-Standard for installation of air conditioning and ventilating systems.
.4
NFPA 90B-Standard for installation of warm air heating and air conditioning systems.
.5
SMACNA for flexible duct installation standards.
.6
Comply with requirements of:
Catalogue or published ratings shall be
Product Data
.1
1.4
Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010. Catalogue or published ratings shall be
those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying
adherence to codes and standards.
Certification of Ratings
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Factory fabricated.
.2
Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of
1.00.
.3
Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15811
Page 2
April 25, 2013
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
2.2
Metallic - Insulated
.1
Spiral wound flexible aluminum with 25 mm internal insulation.
.2
Performance:
.1
Minimum working pressure: 2.5 kPa.
.2
Maximum pressure drop coefficient:
.3
Minimum length of flexible duct: 1 m.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Duct Installation
.1
Install where indicated and in accordance with preferred method of SMACNA and the following:
.1
Provide minimum 2 screws to hold flexible duct.
.2
Cover entire joint with tape and seal as specified in Section 15801.
.2
Support in accordance with SMACNA.
.3
Maximum length of flexible duct: 3 m.
.4
All flexible duct connections shall be internally lined.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15820
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DUCT ACCESSORIES
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate the following:
1.2
.1
Flexible connections.
.2
Sealants and tapes.
.3
Duct access doors.
.4
Instrument test ports.
Certification of Ratings
.1
1.3
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
Quality Assurance
.1
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the requirements of local by-laws, Ministry of Labour
Regulations, and authorities having jurisdiction.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Flexible Connections
.1
Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams.
.2
Material: neoprene.
.1
2.2
Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus
40°C to plus 90°C, density of 1.3 kg/m5.
Sealant And Tape
.1
Sealant: oil resistant, polymer type flame resistant high velocity duct sealing compound.
Temperature range of minus 30°C to plus 93°C.
.1
.2
Standard of Acceptance: Foster 30-02 and Duro Dyne S-2.
Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fibre glass tape, 50 mm wide.
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Standard of Acceptance: Duro Dyne FT-2.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15820
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DUCT ACCESSORIES
2.3
Access Doors
.1
General
.1
Non-insulated sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness
heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.
.2
Insulated sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness
heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick
rigid glass fibre insulation.
.2
Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber.
.3
Hardware:
2.4
.1
Up to 300 x 300 mm: 2 sash locks.
.2
301 to 450 mm: 4 sash locks.
.3
451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum 2 sash locks.
.4
Doors over 1000 mm: piano hinge and 2 handles operable from both sides.
Instrument Test Ports
.1
1.6 mm thick steel zinc plated after manufacture.
.2
Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain.
.3
28 mm minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulation thickness.
.4
Neoprene mounting gasket.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Duro Dyne IP1 or IP2.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Flexible connections
.1
Install in following locations:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Inlets to supply air units.
Outlets from supply air units.
Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans. Do not install flexible connection
to kitchen exhaust fan.
As indicated.
Length of connection: 150 mm.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15820
Page 3
April 25, 2013
DUCT ACCESSORIES
.2
3.2
.3
Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 75 mm.
.4
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
Sealants and tapes.
.1
Apply sealant in accordance with SMACNA and to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of 1 coat of sealant to manufacturer's
recommendations.
Access Doors
.1
.2
3.3
Size:
.1
600 x 600 mm for person size entry.
.2
450 x 450 mm for servicing entry.
.3
300 x 300 mm for viewing.
.4
As indicated.
Location:
.1
At fire and smoke dampers.
.2
At control dampers.
.3
At devices requiring maintenance.
.4
At locations required by code.
.5
As indicated.
Instrument Test Ports
.1
General:
.1
For traverse readings, install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.2
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15825
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - BALANCING
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 15010.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Single Blade Dampers
.1
Of same material as duct. V-groove stiffened.
.2
Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 250 mm.
.3
Locking quadrant.
.4
Inside and outside end bearings.
2.2
Multi-bladed Dampers
.1
Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.
.2
Opposed blade: configuration to recommendations of SMACNA.
.3
Maximum blade height: 100 mm.
.4
Bearings: pin in bronze bushings.
.5
Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant.
.6
Channel frame complete with angle stop.
2.3
Diverting Dampers
.1
Adjustable, curved vanes, mounted in supporting frame.
.2
All aluminum construction.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15825
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - BALANCING
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install where indicated on the drawings and identified herein. For ducts concealed behind plaster
or drywall ceilings, provide dampers where specifically shown on the drawings.
.2
Provide balancing damper on all sub-branch ducts.
.3
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.4
Provide balancing dampers on all return air ducts connected to air handling units.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15828
Page 1
April 25, 2013
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the requirements of
Section 15010.
Reference Standards
.1
NFPA 90A-1999
.2
NFPA 90B-1999
.3
ASTM C 1071 Type II
.4
ASTM C411-82 (1992)
.5
ASTM C 1104
.6
ASTM C 916
.7
ASTM G21
.8
ASTM G22
.9
ASHRAE 62 - 99
.10
CGSB 51.10-92
.11
CGSB 51-GP-11M
Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, Blanket for Piping, Ducting,
Machinery and Boilers
.12
CGSB 51.2M
Type II, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.
.13
CAN/ULC-S102
Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials and Assemblies.
.14
SMACNA
Duct Liner Application Standard.
1.3
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems
Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature
Thermal Insulation.
Fire Resistance Ratings
.1
Meet NFPA 90A-1999. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating
of 50 in accordance with NFPA 255-1996 and CAN4-S102-M83 for all components of insulation
system. Materials tested in accordance with ASTM C411-82.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15828
Page 2
April 25, 2013
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
1.4
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation and jointing
recommendations.
.3
Before ordering any insulation materials, prepare a sample board, with a cross section sample of
all types of insulation, including exterior jacket, properly identified for the various services and
equipment on the project and state types of adhesives used. Submit the sample board to the
Consultant for review and after review and acceptance, the sample board shall be kept on site for
the duration of the project for reference. Deviation from the accepted samples will not be allowed.
1.5
Quality Assurance
.1
Deliver all materials to the job site and protect the insulation against dirt, water, chemical and
mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Do not install damaged insulation and
remove it from the project
.2
Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, coatings etc. to the site in factory fabricated
containers with manufacturer=s stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products,
name of manufacturer and brand.
.3
Installed insulation which has not been weatherproofed shall be protected from inclement weather
by an approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. Any wet or damaged insulation
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Material
.1
Rigid fibrous glass duct liner with factory applied edge coating.
.2
Rated for 250°F (121 C) service temperature and velocities up to 4,000 fpm.
.3
Surface coating shall contain an immobilized, EPA registered, anti microbial agent so it will not
support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22.
.4
The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071 with a noise reduction criteria
(NRC) rating of not less than 0.65 for 25 mm (1") liner and 0.95 for 50 mm (2") liner as tested per
ASTM C 423 using a type AA@ mounting in ASTM E 795.
.5
Water vapour sorption shall not exceed 3 percent by weight.
.6
Thermal conductivity of the liner shall be no higher than 0.23 Btu/in/(hr ft 2°F) at 75°F (0.036 W/m
C at 24 C) mean temperature.
.7
Density of insulation shall be a minimum density of 48 kg/m3 3.0 lb/ft3.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15828
Page 3
April 25, 2013
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
.8
Duct dimensions shown on the drawings are clear inside dimensions. Where acoustically lined,
actual duct dimension shall be 50 mm larger than size shown on the drawing to accommodate
25 mm acoustic lining and shall be 100 mm larger than the size shown on the drawing to
accommodate 50 mm acoustic lining.
.9
Weld pins for installation prior to applying insulation. Nylon returning clips to be 32mm square.
Adhesive pins or pins that penetrate the duct are not acceptable. The mechanical fasteners shall
not compress the liner more than 3.2 mm (1/8") and shall be installed perpendicular to the
air stream.
.10
Thickness: 25 mm (1") or 50 mm (2") as indicated on the drawings. If thickness is not indicated on
the drawings liner shall be 25 mm (1").
.11
Standard of Acceptance: Mason Akousti-Liner, Fiberglass Canada Inc., Knauf.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Acoustically line inside of ducts where indicated on the drawings.
.2
For drawing clarity not all ductwork to be internally lined has been cross-hatched. Where
cross-hatching is not continuous, internally insulate all ductwork from fan to furthest point from
fan where cross-hatching has been shown.
.3
Install lining in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with
recommendations of SMACNA.
.4
Fasten to interior sheet metal surfaces with 100% coverage of adhesive and metal pins and
washers at 400mm (16") on centre. and within 75mm (3") from all joints and corners.
.5
Seal edges, pin penetrations and joints with adhesive.
.6
Protect leading edges at the fan discharge with sheet metal edging. Protect all other edges
with adhesive.
.7
At velocities over 2000 fpm, coat all longitudinal joints with adhesive.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15828
Page 4
April 25, 2013
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
.8
Corner joints shall be overlapped so no gaps are present. Top pieces shall be supported by
side pieces.
.9
All internal lining damaged during construction shall be repaired with adhesive.
.10
Unless specified otherwise acoustical plenums shall be lined with 100 mm glass mineral fibre duct
liner. Acoustical plenums shall be constructed with prefabricated plenum panels (which contain
the lining), concrete, masonry or other architectural material as shown on the drawings. Two
layers of 50 mm lining is acceptable as an alternate to a single layer of 100 mm. Only the finished
surface needs to be neoprene coated.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15831
Page 1
April 25, 2013
COMMERCIAL FANS
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Product data to include fan curves and sound rating data.
1.3
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
1.4
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in
Section 15010.
Manufactured Items
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards in force.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Fans General
.1
Capacity, static pressure, revolutions per minute, power, model, size and sound power levels: as
indicated on the schedules.
.2
Sound ratings: comply with AMCA (Air Moving and Conditioning Association) 301-76 tested to
AMCA 300-67. Sound power levels shall not exceed those of the fan selected on the Schedule.
.3
Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99-76.
.4
Ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA 210-74, and ASHRAE 51-75.
.5
Accessories and hardware: V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards & coupling
guards.
.6
Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer.
.7
Scroll drains: where indicated.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15831
Page 2
April 25, 2013
COMMERCIAL FANS
2.2
Centrifugal Fans
.1
.2
.3
.4
Fan wheels:
.1
Welded steel construction
.2
Maximum operating speed of centrifugal fans not more than 50 percent of first
critical speed.
.3
Air foil backward inclined blades.
Housings:
.1
Form volute with inlet cones, fabricated steel fro wheels, braced, and with
welded supports.
.2
For horizontally or vertically split housings provide flanges on each section for bolting
together, with gaskets of non oxidizing non flammable material.
.3
Provide air tight access doors with handles.
Motors:
.1
Sizes as specified, Motor efficiency as identified in Section 15010.
.2
Motors connected to variable speed drives shall have Type F insulation.
Bearings:
.1
Bearings: heavy duty grease lubricated ball or roller bearings of self aligning type with oil
retaining, dust excluding seals and 100,000 hours service in accordance with design
operating and maintenance conditions. Fans shall be accordance with ANSI B3.15-1972
for ball bearings and ANSI B3.16- 1972 for roller bearings and (Anti-Friction Bearing
Manufacturer’s Association) AFBMA L-10 life standard.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: SKF, NTN Seal Master, Timken, FAG. Cook-Loren, Provide
bearing lubrication system.
.3
Standard of Acceptance: Twin City, Barry Blower, Chicago Blower and Cook-Loren.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15831
Page 3
April 25, 2013
COMMERCIAL FANS
2.3
Cabinet Fans
.1
Single or multiple wheel with DWDI airfoil centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing complete
with motor, V-belt drive and guard or outside casing.
.2
Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel, reinforced and braced for rigidity.
Provide removable panels for access to internal parts. Uncoated, steel parts shall be painted over
with corrosion resistant paint to CGSB 1-GP- 181M+Amdt-Mar-78. Finish inside and out, over
prime coat, with rust resistant baked on enamel. Internally line cabinet with 16 mm thick rigid
acoustic insulation.
.3
Bearings shall be heavy duty grease lubricated ball or roller bearings of self aligning type listed for
an average life of 100,000 hours at design operating and maintenance conditions. Fans shall be
accordance with ANSI B3.15-1972 for ball bearings and ANSI B3.16- 1972 for roller bearings and
(Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association) AFBMA L-10 life standard.
.1
Standard of Acceptance: SKF, NTN Seal Master, Timken, FAG. and Cook-Loren.
Provide bearing lubrication system.
.4
Motors shall be sized as specified. Motor efficiency shall be as specified in 15010.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Greenheck, Penn, Twin City, Barry Blower, Chicago Blower and
Cook-Loren.
2.4
Axial Flow Fans (Tube Axial or Vane Axial)
.1
Fabricate casings of welded steel with welded motor support, hinged or bolted access plates,
streamlined inlet cone and discharge bell sections and integral silencer casing.
.2
Provide ceiling suspended units with support brackets welded to side of casing.
.3
Air foil blades shall be cast aluminum.
.4
Direct Drive:
.1
Adjustable blade wheels: totally enclosed, air over motors.
.2
Diameter of wheel hub: at least equal to that of the motor frame.
.3
Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. Hubs shall facilitate indexing of
blade angle. Provide manual adjustment stops to avoid overloading the motor.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15831
Page 4
April 25, 2013
COMMERCIAL FANS
.5
.6
Belt Drive:
.1
Drive adjustable blades by externally mounted motors through v-belt drive.
Provide internal belt fairing, external belt guards and adjustable motor mounts.
.2
Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. Hubs shall facilitate indexing of
blade angle. Provide manual adjustment stops to avoid overloading the motor.
Standard of Acceptance: Barry Blower, Twin city, Chicago Blower, Penn and Greenheck and
Cook-Loren.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Fan Installation
.1
Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings specified in Section 15241 and flexible
electrical leads.
.2
Provide a flexible connection on inlet ductwork and on discharge ductwork. Each sleeve shall be
installed with at least 75 mm of slack across a clear metal to metal gap of 100 mm. Each sleeve
shall consist of a minimum of 175 mm of fabric. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel
with minimum 75 mm flex between ductwork and fan during running.
.3
Install fan restraining snubbers as indicated. Flexible connections shall not be in tension during
running. Provide all sheaves and belts required for final air balance.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15845
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DRY COOLERS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference Standards
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010 and 01340.
.2
Indicate the following: dimensional drawings, connection drawings, power circuit diagrams,
warranty description, certification agency file numbers.
1.3
Maintenance Data
.1
1.4
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
Maintenance Materials
.1
1.5
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 15010.
Manufactured Items
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards in force.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Air cooled fluid coolers shall consist of casing, drycooler coil, propeller fans direct driven by
individual fan motors, fan guards, and mounting legs. All fan motors shall be wired to a common
electrical junction box. Fan motors shall be furnished for operation on 208V 3ph 60 Hz.
.2
Certify ratings to ARI 430-78. Unit shall bear ARI seal.
2.2
Drycooler
.1
The coils shall be constructed of seamless copper tubes on a staggered tube pattern. Tubes shall
be mechanically expanded into continuous aluminum plate fins for permanent metal-to-metal
contact. The fins shall have full depth fin collars completely covering the copper tube.
.2
Coils shall be factory leak-tested at 300 psig: dehydrated, evacuated and sealed. Coils shall have
vents and drains and shall have threaded connections as scheduled.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15845
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DRY COOLERS
.3
The condenser casing shall be of heavy-duty, reinforced construction utilizing continuous
galvanized steel. Casing shall be divided into individual fan sections by full width galvanized
partitions. Structural support members, including coil support frame, and legs shall be 7 and
10 gauge continuous galvanized steel for strength and corrosion resistance.
.4
Fans shall have aluminum blades riveted to zinc plated steel hub or all steel with enamel paint.
The maximum fan diameter shall not exceed 26 inches. Fan guards shall be heavy-gauge, close
meshed, steel wire, zinc plated and iridite dipped. The guard shall be contoured for
maximum rigidity
.5
Fan motors shall be weather protected with ball bearings and built-in overload protection. The
units shall be furnished with required power as indicated.
.6
All electrical connections shall be provided in weatherproof enclosure. The enclosure shall be
integral with the drycooler for pleasing appearance as well as functional protection.
.7
A magnetic contactor and control voltage shall be provided for remote starting of the drycooler.
.8
Condenser shall be provided with disconnect switch unit mounted and wired.
.9
Fan cycling shall be used to control leaving fluid temperature by cycling the fan. Unit shall be
complete with a 24 Volt control circuit. Control circuit shall consist of a control transformer, fan
contactor and temperature control.
.10
Fans shall be cycled by sensing air temperature passing over the coil.
.11
Provide all control sensors required to make the system a complete working system.
2.3
Capacity
.1
The drycoolers shall be in accordance with the schedule.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: McQuay, Liebert, KeepRite
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated.
.2
Mechanical contractor to provide sleepers as indicated on the drawings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15846
Page 1
April 25, 2013
PACKAGED ROOF EXHAUST FANS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings and Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Product data to include fan curves and sound rating data.
1.2
Operation and Maintenance Data
.1
1.3
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in
Section 15010.
Manufactured Items
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and
standards in force.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Fans General
.1
Provide, as indicated in the schedule, for CFM, total static pressure Pa, r/min, bhp, model and size
and sound ratings.
.2
Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301-76 tested to AMCA 300-67.
.3
Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99-76.
.4
Ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with AMCA 210-74, and ASHRAE 51-75.
.5
Bearings: equip with sealed lifetime bearings of self aligning type with oil retaining, dust excluding
seals and 100,000 h service in accordance with AFBMA B9 and B11 life standard and standard for
fan manufacturer for duty concerned. Bearings shall be suited for service conditions.
2.2
Roof Exhausters
.1
Centrifugal fan units, V belt or direct driven, with spun aluminum housings, complete with resilient
mounted motor and fan, adjustable motor sheave 12 mm mesh 2.0 mm diam aluminum
birdscreen, automatic motorized gasketted aluminum dampers; disconnect switch within fan
housing, continuous curb gaskets, stainless steel securing bolts and screws, and prefabricated
300mm high insulated roof curbs.
.2
Direct drive fans as called for in the schedule shall be provided complete with a unit mounted
variable speed controller. Where variable speed controllers are shown on the drawings, mount
the controller in the location shown and provide wiring and conduit to the exhaust fan.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15846
Page 2
April 25, 2013
PACKAGED ROOF EXHAUST FANS
.3
Confirm mounting location of the variable speed controllers or reverse acting thermostats with the
consultant prior to installation.
.4
Sound power levels should not exceed those indicated on the schedule.
.5
Provide motorized backdraft damper for all fans unless specifically noted otherwise in the
schedule. Backdraft damper to be located in a location where it does not interfere with the
air stream of the fan.
.6
Fan to be provided with insulated prefabricated roof curb.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: Greenheck; Penn; Jenn; Cook
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install roof exhausters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2
Install insulated prefabricated roof curbs for all roof exhausters.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15853
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - OPERATING
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Indicate the following.
.1
1.2
Performance curve charts.
Maintenance Data
.1
1.3
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 15010.
Certification of Ratings
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Multi-leaf
.1
Opposed or Parallel blade type. Two position dampers to be parallel, modulating dampers to be
opposed blade type.
.2
Blades to be of extruded aluminum, internally reinforced air-foil design and connected to linkage
with 7/16" hexagon rod.
.3
Blades to be complete with extruded synthetic rubber seals to be secured in an integral slot within
the extrusions, spring stainless steel side seals, structurally formed and welded galvanized steel,
frame.
.4
Bearings to be comprised of celcon inner bearing fixed to a hexagon blade pin rotating within a
polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in frame, resulting in no metal to metal or metal to
plastic contact.
.5
Linkage: plated steel tie rods, brass pivots and plated steel brackets, complete with plated steel
control rod.
.6
Operator: compatible with damper.
.7
Performance: leakage in closed position to be less than 0.6% of rated air flow at 4" W.G.
differential pressure (4 cfm per square foot). Pressure drop at full open position to be less than
0.03 kPa differential across damper at maximum air flow.
.8
Dampers to be suitable for operating in temperatures between -40°F (-40C) and 212°F (100°C).
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15853
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - OPERATING
.9
Dampers shall be made to size and shall not be limited to standard sizes.
.10
Standard of Acceptance: Tamco Air Foil Series 1000 (non-insulated), Arrow Series AFD-20, Titus.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Provide insulated dampers for all dampers directly in contact with outside air.
.2
Install on exhaust air ducts from air handling unit No. 1 where they connect to the exhaust air
plenum (3 required) and where indicated.
.3
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.4
Seal multiple damper modules with UL listed non-transparent silicon sealant.
.5
Upon system start-up, ensure that dampers operate properly. See also Section 15900 - Controls
and Instrumentation.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15854
Page 1
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - FIRE
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
1.2
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Operational and Maintenance Data: Provide equipment literature, operating instructions,
maintenance instructions, parts lists, and other pertinent data for all equipment and systems
covered by this section.
.3
Indicate the following.
1.3
.1
Fire dampers.
.2
Operators.
.3
Fusible Links.
.4
Maintenance Data.
.5
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in
Section 15010.
Quality Assurance
.1
1.4
Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the requirements of local by-laws,
Ministry of Labour Regulations, and authorities having jurisdiction.
Certification of Ratings
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes
and standards.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Fire Dampers
.1
Fire dampers: listed and bear label of ULC and shall meet requirements of and NFPA 90A-1993
and authorities having jurisdiction.
.2
Furnish "Type B" fire dampers for rectangular or square ductwork and "Type C" fire dampers for
round ductwork. unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15854
Page 2
April 25, 2013
DAMPERS - FIRE
.3
Furnish fire dampers and frame constructed of same material as duct in which they are installed.
for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation.
.4
Top hinged: offset, round or square; multi-blade hinged or interlocking type; sized to maintain full
duct cross section.
.5
Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or having
negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal position with
vertical air flow.
.6
Frame and 40 x 40 x 3 mm angle iron on full perimeter of frame on both sides of fire wall and/or
fire wall being pierced.
.7
Standard of Acceptance: National Fire, Controlled Air Manufacturing Ltd.;
Canada Advanced Air Ltd.; Penn Ventilator Canada Ltd.; Ruskin (Kerr-Hunt).
.8
Normally open smoke/seal (S/D-SSSD): folding blade type, closing when actuated by means of
electro thermal link and from remote alarm signalling device. Blade edge seals of flexible
stainless steel shall provide required constant sealing pressure. Stainless steel negator springs
with licking devices shall ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally in vertical ducts.
.9
Electro thermal link (S/D-ETL): dual responsible fusible link which melts when subjected to local
o
heat of 74 C. And from external electrical impulse of low power and short duration; ULC or
UL listed and labelled.
.10
Acceptable material: Ruskin, Controlled Air Manufacturing Ltd., Nailor-Hart Industries Inc. And
Penn Ventilator Canada Ltd.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 90A-1981 and suppliers instructions, complete with
retaining angles on both sides of wall or floor and fastened to damper collars.
.2
Install fire dampers complete with adjacent access door as required to permit re-opening of
damper and replacement of fusible link.
.3
Maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation.
.4
After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation.
.5
Provide fire stop flaps on any grilles penetrating fire-rated ceilings.
.6
Provide fire damper in any duct passing through a fire-rated wall or floor. Refer to
Architectural drawings for all fire rated wall locations.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15875
Page 1
April 25, 2013
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
1.2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 15010.
Samples
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Submit samples for the following:
1.3
Manufactured Items
.1
1.4
Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be product of one manufacturer for generic type, ie grilles and
registers by one, diffusers by one, or same.
Certification of Ratings
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or
those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to
codes and standards.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Provide standard product to meet capacity, throw, noise level, throat and outlet velocity.
.2
Where grilles, registers and diffusers penetrate fire walls and fire partitions, provide approved steel
sleeve secured to structure in accordance with NFPA 90A-1993 and required fire damper.
.3
Frames:
.1
Steel: primed cold rolled steel with exposed welded joints and mitred corners.
.2
Aluminum: extruded satin finish with mechanical fasteners and mitred corners.
.3
Provide full perimeter gaskets.
.4
Provide plaster frames as plaster stops where set into plaster or gypsum board.
.5
Provide concealed fasteners and balancing operators in all finished areas.
.6
Final finish to be selected by Architect from standard manufacturer finishes @ shop
drawing stage.
.7
Style, frame, and installation details as indicated on the schedule.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15875
Page 2
April 25, 2013
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
.4
Sizes and capacities: as indicated in the schedule.
.5
Standard of Acceptance: Titus, E. H. Price, Nailor-Hart, Tutle & Bailey.
2.2
Supply Grilles and Registers
.1
2.3
32 mm border double deflection with airfoil shape horizontal face and vertical rear bars, opposed
blade dampers (OBD) with concealed manual operator, and gaskets.
Return and Exhaust Grilles and Registers
.1
32 mm border, single deflection, air foil shape, horizontal bar type 35 max turn up, when shown
on the schedule, opposed blade damper with concealed operator and rubber sealing strips.
.2
Egg crate to be (1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2") 12 x 12 x 12, type as per schedule.
2.4
Diffusers
.1
2.5
As indicated on the schedule, Circular, square or perforated type, having adjustable fixed pattern,
and volume control dampers with flow straightening devices and blank-off quadrants.
Linear Grilles
.1
Bar core linear grilles with frame as indicated, plaster frame, sealing strip and accessories
as indicated.
.2
Floor grilles to be capable of supporting 90 kg point load weight between supports with
negligible deflection.
.3
Provide opposed blade damper in maximum 3'0" lengths. Do not supply OBD in return air
linear grilles.
.4
Extruded aluminum linear slot diffuser with adjustable vane controls and accessories as indicated.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
.2
All diffusers and grilles in finished areas to have concealed mounting. In unfinished areas and
where grilles or diffusers are to be installed in ductwork, install with bulkheads tight to either side.
Site measure for exact fit.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15875
Page 3
April 25, 2013
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
.3
Final locations of diffusers and grilles to be in accordance with Architect's reflected ceiling plans
and detail drawings.
.4
Install and adjust air registers to provide noiseless and draftless distribution. Primary air balance to
be done at duct dampers with final adjustment only at diffusers and grilles.
.5
Where noted on the drawings, fit linear grille between bulkheads tight to either side. Site measure
exact dimensions and cut on site to ensure tight fit.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 1
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Instructions
.1
Comply with requirements of all Sections of Division 15.
.2
This section of the specification shall be read and be governed by the sections of Division 0 and
Division 1.
.3
Comply with the General Requirements of Section 16010 of Division 16.
.4
Base building Control Contractor is Johnson. Retain the services of Johnson Control to carry out
the work.
1.2
General Requirements
.1
Related Instructions
.2
Comply with requirements of all Sections of Division 15.
.3
This section of the specification shall be read and be governed by the sections of Division 0 and
Division 1.
.4
Comply with the General Requirements of Section 16010 of Division 16.
1.3
Work Included
.1
Comply with requirements of Mechanical General Requirements Section 15010 and Electrical
General Provisions Section 16010. All wiring shall be in conduit. Refer to Division 16 for
specifications.
.2
Include all wiring, conduit, piping, installation, materials, supervision and labour including
calibration, commissioning software programming and data base generation, and additional work
necessary to provide a complete and fully operating system to the approval of Owner's
representative.
.3
The system shall be installed by competent technicians familiar with this system.
.4
Scope Of Work to include the following:
.1
Installation of controls supplied by the packaged unit manufacturers. This shall include all
wiring associated with the controls systems.
.2
Relocation of thermostats as required to suit site conditions. Provide new pneumatic
thermostat where a thermostat is being relocated.
.3
Interlocking the self contained A/C units with the dry cooler pump.
.4
All necessary control and wiring for a complete installation.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 2
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
1.4
.5
Provision of all other equipment necessary to complete the installation.
.6
Replacement of existing control valves and thermostats for re-heat terminals for
each room. Sub-contractor to submit itemized price for this work.
Equipment Standards & Approvals
.1
All electrical and electronic equipment shall be CSA, ULC, or Ontario Hydro approved where such
approvals are required by regulatory authorities.
.2
All systems shall be compatible with the existing system.
1.5
Operator Instruction
.1
1.6
Provide a minimum of 2 hours of training for the operating staff on programming, trouble-shooting,
servicing, and operation of the complete control system.
Identification of Equipment
.1
Identify each piece of equipment with nameplate identifying equipment and functions with letter
and number designation.
.2
Nameplates shall be minimum size, 75 x 25 x 3.2 mm thick laminated plastic with black face and
white centre and 6.4 mm high engraved lettering. Nameplates shall be mechanically secured and
listed in Operating and Maintenance Data Book.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Supply and install controls as indicated and as herein after specified.
.2
Control system installed to be fail-safe.
2.2
Shop Drawings And Samples
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 15010.
.2
Provide samples for all wall mounted devices including but not limited to:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Wall mounted thermostats.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 3
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
2.3
Equipment Standards & Approvals
.1
All materials and equipment shall be standard components regularly manufactured by Supplier
and guaranteed to be available as regular inventory as replacement parts for a minimum period of
10 years.
.2
All electrical and electronic equipment shall be CSA, ULC, or Ontario Hydro approved where such
approvals are required by regulatory authorities.
.3
All input/output devices shall be ASCII (American Standard for Communication and Information
Interchange) coded with standard EIA (Electronic Industry Association) interface.
.4
Digital controllers shall have capability for accommodating inputs and outputs meeting ISA
(Instrument Society of America) standards.
.5
Automation System to modem interfacing shall conform to EIA RS232C standards. Vendor
supplied phone line modems shall be of a type as approved by Bell Canada.
2.4
Acceptance Procedure
.1
After installation, submit data relevant to point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks,
software routines and associated parameters, and other pertinent information for operating system
and data base shall be forwarded to Owner's authorized representative. Software shall be entered
into central computer and debugged.
.2
Prior to on line operation, a complete demonstration and readout of computer real time
responsibilities of surveillance and command shall be performed in presence of Owner's
authorized representative.
.3
Make adjustments to each device and component to ensure that operations are performed
correctly and that all analog values are displayed to accuracy specified. All alarms, start/stop and
status conditions shall be checked to ensure proper operation.
.4
Upon successful completion of online operation, Owner's authorized representative shall be
requested in writing to inspect and approve satisfactory operation of building automation system.
.5
Complete all outstanding deficiencies as determined by Owner's representative in his inspection
report, after which a resubmission of formal acceptance shall be made. This procedure shall be
repeated if necessary until acceptable performance has been established.
2.5
Operator Instruction
.1
Provide a minimum of 4 hours of training for the Centre's staff on programming, trouble-shooting,
servicing, and operation of the complete control system. The allocated time will be used at the
Centre’'s discretion to train approximately three (3) staff members.
.2
Operating instructions shall be given by factory trained technicians completely familiar with
installation and system application.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 4
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
2.6
Operating And Maintenance Data
.1
Upon completion of project, submit to Owner six (6) copies of Operation and Maintenance
Instruction Book as follows:
.1
Bind data in 215 mm x 280 mm (8 1/2" x 11") hard cover, three ring looseleaf binder.
Binders shall not be overfilled.
.2
Enclose title sheet complete with project name, data, and list of contents.
.2
Operating data shall include detailed instructions describing all components of system, and all
functions of system, and related to actual controlled equipment installed in field. Manuals shall
describe all functions which may be performed with details of adjustments which may be made to
all devices and components.
.3
Maintenance instructions shall include instructions and schedules for inspection, cleaning,
calibration, etc.
.4
Additionally, provide complete and reviewed "as-built" shop drawings detailing equipment,
installation, and control sequences.
2.7
Identification of Equipment
.1
Identify each piece of equipment with nameplate identifying equipment and functions with letter
and number designation.
.2
Nameplates shall be minimum size, 75 x 25 x 3.2 mm thick laminated plastic with black face and
white centre and 6.4 mm high engraved lettering. Nameplates shall be mechanically secured and
listed in Operating and Maintenance Data Book.
2.8
Warranty
.1
All components, parts and assemblies including software shall be guaranteed against defects in
material and workmanship for period of one year after substantial completion
.2
If equipment or installation becomes defective during warranty period, it shall be repaired or
replaced without charge during normal working hours.
.3
Servicing shall be performed by factory trained and employed, service representatives of
system manufacturer.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 5
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
2.9
Electronic Temperature Sensors
.1
Electronic temperature sensors shall have following minimum specifications:
.1
Sensors shall be precision nickel wire or platinum wire with linear characteristics over
complete sensor range.
.2
One thousand OHM reference resistance of 21 degrees C nickel wire element with
temperature coefficient of 3 OHMS/degree F.
OR ALTERNATELY
.3
One hundred OHM reference resistance at 32 degrees F platinum wire element with
temperature coefficiency of 0.00392 OHM/OHM/degree F.
.4
Temperature range of -40 degrees F to 250 degrees F (-40 degrees C to 121 degrees C).
.2
Sensing probe length shall be 150 mm for duct or well insertion type and either 2.5 or 5 m
averaging element for sensing duct temperatures in ducts over 900 mm in width and mixing
plenums, or 75 mm element for space temperature sensing under room thermostat cover.
.3
Thermistor type insertion sensors are acceptable.
.4
Space sensors to be fully adjustable from EMCS with adjustment at sensor of + 3°F.
2.10
Start/stop Motor Control Relays
.1
Field interchangeable to either momentary or maintained latching switching action as required
by application.
.2
Relays shall be plug-in interchangeable mounted on circuit board with field wiring connecting to
screw terminals or mass termination assembly.
2.11
Damper Operators
.1
2.12
Damper operators shall be spring return modulating or two position as required, electrically
operated, die cast aluminum housing with solid state drive and travel limits. Select size and
quantity of operators to ensure a smooth operation of dampers at all positions such that connected
load shall not exceed 80% of operator torque rating.
Control Valves
.1
All characteristics of control valves shall be suitable for the required operation. Operators are to
be pneumatic.
.2
Straight through water valves shall be single seated with equal percentage flow characteristics.
.3
Three way mixing valves or combined butterfly valves shall be linear for each port giving constant
flow control.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 6
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
.4
All valves shall have stainless steel stems and spring loaded Teflon cone packing.
.5
Valves 50 mm and smaller shall have screwed 150 lbs. bronze bodies. Valves 65 mm and larger
shall have flanged 125 lbs. cast iron bodies. Wax valves are not accepted.
.6
The maximum pressure drop across any mixing or diverter valves shall not exceed 3 psi unless
specified otherwise.
.7
Valve operators for terminal equipment controllers to be 24 Vac with maintenance free
synchronous motors and magnetic hysteresis couplings protecting against overload.
.8
Control valves shall be supplied from one (1) manufacturer throughout.
2.13
Control Air Piping and Tubing
.1
Control piping mains shall be type AM@ hard drawn seamless copper with forged copper soldering
type fittings with solder joints. Provide a 12" flexible polyethylene connection at valves.
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Installation shall include programming, drawings, supervision, adjusting, validating and checkout,
cable, and field wiring necessary for complete operational system
.2
Supply and install all low or high voltage wiring from electrical panels/outlets to central hardware
and remote field processing units and all other equipment (provided or supplied only by controls
contractor) requiring power. Supply and install all wiring necessary for system operation including
tie-ins from system control relays into motor starting circuits. Wiring and conduit shall be installed
in neat and workmanlike manner, concealed where possible, and meet standards of Division 16.
All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Use of plenum rated cable inside the resident bedrooms
between the control valves and thermostat and to the main junction box inside the room will be
accepted instead of conduits. Control conduits shall be utilized for all other areas.
.3
Sensors which are shown wall mounted shall have wiring concealed in wall construction.
.4
Where practical, sensors mounted on columns or poured concrete construction shall have wiring
or tubing concealed up to ceiling above.
.5
Sensors shall be mounted 1500 mm from floor to centre unless shown otherwise.
.6
Duct mounted devices shall be mounted on panels with bases plumb and level. Duct panels shall
be dampened to eliminate detrimental vibration.
.7
Operators shall be mounted on shop fabricated brackets built to transmit torque or forces to
ductwork panels or supports which can absorb these forces without distortion or fatigue.
.8
Where sensors are specified to be in outside air, they shall be installed so as not to be affected by
exhaust air or reverse warm air flow through air supply units.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15900
Page 7
April 25, 2013
CONTROLS
.9
Outside air sensors shall be installed in the locations shown on the drawings.
.10
Cooperate with the air and water balance technicians during balancing of the system.
.11
Controls Sub-Contractor to coordinate with Division 16 for fire alarm wiring shutdown and fan
controls as per CSA recommendations.
.12
All digital outputs to have hand/off/auto.
3.2
Control of Exhaust Fan Damper (Typical)
.1
3.3
Manual. Work to be carried out by Division 16.
Control of Packaged Units; Dry Cooler and Associated Circulating Pump.
.1
Install thermostats as indicated on the drawings.
.2
Packaged units are being provided with a relay so they can be connected to the circulating pump.
Circulating pump to be energized whenever one of the packaged unit is energized.
.3
Wiring of control equipment and sensors for the dry coolers as per manufacturer’s instruction.
3.4
Adjustments Service & Warranty
.1
3.5
Adjust and set thermostats, valves, damper operators, relays and other components to proper
settings to give required performance. Cooperate with other Sections during testing and balancing
of each mechanical system to ensure each total system operates to approval.
Installation
.1
Install systems and related controls using factory trained journeymen certified by the
Province of Ontario.
.2
Locate temperature sensors 1500mm above floor as indicated. Coordinate with Consultant for
exact location.
.3
Provide all electric wiring in connection with the temperature control system in accordance with the
wiring guidelines described here and included in Section 16000 of the Specification.
.4
Provide pneumatic piping for all the thermostats which are being relocated or new thermostats.
.5
During demolition work the control subcontractor to assist in removing thermostats and plugging
the instrument air piping as required.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
Section 15950
Page 1
April 25, 2013
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 15010.
.2
TAB: means to test, adjust and balance all systems, including equipment, to perform in
accordance with Contract Documents.
.3
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by manufacturer.
.4
Special start-up procedures may be specified elsewhere.
1.2
Site Inspections and Subsequent Meetings
.1
1.3
Schedule once a month, site visits to correspond with the weekly site meeting. After each site visit
submit a written report to the Mechanical Consultant. Site visits shall commence at the start of the
air distribution work and be spread over the construction period up to the start of the balance of the
work. If work requiring correction is discovered during an inspection, be sure that the required
correction work is clearly indicated in the report. In addition to site meetings and inspections
specified above, attend, when requested by the Consultant, at the TAB Contractors expense any
other meetings where the TAB Contractor=s presence is required.
Division 15000 Assistance
.1
1.4
Mechanical Contractor shall provide assistance to the TAB Contractor as required to complete the
TAB Sub-Contractor’s work. This shall include but not be limited to:
.1
Provision of all required shop drawings and fan and pump curves.
.2
Provision of all required test ports.
Systems to Be Tested
.1
1.5
TAB to apply to following systems, equipment and related controls:
.1
Air handling units and all associated duct work including all the existing systems
.2
Exhaust Systems, including existing systems.
Reference Standards
.1
Do TAB of complete mechanical systems over entire operating range in accordance with most
stringent conditions of selected standard:
.1
AABC (Associated Air Balance Council).
.2
ASHRAE (American Society of Heating Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers).
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
1.6
Section 15950
Page 2
April 25, 2013
.3
NABC (National Air Balance Council).
.4
SMACNA (Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association).
.5
NEBB certified.
.6
Specifications herein or elsewhere in contract documents.
Qualifications
.1
Testing and balancing personnel shall be experienced in balancing of mechanical systems.
.2
Standard of Acceptance: (Add. 5)
Air and Water Precision Balancing Inc
VPG
John Price Enterprises
FlowSet
Clark Balancing
Design Test and Balancing
1.7
Shop Drawings
.1
1.8
Prior to commencing work, shop drawings shall be submitted showing equipment, proof of
calibration, testing methods to be used with each different style of diffuser and measuring point,
and forms and diagrams to be used for the air and hydronic balance.
Preliminary Air Balance:
.1
1.9
Read existing supply air as indicated on the drawings. Submit report prior to any demolition work.
Final Balancing
.1
Start final TAB only when building is essentially completed, including:
.1
Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, light fixtures and other construction affecting TAB.
.2
Application of sealing, caulking and weather-stripping.
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Normal operation of mechanical systems affecting TAB.
Rebalance existing air supply/return/exhaust systems serving this building as per
following procedure:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
1.
2.
1.10
Section 15950
Page 3
April 25, 2013
The balancer will be provided with exiting architectural drawing for
each floor.
Balancer to identify all supply and exhaust/return diffuser/grilles on the
drawings and take a reading. It will be the responsibility of the balancer
to show any changes to architectural backgrounds.
3.
Balancer shall take air flow readings from all air systems serving the
building. The report shall be submitted prior to start of demolition work.
The values will be used as basis for rebalancing the system after
renovations.
4.
Rebalance existing systems to accommodate new air quantities at level
3, 4 and 5.
5.
Rebalance other floors to keep readings prior to renovation.
Accuracy
.1
Do TAB to within plus or minus 5% of design values.
.2
Measurements to be accurate to within plus or minus 5 % of actual values.
.3
Instrument calibration: In accordance with referenced standard, within 3 months of
commencement of TAB.
.4
Provide proof of calibration to Consultant.
1.11
Report
.1
Format to be in accordance with referenced standard listed above, but using design drawing units.
.2
Reports shall be indexed as follows:
.1
Air Systems
.64201568
.64201569
.64201570
.64201571
.64201572
.64201573
.64201574
.64201575
.64201576
.64201577
.64201578
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Summary
Procedure
Instrumentation
Drawings
Equipment/Component Summary
Fan data sheets
Fan curves
Air handling unit profile data
Traverse data and schedule
Outlets data summary and schematic (per system)
Diagnostics
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
Section 15950
Page 4
April 25, 2013
.3
Produce "as-built" full system schematics and floor plans identifying the location where all
measurements were taken and the resulting flows that were obtained. Use as-built drawings for
reference.
.4
Submit 2 copies of preliminary TAB reports, each in "D" ring binders, complete with index tabs for
verification and approval of Consultant.
.5
Submit 6 copies of final TAB reports after approval by the Consultant.
.6
Obtain the shop drawing for each fan system. Mark the actual operating point on the fan curve for
each fan. Include the fan curves for each fan in the balancing report.
.7
Obtain the shop drawing for each pump system. On the pump curve for each pump mark the
actual operating point on the curve. Include the pump curves with superimposed power draw, rpm
and impellor size.
1.12
Verification
.1
Reported measurements shall be subject to verification by Consultant. Provide instrumentation
and manpower to verify results of up to 30 % of all reported measurements. Number and location
of verified measurements to be at discretion of the Consultant.
.2
A minimum of 15 percent of measurements shall be verified during the commissioning of the
project. TAB Contractor shall provide all instrumentation and manpower to verify results of
reported measurements. Number and location of verified measurements to be at discretion
of Consultant.
.3
A measured flow deviation of more than 10 percent between the verification reading and the
reported data shall be considered a failure of the verification procedure.
.4
A failure of more than 10 percent of the selected verification readings shall result in the rejection of
the report as unacceptable.
.5
Should the report be rejected, the TAB Contractor shall rebalance all systems, submit new
certified reports and make a re-inspection at no additional cost to the Owner.
.6
Bear costs to repeat TAB, as required, to satisfaction of Consultant.
1.13
Settings
.1
1.14
Lock and permanently mark settings as required by reference standard.
Tab Completion
.1
TAB to be considered complete only when final reports are approved by Consultant.
.2
Provide outside air measurements by measuring at the point where the flow stations have been
installed in the supply, return and exhaust air ductwork and adjusting dampers accordingly.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
Section 15950
Page 5
April 25, 2013
.3
Confirm that all flow stations are providing accurate measurements as described below.
.4
Co-ordinate with Sheet metal contractor during construction and air balancing.
1.15
Air Moving
.1
General
.1
.2
Measurements as required by Systems referenced standards, including, but not limited to,
following:
Measurements
.1
Air velocity.
.2
Static pressure.
.3
Velocity pressure.
.4
Temperature:
.64201568 Wet bulb.
.64201569 Dry bulb.
.5
Cross sectional area.
.6
RPM.
.7
Electrical power:
.64201568 Voltage
.64201569 Current draw.
.64201570 Provide outside air measurements by using temperature readings on return,
outside and mixed air.
.64201571 Co-ordinate with controls contractor and Division 15 to balance all air handling
units to designed set point.
.3
Location Of Equipment Measurements
.1
Inlet and outlet of each:
.64201568
.64201569
.64201570
.64201571
.64201572
.64201573
.4
Fan.
Coil.
Filter.
Damper.
Flow Station
Other auxiliary equipment.
Location of System Measurements at:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Main ducts.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING (TAB)
2
Section 15950
Page 6
April 25, 2013
.2
Main branch ducts.
.3
Sub-branch ducts.
.4
Each supply, exhaust and return air inlet and outlet.
.5
Other auxiliary equipment.
.6
All areas served by system.
.7
Before and after the silencers.
.8
Provide temperature and/or pressure measurements downstream of all temperature and
pressure sensors to confirm the measurements from all control devices provided by
Control Subcontractor.
PRODUCTS
NIL
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Balancing shall be carried out by an independent qualified balancing company. Balancing
company must be one of the approved balancing companies.
.2
Replace sheaves as required to balance systems to the indicated air volumes. Sheaves shall be
provided at no additional cost to the Owner by Mechanical Contractor.
.3
Mechanical Contractor to provide all required parts, belts and adjustments for all systems as
deemed necessary to complete the required balancing.
.4
Mechanical Contractor will provide the required assistance to the TAB Contractor as deemed
necessary by the Consultant.
.5
The TAB Sub-Contractor shall confirm that the flow stations provided in the supply, return and
exhaust air ductwork are measuring accurate readings.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th & 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 15999
Page 1
April 25, 2013
SCHEDULES
1
GENERAL
1.1
Schedules
.1
Air Cooled Dry Coolers
.2
A/C Packaged units
.3
Grille and Diffuser
.4
Pumps
.5
Exhaust & Return Fans
.6
Plumbing Fixtures
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
WATER COOLED A/C UNITS SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alterations Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
April 25, 2013
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
Tag
No.
Location
Served
CFM
Total
ENT. AIR
TEMP
(db/wb)
LEAVING. W.P.D ENT
W. Flow LEAVING
AIR TEMP (FT)
WATER (USGPM) WATER
(db/wb)
TEMP
TEMP
E.Sp MCA V/Ph
I.W.C
Cooling, MBH
Sens
Model No.
Remarks
Total
AC-7
3
rd
FLOOR
2375
75/63
56.5/54.2
10.0
100
12.0
115
0.62
38.8
208/3 47.1
59.4
WLVC1072
Vertical
AC-8
4
th
FLOOR
2125
75/63
54.4/52.9
15.38
100
11.0
115.8
0.52
31.8
208/3 46.9
60.7
WVFC1070
Vertical
AC-9
5 FLOOR
1950
53.6/52.0
15.38
100
11.0
115.6
0.60
31.8
208/3 44.8
60.2
WVFC1070
Vertical
55.3/52.3
9.74
100
7.5
109.9
0.65 15.88 208/3 18.7
26.3
th
rd
AC-10 3 FLOOR
875
75/63
75/63
WGTV0321 Vertical
Smart Source
Remarks:
1.
2.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
All units to be McQuay
Refrigerant type: R-410A
Units to be supplied complete with packaged starter panel.
Disconnect switch to be provided by Div 16.
System designed for 40% propylene glycol
Unit AC-10 shall be provided with upgraded sound package; complete with compressor blankets, and 3/8” neoprene close cell in the fan section.
Unit AC-10 has to have ECM fan motor, water side economizer coil and 4” MERV 13 filter.
All units to have upgraded sound insulation in fan and compressor sections
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 1 of 2
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.02 schm AC UNITS.doc
WATER COOLED A/C UNITS SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEATH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Research Renovation 3 , 4 & 5 floors
November 2, 2012
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
Sound Power Levels RE: 10
Tag No.
Location
AC-7
Discharge from
Unit
AC-8
Discharge from
Unit
AC-9
Discharge from
Unit
AC-10
Discharge from
Unit
-12
Watts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
73
70
70
71
67
62
55
73
70
70
71
67
62
55
73
70
70
71
67
62
55
65
59
54
58
56
53
44
Avg
Remarks
62
Remarks:
1. For ducted return, sound power levels must be reduced by 1 db in
octave bands 2 & 3, 3 db in octave bands 3 & 4, and 4 db in octave
bands 6, 7, & 8.
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 2 of 2
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.02 schm AC UNITS.doc
AIR COOLED DRY COOLER
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alterations Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
Date: April 25, 2013
CEL Project No.: 12221
Revision No.: 0
Tag No.
EAT Unit Capacity Air Flow
Deg F.
CFM
Tons
DC-1
95
23
-
EGT
Deg F.
LGT
Deg F.
GPM
115
100
40.0
Press
Drop FT H2O
V/PH
HP
MCA
Manufacturer
20.53
208/3
-
-
Ref Plus
Model No.
FVD 134FH-5F19
Remarks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dry coolers to be selected based on a concentration of 40% Propylene Glycol.
Unit weight 1840 lbs
Electrical Data: Fan Motor FLA =6.2 Amps; Minimum Ampacity= 20.2 Amps & Maximum Main Fuse= 25 Amps
Disconnect switch by Div. 15.
Div. 16 to provide 120V/1Ph connection for control.
Unit to be provided with control panel P37 , aquastat fan sequencing control, firs stage cycling & high speed Zeihl-Abegg
Unit to be provided with custom made legs for installation along longer side.
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 1 of 1
C:\USERS\PUBLIC\DOCUMENTS\DESKTOP\TEMPORARY\15999.01.SCHM.DRY COOLER.DOC
GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alterations Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
April 25, 2013
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
Symbol
A
Type
Border
Fastening
Damper
Supply air
diffuser
31
Y
B
Supply air
grille
F
A
Y
C
Return air
grille
F
A
D
S/A linear
bar diffuser
500 F
E
Return air
grille
F
Transfer air
grille
Finish
Colour
Size
mm
Manufacturer
B12
Model No.
E.H. Price
SCD
B12
E.H. Price
SERIES 520D
Y
B12
E.H. Price
SERIES 530D
D
Y
B12
E.H. Price
SERIES LBP 15A
C/TB
A
_
B12
E.H. Price
SERIES 10
BF
_
_
B15
E.H. Price
STG -1
Remarks
300X300
Refer to
drawings
Perforated grille
Remarks:
1.
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 1 of 1
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.03.schm.grilles.doc
PUMP SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alterations Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
April 25, 2013
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
Tag
No.
Service
Location
USGPM
Head
(Ft)
Motor
V/ph
P-2
Condenser Water
Pump – 40%
propylene glycol
Mechanical
Penthouse
41.5
70
208/3
BHP
Manufacturer
HP
5
Model No.
Remarks
Rpm
1800
Armstrong
Series 4300
2x2x8
Remarks:
1. Starter & disconnect switch to be provided by Div. 16.
2. Provide and install Propylene Glycol feed system. (Model MX-2045-MX manufactured by Metex or approved equal. System shall be c/w: polyethylene
tank, control panel (includes dual parallel dry contact switch for BAS & Intl. system), includes pressure switch, pressure gauge, relief valve, isolating
valves, level switch, low level audible alarm and silencer and shut off valve. Power connection: Control panel 115V/1Ph; Mixer: ¼ HP 115V/!Ph and Glycol
Pump : 1/3 HP 115V/1Ph) Power connection By div. 16 to Propylene Glycol Feed System.
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 1 of 1
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.04.schm.pump.doc
TRANSFER FAN SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alterations Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
April 25, 2013
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
TAG
No.
Location Served
CFM
MAX. SOUND ESP
(SONES)
(I.W.G)
RPM
MOTOR
V/PH
BHP
Manufacturer
Model No.
Control
Remarks
W
TF-3.1
Meeting Room 340
400
2.1
0.1
1000
120V/1
139
Greenheck
CSP-A410
TF-3.2
Meeting Room 370
500
2.9
0.1
1070
120V/1
217
Greenheck
CSP-A510
Wall mounted
controller
Wall mounted
controller
TF-3.3
IT ROOMS – 373
300
1.2
0.1
1050
120V/1
80.7
Greenheck
CSP-A290
Room
Thermostat
TF-4.1
Office 424
400
2.1
0.1
1000
120V/1
139
Greenheck
CSP-A410
TF-4.2
Meeting Room 458
500
2.9
0.1
1070
120V/1
217
Greenheck
CSP-A510
Wall mounted
controller
Wall mounted
controller
TF-4.3
IT ROOMS – 461
300
1.2
0.1
1050
120V/1
80.7
Greenheck
CSP-A290
Room
Thermostat
TF-5.1
Meeting Room 540
400
2.1
0.1
1000
120V/1
139
Greenheck
CSP-A410
TF-5.2
Meeting Room 572
500
2.9
0.1
1070
120V/1
217
Greenheck
CSP-A510
Wall mounted
controller
Wall mounted
controller
TF-5.3
IT ROOMS – 575
300
1.2
0.1
1050
120V/1
80.7
Greenheck
CSP-A290
Room
Thermostat
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
NOTES:`
1.
2.
3.
Fan to be controlled by the local reverse acting thermostat.
Div. 16 to provide starter & disconnect switch.
Transfer fan shall be c/w vibration isolators & rod hangers.
Crossey Engineering Ltd.
Page 1 of 1
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.05.schm.Transfer.fan.doc
PLUMBING FIXTURE & PLUMBING ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd
th
th
Alteration Research Offices 3 , 4 & 5 Floors
April 25, 2013
Project No. 12221
Revision No. 0
TAG
FIXTURE
DESCRIPTION
WC-1
PUBLIC WATER CLOSET - BARRIER FREE
BARRIER FREE/ELONGATED, WALL MOUNT, FLUSH
VALVE
WC-2
PUBLIC WATER CLOSET
SAME AS ABOVE, STANDARD HEIGHT
U-1
URINAL
WALL MOUNTED, FLUSH VALVE
L-1
SEMI-COUNTER LAVATORY
BARRIER FREE - COUNTER MTD - WITH SUPPORT
S-1
SINK
COUNTER MTD – TWO HANDLE FAUCET
JS-1
JANITOR SINK
FLOOR MOUNT
FD-1
STD. FLOOR DRAIN
FINISHED AREAS
Page 1
REMARKS
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Desktop\Temporary\15999.06.schm.Plumb.doc
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
ALTERATIONS RESEARCH OFFICES
TORONTO, ONTARIO
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
“ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION”
April 25, 2013
CROSSEY
ENGINEERING
LTD.
CEL JOB NO.: 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16000
Page 1
February 13, 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16000
16010
16012
16020
16041
Electrical Specifications Table of Contents
Electrical General Provisions
Facilities Shut-down Requirements
Operating Maintenance
Demolition
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16103
16104
16109
16111
16112
16122
16131
16132
16141
16146
16151
16191
Backboards
Nameplates
Wiring Methods
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Fittings
Surface and Luminaire Raceways
Wires and Cables Up to 1000 V
Splitters, Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes and Cabinets
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings
Wiring Devices
Multi-Outlet Assemblies
Wire and Box Connectors Up to 1000 V
Fastenings and Supports
LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION AND SERVICE
16440
16450
16471
16477
16478
16485
Fused and Non-fused Disconnected Switches Up to 1000 V
Secondary Grounding
Breaker Type Panelboards
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Low Voltage Fuses
Contactors
LIGHTING
16501
16502
16503
16504
16505
16561
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Ballasts
Lamps
Lenses
Luminaire Construction and Installation
Luminaires
Occupancy Sensors
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16000
Page 2
February 13, 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
16721
16741
Fire Alarm Systems
Telecommunication Raceway Systems
MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL
16811
16825
Motor Starters Up to 600 V
Control Devices
APPENDICES
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Supplementary Bid Form – Not issued
Electrical Panel Schedules
Division 15 and 16 – Division of Responsibility
- END-
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 1
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference
.1
Read and be governed by Definitions, Conditions of the Contract and its amendments
and/or supplements including Division 0, Division 1, General Conditions of the Contract
and supplementary General Conditions.
.2
Section 16010, forms an integral part of the scope of work for the Division 16 Contract
and will be referenced until completion of the contract.
.3
Throughout these specifications and the associated electrical documents the following
references shall be applied;
.1 Baycrest Centre for Geriatric Care may be referred to as the Owner and/or Tennant.
.2 The term “By Others” noted within the electrical documents shall mean work to be
provided by the General Contractor and/or Owner. However within his Bid, the
Electrical Contractor shall allocate the associated costs based on the documents to
provide assistance in the coordination, some field manpower, and offer his expertise
as an electrician to professionally execute the work. The final state of the work shall
ensure it benefits the Owner, Tenant, Architect’s vision and the overall good for the
project.
.3 The term Electrical Contractor or Contractor shall be used within the drawings and
specifications. Read this to mean the Division 16’s scope of work.
.4
1.2
The term “Provide”, “Supply” and “Installed” shall be governed by the definition outlined
within the Conditions of the Project’s Contract.
Intent
.1
The Electrical Contractor shall include within his Bid all field and office administration
labour, equipment, equipment incidentals in order to provide and execute the complete
work as specified within the Electrical Documents.
.2
The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to execute and provide all work as
specified within the Electrical documents.
.3
The Supplementary Bid Form must be completed in full and submitted with Bid. The
Consultant shall advise the Prime Consultant and Owner of his review of the Bid forms.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 2
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
If the Supplementary Bid Form is not completed, the Owner reserves the right to reject
the General Contractor’s sub-trade selection and classify him as non-compliant. The
General Contractor shall resubmit an alternate selection with no increase to his original
Bid submission.
.5
This project and its documentation demand a significant amount of the Contractor’s
office administration manpower more than what he may be accustomed too therefore,
the Electrical Contractor shall ensure all associated administration costs are carried
within his Bid submission. In addition to his project administration duties, the Contractor
shall be responsible to provide the following;
.1 The capability to provide and produce auto-cad drawings.
.2 Provide detailed conduit routing drawings, identifying conduit system types and sizes
etc.
.3 Provide assistance and information in the preparation of interference drawings.
.4 Provide electronic files to the Consultants for all milestone submissions c/w with full
size set(s) of white prints (aka hard copies).
.5 Provide final electronic files and white prints of record (as-built) drawings to both the
Consultant and Owner.
.6 Provide as noted completed mock-ups, sample boards, material samples, etc. well in
advance of the construction schedule for review.
.7 Provide and submit to the Consultants fully compliant and Contractor reviewed shop
drawings. Failure to execute this process shall be the Contractor’s responsibility for
any scheduling impacts if the submissions are rejected during the review process.
1.3
Letter Award Of Contract
.1
Prior to issuance of the Letter Award of Contract to the Electrical Contractor, the Owner
reserves the right to interview and meet with the Electrical Contractor. The purpose of
the meeting is to discuss with, and ensure the Electrical Contractor has a full
understanding of the Owner’s construction administration team, procedures and the
project.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 3
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.2
With his Bid submission, this Contractor is in agreement that, upon receipt of Letter
Award of Contract he will provide the following within five (5) working days;
.1 Provide all signed purchase orders for the entire scope of work to the Owner’s Project
Administration Team, General Contractor and Prime Consultant.
.2 Provide a detailed shop drawing schedule complete with equipment long lead delivery
dates; the schedule shall list the manufacturers as noted on the Bid form. The
schedule shall be submitted to the Owner’s Project Administration Team, General
Contractor and Prime Consultant.
.3 The Electrical Contractor shall confirm to the Owner’s Project Administration Team
and Prime Consultant in writing that his distributors can execute the Scope of Work
and meet the schedule.
.4 The Contractor shall submit the Manufactures’ letter of confirmation that all
documents have been reviewed and comply to, or exceed the specifications.
1.4
Monthly Draws
.1
Provide a sample of the project’s monthly progress draw for review and acceptance upon
Award of Contract. A detailed draw is expected for example:
.1 Distribution Equipment;
1. Conduit Rough-in (6.25% of Total Value)
2. Feeders Installed (6.25%)
3. Equipment Supplied to Site (12.5%)
4. Equipment Installed (24%)
5. Equipment Energized (6.25%)
6. Equipment Commissioned (6.25%)
7. Equipment Test Reports Submitted (12.5%)
8. Equipment Spare Parts Submitted (18.75%)
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 4
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.2 The above sample shall also be applied to the following:
1. Lighting
2. Telecommunications
3. Security
4. Fire Alarm
5. Branch Circuit-Power.
.2
Provide a sample change notice breakdown for review and acceptance.
.3
Provide the Electrical NECA rates for Change Notices: Normal installation conditions will
be accepted, less 15%.
.4
The General Contractor shall be responsible to ensure all schedules, purchase orders,
list(s), etc. have been submitted and that his schedules are updated accordingly prior to
submission to the Prime Consultant and Owner.
.5
The Owner reserves the right to review and negotiate equipment credits and the deletion
of electrical work rates.
1.5
Contract Drawings And Specifications
.1
Wherever differences occur between plans, riser diagrams or schematics, or between
specifications and drawings, the maximum condition shall govern and shall be carried
within the Bid.
.2
Bring discrepancies between plans and actual field conditions promptly to the attention of
the Prime Consultant for clarification.
.3
Contractor shall make on-site field verifications of dimensions noted on plans since
actual locations, distances, and levels shall be governed by actual field conditions.
.4
As the work progresses and before installing any apparatus, equipment, fixtures or
devices which may interfere with the treatment and use of the building, obtain from the
Prime Consultant a drawing or instruction for the location of the electrical equipment.
.5
Install all conduits, wireways, etc., to conserve headroom and keep any interference to a
minimum with the free use of the space through which they pass.
.6
Install conduits, wireways, etc., only after the locations have been fully coordinated with
all the other trades by submitting electronic interference and conduit routing drawings.
.7
Take special care in the installation of conduits, wireways, etc., which are to be
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 5
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
concealed to ensure that they come within the finished lines of floors, walls and ceilings.
.8
Where such conduits, wireways, etc., have been installed in a manner as to cause
interference, the Contractor shall remove and reinstall it in a suitable location without
extra cost to the Owner.
.9
Do not remove or damage any structural fireproofing. Leave space to permit the
fireproofing to be inspected and/or repaired at the Contractor’s cost.
.10
Before commencing work, check and verify with the General Contractor and Civil
Contractors all grade and invert elevations, levels, dimensions etc., to ensure proper and
correct installation of the work – if applicable.
.11
In addition to the electrical scope of work identified within these documents, provide the
items as required by the authorities having jurisdiction (ESA).
.12
Install ceiling mounted components (luminaires, speakers, etc.) in accordance with the
architectural reflected ceiling plans.
.13
The Electrical devices noted within the plans shall not be dimensioned as plans identify
the quantity of devices, luminaires, equipment etc. only. The Contractor shall reference
the architectural plans and site conditions.
.14
Coordinate with all trades and provide interference drawings prior to any installation of
work. Revise locations, routing of conduits, etc. to avoid conflict without extra cost to
the Owner – see interference drawing section.
1.6
Contractor's Shop
.1
Provide a job site office, workshop, tools, scaffolds, material storage, etc., as required to
complete the work of this contract and as directed by the Consultant/General Contractor.
.2
The electrical contractor’s office should as a minimum have the following capabilities,
Phone, fax, email, high speed internet connection, router with a spare port and patch
cable in order that the Consultant can access the internet to deal with and expedite
project related issues, a copier and a printer.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 6
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.7
Cleaning
.1
The Electrical Contractor shall;
.2
Protect and clearly identify all equipment including the equipment installed during the
rough-in stage of construction. Note failure to identify the rough-in equipment will affect
progress draws as the Inspecting Consultant cannot quantify the request.
.3
During the performance of the work and on it’s completion, remove from the site and
premises all debris, rubbish and waste materials caused by the work for this contract.
Remove all tools and surplus materials after completion and acceptance of the work.
.4
The Electrical Contractor shall vacuum all equipment thoroughly at the time of final
acceptance and of the work. Clean plastic components and exposed components of
luminaires.
.5
All equipment shall be professionally cleaned prior to turn over.
1.8
Temporary Services
.1
1.9
Refer to general Contract conditions.
Phasing / Staging Concept
.1
The overall electrical phasing must be in concert and support the Architectural
Phasing Plan.
.2
With respect to scheduling the Electrical Contractor shall meet all requirements of the
General Contractor and the requirements identified in the Construction Documents.
.3
It is imperative that the Electrical Contractor prior to his Bid Submission fully understands
the Project’s and General Contractor’s phasing plan as it relates to, the existing systems
operation, interconnections and the installation of new power and communication
systems. This is a fully operational Healthcare Facility and system down times must be
kept to an absolute minimum.
.4
All system shut downs and interruptions must be coordinated with the General
Contractor, Owner and Prime Consultant. The Facility’s operation is the primary concern
and will be the guiding principle in the coordination of shut downs.
.5
Coordinate with the General Contractor for the completed areas to be turned over to the
Owner in a manner consistent with the phasing approach for this project.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 7
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.6
At each turn over meet the requirements as reflected in the Electrical specifications and
Contract Documents.
.7
Carry all associated costs and labour in the electrical Bid Price with respect to phasing
and phased turn-over areas, as multiple testing of systems and verifications will be
required.
1.10
Scheduling Of Work
.1
For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to the construction schedule
detailed in the Contract Documents
.2
Contain all work being performed within the physical area of work which is underway
during any particular period of time. Keep the amount of disruption in the existing facility
to a minimum.
.3
The Contractor shall forecast and schedule his execution of the Electrical Scope of Work
requirements well in advance so as to identify any conflicts. Clarification(s) requiring an
immediate response from the Consultant due to poor planning will not be acceptable.
1.11
.1
Installation of Work
The Contractor shall be responsible for:
.1 The layout of the work of this contract, and for any damage caused to the Owner’s
equipment by this installation, or other contracts by improper location or carrying out
of this work.
.2 The prompt installation of the work of this contract in advance of concrete pouring or
similar work.
.3 The protection of finished and unfinished work and equipment and work of other
contracts from damage due to the carrying out of the work of this contract.
.4 The condition of all material and equipment supplied under this contract, and for the
protection and maintenance of work completed throughout the construction period.
.2
To confer with other trades engaged on the Project and arrange the scope of work so
that it will be carried out in the best interest of all concerned.
.3
To furnish items to be "built-in" in ample time and provide necessary information and
assistance in connection with the building-in of the same.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 8
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
To notify the Prime and Structural Consultants of the size and location of recesses,
openings and chases before floors, walls, etc. are erected. Submit a hard copy set of
conduit drawings prior to any concrete pours where openings in slabs or sleeves are
required. An electronic format of the drawings shall be submitted as well.
.5
To proceed with the work as quickly as practically so that construction may be completed
in as short a time as possible and in accordance with the building schedule.
.6
To ensure that all equipment and material is ordered in time to meet the
construction schedule. The Electrical Contractor shall provide a schedule of equipment
deliveries to the General Contractor and the Prime Consultant after award of contract.
Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor and ensure that the equipment is
delivered and in place prior to closing of the building/slab. The areaways are not
designed for bringing equipment in. It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate
this requirement.
.7
Furnish promptly information required for the construction schedule.
.8
Manufactured products supplied with instructions for their use shall be used in strict
accordance with those instructions.
.9
Mechanically protect all conduits until they are ready for pulling wires and making
connections. Duct tape will not be acceptable, plastic conduit plugs or clasps shall be
used. Ensure caps are labelled for visual inspection. Cover and protect all fixtures and
equipment against dirt, water, chemicals or mechanical injury. Re-touch, refinish or
replace any equipment or materials damaged in shipment or during the construction prior
to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. Any cost associated to damage equipment
shall be arranged between the General Contractor and his sub-trades only.
.10
If a portion of slab on each floor is pre-cast slab. Include all cost in contract for all
required additional work such as coordination, provision of drawings for approval,
labour, etc.
.11
If the slab on each floor is poured in phases. Provision shall be provided for all in slab
conduits. Sleeves shall be provided to join the conduits for the subsequence pours.
Ensure the conduit systems shall be free of debris and continuity of the conduit systems
is maintained.
.12
Where boxes embedded in concrete or installed in areas that the finished
panels/materials shall be applied, extension rings and/or custom boxes shall be provided
to ensure that there shall be no gap between the boxes and the outlets. These conditions
shall apply to most but not limited to outdoor applications offices. Examine the
Architectural drawings for other areas and include all costs in Bid Price.
.13
Provide required materials for conduit crossings at expansion joints, both surface and
recess type.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 9
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.12
Codes, Permits, Fees And Inspection
.1
All work shall meet or exceed the latest requirements of the Ontario Electrical Safety
Code and its Supplements, local inspection bulletins.
.2
Obtain all permits and arrange for inspection of all work and pay all fees in this regard.
On completion of the work, deliver the final unconditional "Certificate of Approval of the
Electrical Safety Authority" to the Prime Consultant. Inspection fees are the responsibility
of the Electrical Contractor. Multiple inspections and fees shall be carried in the Bid to
allow the Owner/User to move in sequentially.
.3
It is hereby agreed that all requirements have been examined and checked with the
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) and a complete installation shall be in accordance with
these requirements which will be provided at the Bid Price Submission.
.4
The Contractor shall keep a permanent record of each inspection made by the Electrical
Safety Authority showing the dates, inspector's name, scope of the inspection and
statement of special decisions or permissions granted. Make these records available to
the Consultants at any time, and turn them over after completion of the work. Contractor
must have them included in the manuals.
.5
If applicable, the drawings shall be submitted initially to the Electrical Inspection
Department by the Electrical Consultant on behalf of the Owner, and his time and fee for
this submission shall be paid for by the Owner. The Consultant will forward ESA
documentation to the successful contractor.
1.13
.1
1.14
.1
1.15
.1
Manufacturers' And CSA Labels
Must be visible and legible after equipment is installed.
Protection
Protect exposed live equipment during construction for personnel safety. Follow all
requirements of OHSA, ESA, the General Contractor and Owner’s Health and
Safety Regulations.
Materials
Refer to Division 0 and 1 documents and as specified herein.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 10
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.2
Where materials, equipment, apparatus, or other products are specified by manufacturer,
brand name, type or catalogue number, such designation is to establish the standards of
desired quality, style or dimensions and shall be the basis of the Bid. Furnish materials
so specified under this Contract unless changed by mutual agreement. Where two (2) or
more designations are listed, the Contractor shall choose one (1) of those listed and
state the choice made in Supplementary Tender Form, "Equipment and Material List",
refer to Appendix.
.3
Where the use of equivalent, alternate or substitute equipment alters the design or space
requirements indicated on the plans, the Contractor shall include all items of costs for the
revised design and construction, including the cost of all other trades and the
Consultant’s time involved to review the alteration.
.4
Acceptance of the proposed equivalents, alternates or substitutions shall be subject to
the review by the Consultants and Owner and if requested, the Contractor shall submit
for inspection, samples of both the specified and the proposed alternate items.
.5
In all cases where the use of equivalents, alternates or substitutions is permitted, the
Contractor shall bear the extra costs, including Consultant’s and Owner’s time, of
evaluating the quality of materials and the equipment to be installed.
1.16
Equivalents And Alternates
.1
Unless requests for changes in Base Bid Specifications are received and approved prior
to the opening of the Bids, the Contractor will be held to furnish all specified items under
his Base Bid. After the Contract is awarded, changes in specifications will be made only
as defined in "Section - Material Substitutions."
.2
For the equipment to be supplied by the Contractor, choices may be offered as alternates
to the items named in the specifications, in the space provided in the Tender Form.
Alternate proposals must be accompanied by full descriptive and technical data on the
article proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from
the Base Bid if the alternate is accepted. Prior review by the Consultant is not required
on items submitted as alternate Bids, but the decision on acceptance of the alternate(s)
will rest with the Consultant and Owner. All costs associated for the Consultant’s and
Owner’s review time will be billed directly to a supplied Contractor’s purchase order
number.
.3
The Contractor shall replace unspecified or rejected materials built into the work with
specified or accepted materials at no additional cost to the project.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 11
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.17
.1
Material Substitution
After execution of the Contract, requests for substitution of materials of makes other than
those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be considered by the
Consultant and Owner subject to the following:
.1 The specified material cannot be delivered to the job in time to complete the work in
proper sequence to work of other trades, due to conditions beyond the control of the
Contractor. Refer to shop drawing schedule submission, refer Section 1.16.
.2 Requests for substitutions shall be accompanied by documentary proof of equality,
difference in price and delivery, if any, in the form of certified quotations from suppliers
of both specified and proposed equipment.
.3 In case of difference in price, the Owner shall receive all benefits of the difference in
cost involved in any substitution and the Contract altered by change order to credit the
Owner with all savings so obtained.
.4 Materials and equipment substituted or offered as alternatives shall have spare parts
and servicing available and shall fit into the space allocation shown on the drawings.
.5 If any material or equipment being considered for substitution involves additional
design, architectural or engineering, fees or other costs in checking whether or not the
substitute material or equipment is suitable for the project, such fees or costs shall be
paid for by the Contractor. The consultant per diem rate shall be supplied to each
piece of device or equipment requested for review. There is no guarantee that the
reviewed product shall be approved by Owner and/or reviewing consultant.
1.18
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance to the Electrical Specification.
.2
After award of the Contract, as noted, the Contractor must provide a detailed schedule
for shop drawing submissions and a schedule for the delivery of the equipment to the
site. The Contractor shall identify any equipment whose delivery time will negatively
impact the project completion date. Failure to do so will require the Contractor to provide
temporary equipment if approved until the specified equipment is available and no extra
monies shall be paid to the Contractor.
.3
Shop drawings shall be complete with dimensions, weight (self & operating),
recommended housekeeping pad dimensions, inertia pads, etc. so that it can be
reviewed by Structural, Acoustic Consultants, etc.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 12
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
Prior to detailing reinforcement, the Contractor must submit drawings of the structure
showing formed holes, recesses and sleeving required under all sections. The
submission shall be complete with dimensioned openings, recesses and sleeves and
relate to suitable grid lines and elevation.
.5
With his shop drawing Submission Schedule, the Contractor shall make a Priority List for
the Consultant’s review. If not identified, the Consultant will review shop drawings at his
discretion.
.6
Submission of shop drawings shall be made in an organized manner that corresponds
with the Construction Schedule.
.7
It is the Contractors to fully review and seal his shop drawings prior to issuance to the
Consultants.
.8
The Consultant shall not be held responsible for rejected shop drawings as it relates to
the Construction Schedule.
.9
The Electrical Consultant will review and process shop drawings within ten (10) working
days of his receipt, for each individual item, not when the Contractor or General
Contractor submitted them. Ten days will not be revised regardless of the time frame
noted anywhere in the project’s Contract documents.
1.19
.1
1.20
Samples
Submit samples of electrical equipment, colours of equipment, etc., for review by the
Prime Consultant as specified. Samples shall remain on site until completion of the
project. Final fabrication of equipment shall only occur until the Prime Consultant’s
selection. The Contractor shall identify the response time required, allow for a minimum
of two (2) weeks.
Electronic Record Drawings
.1
The Consultant will provide at a cost of $100.00 per drawing to the Contractor(s) one set
of AutoCAD drawings on computer disk based on AutoCad Version 2010, for the purpose
of preparing interference conduit routing and record drawings. As the job progresses,
mark up the white prints to accurately indicate installed work, i.e. location and elevations,
etc. On completion of the work, transfer the information neatly onto the computer disks
based on AutoCad Version 2010, and submit the disks and one set of prints for review.
Correct the disks as directed by the Consultant and hand these over to the Consultant,
together with a set of white prints, on completion. Complete all computer schedules as
deemed necessary by the Owner. If the request for AutoCAD drawings is received by
the General Contractor or Owner on behalf of the Electrical Contractor, it will not relieve
the Contractor of his payment to the Consultant.
.2
The Electrical Contractor shall record, as the job progresses, all approved changes and
deviations made to any work shown on the original contract drawings whether by
addenda, requested changes, job instructions, and changes due to job conditions.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 13
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.3
The Electrical Contractor shall indicate on the drawings all buried services and their
elevations, pull boxes, junction boxes, empty conduits, concealed main and sub-feeder
conduits and any other equipment not clearly in view, with exact dimensions for future
reference. Tie dimensions by measurement to existing topographical features, and
include changes in directions as well as at least three (3) points on straight runs of
conduits, etc.
.4
Record drawings shall be kept up to date and be available for checking at any time by the
Consultant. Failure to produce drawings may cause the reduction to the requested
monthly Progress Draw. Contractor will provide updated record drawings as noted in the
General Contract. Drawings to be submitted to General Contractor for distribution.
Minimum three (3) copies, one for Electrical Consultant, one for Owner, and one for
General Contractor. Each submission shall be clearly identified.
.5
Final Record drawings shall be submitted four (4) weeks prior to the requested date of
substantial completion.
1.21
Temporary And Trial Usage
.1
After any part of the work of this contract has been completed, the Contractor, General
Contractor, Prime Consultant and Consultants shall make inspections together. The
Contractor shall carry out performance tests of such parts under the direction of the
Consultant. If deficiencies are found, he shall rectify them immediately to the satisfaction
of the Consultant. After such deficiencies are rectified, place the work in service. If, in
placing a portion of the equipment in service, it is necessary to make temporary
connections in the wiring in order to obtain proper operation, provide such connections in
the manner required by the Consultant.
.2
Temporary or trial usage of any electrical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or
materials will not be construed as evidence of the acceptance of same.
.3
No claims for damages will be considered for injury to, or the breaking of any parts of
such work which may be used.
1.22
.1
1.23
Consultant's Instructions
During construction, the Consultant will issue such individual instructions as may be
necessary for verification and correction of the work. These instructions shall be binding
as part of the Contract Documents. The number of instruction is individually numbered
for tracking purposes and shall not be considered as a poor reflection of the documents.
Change Notices And Change Directives
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 14
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.1
No additional money over and above the Contract Price will be paid for extra work unless
a written order, signed by the Prime Consultant for such work to proceed is given.
.2
When change or additional work is required, the Consultant will issue a notice of
contemplated change, together with revised plans if necessary, identifying the additions,
deletions or alterations required.
.3
When and if the change price is accepted, a change order will be issued by the Prime
Consultant and then, and only then, may the work listed be carried out.
.4
The Contractor’s promptness in submitting his review is essential.
.5
The Owner reserves the right to issue Change directives in lieu of change notices.
.6
Change directives shall be governed by the terms as outlined within the
Contract Documents.
.7
Electrical Contractor’s equipment incidental costs and rental costs shall be clearly
identified within the Supplementary Bid Form.
.8
Upon receipt of the change the Contractor shall provide, but not limited to the following;
.1 Review the scope of work.
.2 Immediately determine in writing any impact to the construction schedule and issue it
to the Prime Consultant and Owner for review.
.9
Upon issuance of the change, the Contractor shall provide the following;
.1 The Contractor immediately evaluate these changes and submit the price to the
Consultant.
.2 When and if the price is approved, a change order will be issued by the Prime
Consultant and then, and only then, may the work listed be carried out. The
Contractor’s promptness in submitting is essential
.3 Submit a complete breakdown of labour and material involved.
.4 Provide separate unit prices for each item of labour and material.
.5 All support documentation from the distributor.
.6 Submitting lump sum prices for extras and/or credits will not be accepted.
.7 The Contractor immediately evaluate these changes and submit the price. When and
if the price is approved, a change order will be issued by the Prime Consultant and
then, and only then, may the work listed be carried out. The Contractor’s promptness
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 15
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
in submitting is essential.
.10
When the request for change is issued, the contractor shall examine the Scope of Work
description and define the affected area. Do not progress the work in the affected areas
until the changes are approved. If this process shall delay the schedule, the Contractor
informs the Prime Consultant immediately for direction.
.11
All purchase orders breakdowns shall be submitted that will be applied to change
notices. The purchase orders shall include but, not limited to the following;
.1 Submit all data in accordance to the General Contract documents.
.2 Submit the cost and “locked-in rates” for each conduit size and types.
.3 Submit the cost and “locked-in rates” for each wire size and types.
.4 The Contractor shall submit a list of electrical distributors that were interviewed prior
to Bid submission.
.5 Cost for scaffolding, lifts, etc and their associated rental rates. Scheduling shall be
reviewed at the time of the change notice installation with Owner.
.6 Cost for miscellaneous tools and shall be clearly identify what “miscellaneous” is
interpreted as.
1.24
Requests For Information - RFI
.1
The successful Contractor may submit if he chooses, a Request for Information also
known as an RFI to the Consultant Team for clarification of an item within his
Scope of Work.
.2
It is understood that an RFI is a form of dialogue between the Contractor and
Consultant(s).
.3
The quantity of RFIs generated during the project’s construction period is no reflection of
the quality of the electrical documents, nor shall the quantity of RFIs form the basis of a
delay claim.
.4
In order to expedite the RFI response time, the RFI must be clearly identified and
directed to the Consultant responsible for that work.
.5
The RFI shall be submitted to the Consultant Team in a timely manner with a minimum of
one (1) month look ahead for its related work. The Contractor shall be responsible that
the construction schedule is never impacted.
.6
An RFI will not be accepted nor shall it be submitted after 1500hrs to the Consultants. If
the RFI is submitted after the time specified then it shall be dated for the next
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 16
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
working day.
.7
The Contractor shall never place the Consultant in a situation where, due to poor
planning and issuance of the RFI requires an immediate response putting a deliverable
date in jeopardy.
.8
It is the Electrical Contractor’s responsibility to notify the General Contractor and ensure
he directs the RFI to the respective Consultant for example, a slab core drilling request
shall be directed to the Structural Engineer, the Electrical and Prime Consultants shall be
copied.
.9
The Contractor shall avoid issuing an RFI requesting clarification for multiple subjects.
.10
The Electrical Consultant reserves the right to process each RFI within five (5) working
days. Issuance of the RFI shall factor in the response time and the construction look
ahead time.
1.25
Scheduling Of Work
.1
For all work to be performed under this contract, adhere to construction schedule
detailed in the Division 0 and 1 Documents of the Contract.
.2
Contain all work being performed within the physical area of work which is underway
during any particular period of time.
.3
Should the work within a particular area cause any electrical apparatus in another area to
cease to function properly, modify and reconnect this apparatus which has ceased to
function properly. The Electrical Contractor shall notify all parties prior to modifications.
.4
Coordinate with General Contractor for schedule of Electrical Commissioning to ensure
that the work shall be complete prior to the Owner’s move-in.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 17
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.26
Voltage Ratings
.1
Provide operating voltages in accordance with Standard CAN3-C235-83.
.2
Motors, electrical heating, control and distribution devices and equipment must operate
satisfactorily at 60 Hz within the normal operating limits established by the above
standard. Equipment must operate in the extreme operating conditions established in
the above standard without damage to any equipment.
1.27
Mounting Heights
.1
The mounting height of equipment is measured from the finished floor to the centreline of
the equipment unless specified or otherwise indicated. The Electrical Contractor shall
confirm mounting heights with the Architect prior to rough-in, unless code related.
.2
If the mounting height of any equipment is not indicated, verify the mounting height
before proceeding with the installation.
.3
Install electrical equipment at the following mounting heights unless otherwise indicated:
.1 local switches: 47" (1200 mm);
.2 wall receptacles:
6. general: 12" (305 mm); Refer to Architectural Drawing for placement of device
within block motor joints.
7. above top of continuous baseboard heater: 8" (200 mm);
8. above top of counters or splash back: 7" (175 mm);
9. in mechanical rooms: 47" 1200 mm;
10. for emergency lighting battery units: adjacent to the battery unit;
11. outlets for production equipment (if applicable): 48" (1200 mm), unless noted on
architectural documents
.3 panelboards:
12. 72" (1800 mm) to the top except that the panelboard shall not be lower than 6"
(150 mm) above the finished floor;
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 18
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
Where multiple panelboards are mounted together, align the tops of all the panelboards
or trims with the highest panelboard determining the height.
.1 Telephone/data outlets: 12" (305 mm);
.2 Wall mounted telephone outlets: 48" (1200 mm); (including pay phones)
.3 Emergency Telephone Outlets as per Owner’s Standards;
.4 Fire alarm stations: 47" (1200 mm);
.5 Fire alarm speakers: 84" (2100 mm) and in ceiling;
.6 Wall mounted speakers: 84" (2100 mm);
.7 Door bell pushbuttons: 47" (1200 mm);
.8 Emergency lighting battery units: 96" (2400 mm);
.9 Wall mounted dry type transformers: 96" (2400 mm) to the bottom;
.10 Individual starters:
1. 60" (1500 mm) to the top;
2. where multiple starters are mounted together, align the tops of all the starters or
trims with the highest starter determining the height;
.11 splitters: 4" (100 mm) below the lowest equipment connected to the splitter.
1.28
Fireproofing
.1
Where cables or conduits pass through floors and fire rated walls pack space between
wiring and sleeve and seal with 3M fire stopping system and details. Contact the 3M
representative to ensure that the installation meet 3M requirements.
.2
Care must be taken to keep integrity of all assemblies. The Contractor shall provide at
the end of the project a letter from 3M indicating that the installation meets all
requirements.
.3
Meet all requirements of the OBC and fire proofing requirements as specified under the
General Contract Documents.
.4
Contractor shall submit samples documents in accordance to shop drawing submission
requirements.
1.29
Bases Supports
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 19
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.1
Where conduit and equipment is located on walls or slabs which will not permit the
support of equipment, provide suitable supports to the building structure. Supports shall
be constructed of steel members or of steel pipe and fittings designed to safely support
the equipment.
.2
All equipment bases shall be set on pads of kinetic precompressed fibreglass or vibration
isolators sized to suit the equipment which they ought to support.
.3
Refer to acoustic requirements (if available by Architect) for vibration isolators and
requirements.
.4
All hangers and connections to open web steel joists, must be made at the panel points.
It is not structurally acceptable to impose any loads on either the top or the bottom chord
of the joist, between panel points. Obtain the maximum working load that can be
suspended from a joist panel point from the structural Consultant prior to installation of
any work and strictly adhere to these requirements. Loads must be applied so that they
do not cause twisting of the joints.
1.30
Inserts, Sleeves, Curbs And Openings
.1
Provide all inserts, sleeves, curbs and housekeeping pads required for the work of this
contract. All sleeved or formed openings through the structure must be shown on
sleeving drawings which are to be submitted to all Consultants for review prior to
construction. No holes through the structure will be permitted without written approval of
The Prime and Structural Consultant.
.2
Use only factory made threaded or toggle type inserts as required for support and
anchors, properly sized for the load to be carried. Place inserts only in portions of the
main structure and not in any finishing material.
.3
Use factory made expansion shields where inserts cannot be placed, but only where
approved by the Architect (Prime Consultant) and only for loads of 50 Kg or less.
.4
Do not use power activated tools.
.5
Supply and locate all inserts, holes, anchor bolts, sleeves and roof pitch pockets in time
when walls, floors and roof are erected.
.6
Size sleeves to provide 1" (25 mm) clearance all around.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 20
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.7
Use the following sleeving materials:
.1 through all interior walls use Schedule 40 steel pipes, machine cut, flush with finished
structure. Check room finish schedules;
.2 through all exterior walls above grade use schedule 40 steel pipes, machine cut, flush
with finished structure inside and to suit flashing on outside;
.3 through all foundation walls below grade and all other waterproof walls provide Link
Seal. Check flashing details for further information. Clamp manufactured by
Thunderline or Innerlynx.
.4 through all waterproof floors, through washrooms, janitors closets, boiler rooms,
mechanical rooms, kitchen and through roofs use wrought iron sleeves, machine cut.
Extend sleeves 4" (100 mm) above finished floor upwards and cut flush with
underside of floor.
.8
Extra heavy weight cast iron sleeves may be used as an alternative for wrought iron
sleeves.
.9
Provide 4" (100 mm) high, 4" (100 mm) wide watertight concrete curbs with 0.8" (20 mm)
chamfered edges around all sleeves passing through floors.
.10
Sleeves are not required in walls and dry area floors, where conduit is installed ahead of
wall construction.
.11
The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for packing all sleeves between the
conduit or cable passing through the sleeve and the sleeve and all spare sleeves with
loose fibreglass insulation. Seal the annular space both sides as follows:
.1 for all horizontal sleeves in exposed areas, use a seal of equal or better fire rating
than the wall to be sealed;
.2 for all horizontal concealed sleeves through fire walls and through walls separating
areas of different air pressure, use a permanently resilient silicone base or equal
sealing compound;
.3 for all vertical sleeves through roofs, washrooms, janitor closets, equipment rooms,
use permanently resilient silicone base or equal compound, non- flammable and
waterproof. Ensure that the seal is compatible with floor and ceiling finishes. Check
the room finish schedules for further information;
.4 Provide proper fire stop materials for sleeves that passing through fire rated walls and
or assemblies.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 21
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.12
Set and securely support sleeves, ties, anchor bolts, pipe hangers and other inserts,
openings and sleeves, in concrete floors and walls, as required by all trades. Use setting
diagrams, templates and instructions provided by others for location and setting.
.13
Where required, set anchorage devices for tie-back and life-line (roof) anchors, davit
bases, or other window-washing anchor inserts, in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, and with reviewed shop drawings.
.14
Advise Prime Consultant, without delay, of any openings, sleeves, inserts and
embedment required but not shown on the Structural Drawings or on reviewed shop
drawings. Provide and carry additional costs for reinforcing as directed.
.15
Sleeves, openings, etc., within slabs and walls greater than 50 mm square not indicated
on Structural Drawings must be approved by Consultant.
.16
Do not provide for any openings or inserts within beams or columns without approval of
the Structural Consultant.
.17
Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware or waterstops. If
inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of all proposed modifications from
Structural and Prime Consultant before placing concrete.
.18
Check locations and sizes of sleeves, openings, etc., shown on Structural Drawings with
Architectural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings.
.19
Dissimilar embedded metals shall be separated by a minimum of 40 mm of concrete or
shall be protected by electrically insulating coating or separators, for all concrete
otherwise likely to be exposed to moisture. Stainless steel and plain steel shall be
considered dissimilar metals.
.20
In slabs and ramps, metallic embedment and inserts such as electrical and conduits,
junction and fixture boxes, and other hardware shall conform to CAN/CSA-S413.
1.31
Flashing
.1
Coordinate with requirements for roofing, waterproofing and flashing with the Roofing
Contractor and Prime Consultant’s documents.
.2
Flash electrical parts passing through or built into a roof, an outside wall or a
waterproof floor.
.3
Provide 8 pound sheet lead flashing for cast iron or wrought iron sleeves passing
through roof.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 22
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.4
Flashing shall suit roof angle and shall extend minimum 18" (450 mm) on all sides.
Leave flashing as directed by the Contractor for him to build into roofing, rendering a
watertight connection.
.5
Provide counter flashing on stacks, ducts and pipes passing through roof to fit over
flashing or curb.
.6
Provide sleeves passing through outside walls with lead or copper flashing as directed.
.7
Pay special attention to the waterproofing conditions of basements and walls and floors
that may exist. Cooperate at all times with the Waterproofing and Concrete Contractors
and do not cut or destroy any waterproofing seal without the consent of same. Provide
sleeves passing through waterproof walls with asphalt roofing felt wrapped around so as
to leave a 1" x 2" (25 mm x 50 mm) recess on both sides of the wall. Seal recesses and
the space between conduit and sleeve as specified in Division 7. See special details for
concrete encased ducts passing through outside walls.
.8
Provide a seal between cables and cable sleeves after installation is complete. Seal all
spare sleeves.
.9
Supply and install all pitch pockets for the electrical and building controls installations
through the roof. Layout and cut deck at all locations requiring installation of pitch
pockets.
1.32
.1
1.33
Access Panels And Doors
Refer to Section 16075.
Painting And Stenciling
.1
All hangers, channels, conduits, etc. shall be delivered to the site galvanized after
fabrication and all metal cut and finishes damaged on the job shall be painted to match.
.2
All equipment and materials, panels, luminaires, etc., shall be stored in a dry, clean
location, covered if necessary to preserve factory finish.
.3
Where equipment and material is designated unfinished, all exposed metal work, with the
exception of chromed locks and hardware, shall be left with a suitable prime coat finish.
.4
Painting of equipment and material requiring a finished coat after installation will be
carried out under the condition of the Contract. This does not apply to the making good
of damaged factory finishes which shall be done by the Contractor for Electrical.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 23
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.34
Identification And Labeling
.1
Clearly identify all conduit and teck cable systems carrying feeder cables by stenciling the
voltage of the system, feeder and circuit identification and any other wording that may be
required at regular intervals on the conduits, on all splicing and pull boxes, on both sides
of sleeves and at each floor on vertical risers. The actual wording and size of the letters,
and spacing of each inscription shall meet the requirements of the Electrical Inspector.
The paint used shall be durable and resistant to chipping. Failure to carry out task may
affect Progress Draws.
.2
Identify all electrical equipment in accordance with Electrical Specifications.
.3
In pull boxes, junction boxes and at terminations, feeders shall be identified by plastic
plates indicating system voltage and circuit designations, and individual conductors shall
be identified with coloured tape or covering to show phase, neutral or ground connection.
The plates shall be 1" (25 mm) in diameter and have letter stamped .6" (15 mm) high,
and the colour coding shall be Phase A - red, Phase B - black, Phase C - blue, Neutral white, and Ground - green. All shall be coordinated with Authorities.
.4
The outer covering of branch circuit wiring shall be colour coded throughout all 600, 347,
208 V and 120 V systems: Phase A - red, Phase B - black, Phase C - blue, Neutral White, and Ground - green. Identification shall suit the local inspector prior to
installation.
.5
Contractor shall paint the interior of all boxes (outlet, junction etc.) with a durable paint of
a colour which identifies the system function. Junction box coverplate to be painted as
well. Once boxes and coverplates are dried descriptions and/or circuit numbers will be
identified. Failure will affect review of monthly progress draws. The applicable colours
are as follows:
SYSTEM
COLOUR
Lighting & Power - 120/208V
Light Blue
Emergency - 120/208V
N/A
UPS - 120/208V
Orange
Lighting and Power - 347/600V
Blue
Emergency - 347/600V
N/A
Fire Alarm
Red
Owner’s Telephone
Light Green
Owner’s Data
Dark Blue
Cable TV
N/A
Owner’s Security and Surveillance (CCTV)
Yellow
Building Controls
White
CBSA PA System
Dark Blue /Green
CBSA Security and Surveillance
Yellow/Green
Indicate all circuit numbers on box painted coverplates.
Provide circuit numbers on all face plate receptacle and switches/dimmers. Submit
sample.
.6
All high and medium voltage raceways shall be labeled "DANGER 13.2 kV or 600V, or
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 24
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
208V”, at 3' (3 m) intervals along raceway. Labels are to be white in colour with black
lettering. Submit sample prior to manufacturing. Refer to Nameplate Specification for
additional requirements.
.7
Each wall mounted coverplates (for both switches/dimmers, receptacles and
electrical controls) shall be engraved and filled to indicate the physical locations of the
outlet, its designation and the circuit numbers it terminates. Font shall be Bold Arial, 1/4"
for panel location and designation and 3/16" for circuit numbers. Contractor shall
coordinate and carry all associated costs.
.8
The Contractor shall submit all labeled coverplate samples to the Owner for approval
prior to manufacturing.
1.35
Number And Location of Outlets
.1
Provide outlets for light, power and systems of the number and in the locations shown on
the drawings if identified on architectural drawings they shall govern. Locate all outlets
accurately with respect to building lines and in centering outlets due allowance shall be
made for overhead pipes, ducts, equipment and for variations in wall or ceiling finishes,
window trim, paneling, etc. When necessary, make adjustments to ensure that all outlets
are properly centered. Install local lighting switches installed on the strike side of the door
as finally set and accept responsibility for determining this before outlet boxes are
installed. Refer to architectural documents for additional information. If not shown,
Contractor shall coordinate with Architect prior to rough-ins.
.2
The location of any outlet may be changed without extra cost or credit providing that the
new location is within 20' (6 m) of that originally shown on the drawings and that
instructions for the change are issued prior to installation of the outlet.
.3
Do not mount outlet boxes in walls and partitions back-to-back and provide a minimum of
6" (150 mm) between boxes. Provide acoustic insulating medium in conduits which join
boxes on opposite sides of same wall or partition, or to acoustic documents (if
applicable) and details for additional information.
1.36
.1
Branch Circuit Wiring
Lighting and power panels are specified as sequence bussed unless noted and all
branch circuit wiring for these panels shall be such that, where a common neutral is used
for two (2) or three (3) circuits these circuits shall be fed from adjacent breakers so that
single-pole breakers may be replaced with 2 or 3-pole breakers should this be so
required in the future. All circuits shall be balanced. All wires including neutrals and
grounds shall be labelled at both ends (tagged).
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 25
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.2
For all outlets for computers and UPS circuits, provide a separate neutral for each circuit.
Shared neutral is not acceptable. This requirement is not applicable to furniture power
connections. Wires shall be labelled at both ends. Contractor shall provide a sample for
review.
.3
Separate neutral and grounds shall be provided for all audio/visual circuits. Refer to
plans for circuiting.
1.37
.1
Connectors And Terminals
Wire connectors shall be of an approved type:
.1 pre-insulated spring type, consisting of coil of steel wire, hard steel shell and flexible
polyvinyl insulation with long skirt extended beyond the bell end of the spring;
.2 tinned, copper compression type installed using the manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies, and with positive locking insulating cap.
.2
1.38
Use compression type tinned copper terminals for all conductor terminations except
where bolted type terminals are supplied with equipment, such terminals to be of copper
tinned overall.
Motor And Equipment Wiring
.1
Refer to Appendix.
.2
Provide power wiring connection and, fittings external to all motors, machines, starters,
control panels, etc., supplied under this and all other contracts except as noted herein.
.3
Power wiring will include but not be limited to all raceways, conduits, lugs, fittings,
disconnect switches, auxiliary devices for 3-phase 600 V, and 3-phase 208 V motors and
1-phase 208 V, and 1-phase 120 V motors. All wiring motor to be in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
.4
The use of "lock off stop" devices will not be permitted. Provide disconnect switches for
all motors that are 9 m or greater away from the motor starter or if the distance is less,
provide disconnect switches for the motors where the motor starter is not visible.
.5
All two (2) speed and delta wye motors shall have an adequate number of properly sized
feeders between the starters and motors to allow for operation. Note that all remote
disconnect switches located adjacent to 2-speed motors and delta wye shall be 6-pole
with an auxiliary contact.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 26
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.6
All motor 25 HP or larger shall be complete with reduced voltage auto transformer starter
unless otherwise noted. This is applied when starters are provided by Electrical.
.7
All motor starters, control wiring, etc., shall conform to the Electrical Specifications.
1.39
Elevator Wiring (if applicable)
.1
Provide conduit, wire, fittings, disconnect switches, and auxiliary devices to wire into
service the elevators as called for herein, required by the Elevator contract and as
required by the Ontario Technical Safety Standards Authority (TSSA) the Ontario
Electrical Safety Authority (ESA), and National Building Code (NBC).
.2
The Owner has pre-tendered the elevators, therefore, prior to his Bid submission the
Electrical Contractor shall ensure he obtains a copy of the latest approved Contract
documents and carry in his Bid all the electrical requirements as the Owner’s
representative, or his Construction Manager may have failed to supply this Consultant
with the latest documentation prior to the closing of the Electrical Bid.
.3
For each elevator provide:
.1 The Electrical Contractor must request elevator shop drawings from the General
Contractor prior to my concrete pours to ensure all requirements are met.
Modifications to the installation shall not be a cost to the Owner.
.2 A 600 V 3-phase power service to include a protective device at the distribution point,
a fusible disconnect switch in the elevator machine room located on the lock-jamb
side of the entrance door to the room and feeder from the distribution point through
the disconnect switch in the elevator machine room, and from disconnect switch to
elevator controller. The disconnect switch shall be complete with auxiliary contacts to
connect to elevator controller as required;
.3 A separate 120 V, 15 A lighting branch circuit to include a protective device at the
distribution point, a fusible disconnect switch in the elevator machine room, located on
the lock-jamb side of the elevator machine room entrance door, and wiring from the
distribution point through the disconnect switch in the elevator machine room, and
from disconnect switch to elevator controller. Provide additional fused disconnect
switches for elevator cab fan and elevator cab receptacle with a separate 15A, 120V
circuits. Locate fused disconnect switches beside other switches. Electrical
Contractor shall coordinate with elevator contractor exact locations prior to roughing–
in.
.4 Provide a dedicated 120V 15A duplex receptacle in the elevator machine room
supplying no other receptacles;
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 27
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.5 Conduit and 4-pair telephone cable from the telephone backboard to the terminal box
complete with terminal strip in the elevator machine room; Contractor shall coordinate
this work with telecommunication Contractor.
.6 Conduit and wiring from each elevator group to the fire alarm panel for fire alarm
system interface.
.7 A separate 120V 15A feed to the elevator equipment duplex or triplex controller.
Locate on the lock jamb;
.8 Two (2) signal circuits from the existing Phase 1 – Generator Transfer System to
each elevator controller. One circuit shall indicate loss of normal power. The other
shall indicate forthcoming return of normal power (advance warning signal), allowing
minimum 20 second delays for this signal circuit. Maintain fire rating for these signal
circuits.
.9 Conduit and wiring to send signal to Elevator controller for activation of Fire Alarm
devices located in Machine Rooms and Elevator shafts.
.10 Provisions required for the elevator(s) designated as fire fighter.
.4
1.40
All conduits required between hoistways and elevator machine rooms shall be by the
Electrical Contractor. Communication and security wiring shall be supplied by the
Electrical Contractor. Contractor shall coordinate and coil cable only. Final termination by
Owner. General Contractor shall schedule all work.
Cutting And Patching
.1
The Contractor shall employ the particular trades to do all required cutting and patching
and repairing of surfaces for his work.
.2
Supporting members of any floor, wall or the building structure shall be cut only in such a
location and manner as directed by the Consultant and the Structural Consultant.
.3
All holes and surfaces shall be repaired with the type of material removed by the
tradesmen expert in the type of repair required.
.4
Provide fire barriers around all components in holes which penetrate fire separations.
The fire barrier medium provided shall make the fire separation equal to or better than
the medium which was cut away. All materials shall be CSA approved and UL listed.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 28
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.5
All floor saw-cutting and drilling required for electrical services shall be performed within
the hours approved by the Owner. Written notice must be given to the Owner.
.6
All openings through concrete/block/stone/brick must be core drilled. The area shall be
scanned / x-rayed prior to coring. No saw cutting/chipping will be allowed. Structural
Engineer shall be provided with drawings for proposed openings for approval. All costs
shall be carried by Electrical Contractor.
1.41
.1
1.42
Warranty
Provide a two (2) year unconditional guarantee on all labour and material from the date
of acceptance of the project under this contract, except where warranties on certain
items extend beyond two (2) year. In this case, the extended warranty shall be
honoured. Partial occupancy if required, the start date for the warranty shall be
negotiated by the General Contractor, Owner and the Electrical Contractor.
Excavation And Backfill
.1
The Contractor shall provide and supervise all excavation and backfill required by work
for this contract. The contractor shall be responsible for bedding, providing services, and
cover all excavation and backfill. All excavation and backfill shall be done prior to finish
grading and shall be restored to rough grade.
.2
All excavation and backfill work required for this contract shall be performed by an
acceptable Division 2 Contractor in accordance with Division 0 and 1 documents. Employ
the service of this Contract or as required.
.3
All excavated materials shall be removed from site, no native backfill will be permitted. Al
backfill shall be granular A and B.
1.43
Concrete Work
.1
The Contractor shall provide and supervise all concrete work for this Contract.
.2
All concrete work required for this contract shall be performed by an acceptable
Contractor in accordance with Division 0 and 1 documents concrete work.
.3
This includes the provision of reinforcing steel, wire mesh, ties, etc.
.4
All anchor bolts for the work of this contract shall be provided by this contract.
.5
Concrete work includes but is not limited to:
.1 Ductbank encasement (inside and outside the building);
.2 Conduit encasement (inside and outside the building).
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 29
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.3 Pre-cast manhole/pull box for the work of this contract unless specifically noted.
.4 Equipment (housekeeping) pads.
.6
1.44
.1
1.45
.1
1.46
The Contractor shall coordinate and supervise the concrete work as noted above by the
Concrete Contractor.
Division 15 / Division 16 Work
Refer to Appendix.
Cash Allowance
Refer to the Electrical Scope of Work and the Bid form for all cash allowances that shall
be part of the Base Bid. The Electrical Contractor shall carry all costs, management,
mark ups, warranty, coordination and placement, etc. for a complete installation.
Interference Drawings
.1
Provide information and cooperate with the General Contractor and
Mechanical Contractor for the preparation of interference drawings. The General
Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate the preparation of drawings.
.2
The Electrical Contractor to identify a separate line item within the Progress Draw labeled
as “Interference Drawings” at a minimum of 3% of Contract Value.
.3
Interference drawings shall be prepared on AutoCAD 2010. Interference drawings shall
be submitted by the General Contractor to the Prime Consultant and Consultants for
review on both a hard copy version and electronic.
.4
Interference drawings shall be provided to make clear the work intended or to show how
it affects other trades.
.5
Equipment dimensions shall be based on dimensions noted on reviewed shop drawing.
.6
Interference drawings shall be provided to scale 1:50 for the following areas:
.1 All electrical rooms but not limited to typical electrical closet on each floor, the main
Electrical Room and Generator Room.
.2 Main corridor Ceiling spaces.
.7
All components shown on the interference drawings shall be shown to scale.
.8
For equipment substitutions a complete interference set of drawings of the area affected
by the revision shall be provided by the Contractors.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16010
Page 30
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
.9
Interference drawings shall be provided showing both plan and sections and shall
incorporate all services including electrical conduits including and over 1" (25 mm),
electrical cable trays, fire alarm devices and light fixtures.
.10
The Electrical Contractor shall submit dimensioned sleeves drawings showing the
location and dimension of sleeves through all floors structural walls roofs for review by
the Prime and Structural Consultants.
.11
The Electrical Contractor shall submit a plan layout showing all of the equipment to be
provided and the actual weights of the equipment for review as soon as possible after
Contract Award.
.12
Installation of the Electrical work shall not proceed until all interference drawings have
been submitted by the General Contractor to the Prime Consultant for his review.
Schedule shall not be impacted.
.13
Interference Drawings shall be provided to scale 1:50 for the following:
.1 Each Floor’s Main Corridor (Total of 2 sections per corridor)
.2 At all Section cut lines indicated on the drawings for each floor level.
.3 Vaulted Ceilings
.4 Additional interference drawings of other areas may be required and as requested by
the Prime Consultant.
1.47
Conduit Drawings
.1
Provide detailed conduit routing drawings for all systems.
.2
Routing shall identify surface, recessed and below slab drawings.
.3
In slab routing shall be submitted for Structural Consultant’s review.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS
1
General
1.1
REFERENCE
.1
1.2
Section 16012
Page 1
February 13, 2013
Read and be governed by Definitions, Conditions of the Contract and Amendments or
Supplements including Division 0, Division 1, and General Conditions of Contract and
Supplementary General Conditions.
FACILITIES SHUT DOWN REQUIREMENTS.
.1
In order that construction work can be carried out in a timely and orderly manner. The
following are the Shut Down Requirements procedures for this project. The attached forms
shall be used by the Electrical Contractor for this project with respect to requesting system
shut-down of the Power Distribution Systems, as well as requesting that Fire Alarm System
or Portions of the Fire Alarm System are to be By-Passed.
.2
The completed Request Form(s) shall be submitted to General Contractor who shall then
submit to the Owner a copy to the Consultants ten (10) working days in advance of the
requested shut down date or fire alarm zone by-pass. The Owner will respond by
completing their portion of the request form and return it back to the Contractor three (3)
days prior to the contractors requested shut down date or fire alarm system work. Owner
shall also provide a copy of the completed request form(s) to the General Contractor.
.3
It shall be the General Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the Electrical Contractor
and all his other trades for the shut-down.
.4
If work is required to be conducted within a Confined Space all Contractors shall meet all
requirements of the latest Ministry of Labour standards and guidelines. The Electrical
Contractor is to submit a copy of their Confined Space Work Procedures to the Owner and
the General Contractor for review.
.5
The Electrical Contractor is to submit a copy of their Lockout Procedures to the
General Contractor and the Owner’s Project Manager for review. Lockout Procedures
must include all requirements of the latest Ministry of Labour standards and guidelines.
.6
Temporary wiring that must be provided in order to meet the needs of electrical shut downs
must meet all requires of the latest Ontario Electrical Safety Code. Contractor shall carry
all associated costs.
.7
All temporary shut downs are to occur outside of normal operating hours of the building.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS
Section 16012
Page 2
February 13, 2013
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd th
th
Alterations Research Offices, 3 4 and 5 Floors
FIRE PANEL SHUT DOWN / BY -PASS R EQUEST FORM
Date of Request:
Time of Request:
Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown:
Person Requesting Shutdown:
Signature:
Request:
Reason:
Date Request Received:
Date Reviewed - Accepted/Denied:
Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed:
From Date:
Hrs
To Date:
Hrs
Taking Zone/Area Out of Service
Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service:
Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From:
(Operations Staff)
Time:
Hrs
Room/Area:
isolated at
hrs by:
(Operations Staff)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition
Room/Area:
back in service at
hrs by:
(Operations Staff)
Physical Plant Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored:
Name of Physical Plant :
Physical Plant Advised By:
Signature Work Completed:
Date:
Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operational state by the end of the Contractors Shift or alternate
measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS
Section 16012
Page 3
February 13, 2013
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd th
th
Alterations Research Offices, 3 4 and 5 Floors
DATA/VOICE SYSTEM SHUT DOWN / BY-PASS REQUEST FORM
Date of Request:
Time of Request:
Electrical Contractor Requesting Shutdown:
Person Requesting Shutdown:
Signature:
Request:
Reason:
Date Request Received:
Date Reviewed: - Accepted/Denied
Expected Duration For Work To Be Completed:
From Date:
Hrs
To Date:
Hrs
Taking Zone/Area Out of Service
Zone(s)/Area Requested Out of Service:
Permission to Bypass Zone/Area Received From:
(Operations Staff)
Time:
Hrs
Room/Area:
isolated at
hrs by:
(Operations Employee)
Restoration of Control Panel To Normal System Condition
Room/Area:
back in service at
hrs by:
(Operations Employee)
Physical Plant Advised That Zones/Area Have Been Restored:
Name of Physical Plant:
Physical Plant Advised By:
Signature Work Completed:
Date:
Note: The system(s) must be returned to fully a operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS
Section 16012
Page 4
February 13, 2013
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
rd th
th
Alterations Research Offices, 3 4 and 5 Floors
REQUEST FOR SHUTDOWN OF ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
REQUESTED BY:
DATE:
TIME
(Electrical Contractor)
CONTACT PERSON:
(Electrical Contractor)
PHONE # :
PAGER #:
AREA AFFECTED: (By Electrical Contractor)
WORK PROCEDURE AND RISKS: (By Electrical Contractor)
DURATION OF SHUTDOWN
APPROVALS:
PHYSICAL PLANT OPERATIONS REPRESENTATIVE
Owner’s PROJECT MANAGER
CEL JOB NO. 12221
DATE
DATE
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
FACILITIES SHUT-DOWN REQUIREMENTS
Section 16012
Page 5
February 13, 2013
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AFFECTED
List equipment Names:
SIGNATURE WORK COMPLETED
DATE:
Note:
1. The system(s) must be returned to fully an operation state by the end of the Contractors Shift or
alternate measures must be put in place and be agreed to by the Owner.
2. Meet the requirements of providing a detailed schedule as covered in Section 1.2 of this
specification section.
End of Section
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1
Section 16020
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
Operating And Maintenance Manuals
.1
Contractor shall identify a separate line item within the monthly Progress Draw labelled
as “manuals” at a minimum of 0.3% of the Contract Value.
.2
Provide Operating and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with the requirements of
Electrical Specifications and General Contract requirements.
.3
Submit the number of manuals as noted.
.4
Provide the services of electricians, manufacturers’ representatives and technicians
required to provide information which is necessary for the manuals. Note that a
"Substantial Completion Certificate" will not be issued until such a time as the manuals
have been submitted in their final accepted form and accepted by the Owner.
.5
Operating and maintenance data shall be submitted to the Consultant for review two (2)
months prior to final Progress Draw request. A list of comments if any will be generated
and returned to the Contractor. This process will continue until the manuals are
acceptable.
.6
Provide two (2) electronic versions copied onto a CD each for the Consultant and Owner
as well as provide two (2) complete manuals for the Owner. The hard copy manuals shall
be set up in volumes. A 3-ring binder equal to an Acco D-Ring with insert sleeves and
shall have each volume located within. Follow the attached list for layout. The binders
shall have Owner’s logo affixed to the front and spine of the binder with Project name. In
addition, a permanent label shall be affixed on the front and spine indicating the contents
of the volume, number, etc. Colour code all volumes (black, green, blue, white, yellow,
etc.).
.1
Company Name _________________________________________
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Volume
1
Master Section
E1
2
3
3
4
E2
E3
E3
E4
Index Name
General:
- Inspection Certificates
- Letter of Guarantee
- List of Suppliers & Contacts
- Single Line Diagram(s)
Medium Voltage Cable & Terminations
Distribution Panels
Lighting and Power Panels
Dry - Type Distribution Transformers
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
ELECTRICAL OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Volume
5
5
5
6
Master Section
E5
E5.1
E5.2
E6
Index Name
Lighting Systems fixtures.
Lamps
Ballasts
Wiring Devices
Each volume shall have the master index prefacing it.
.7
Each volume shall be accompanied by the following section index:
INDEX SECTION
Introduction
General Description
Schedule of Equipment
Test Certificate (See Test Section)
Maintenance Procedure
Schedule of Electrical Drawings
(Indexed List of Reviewed Shop Drawings)
Inventory of specified equipment spares.
Field Modifications
CEL JOB NO. 12221
PAGE
Section 16020
Page 2
February 13, 2013
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.2
Section 16020
Page 3
February 13, 2013
Data For Operating And Maintenance Manuals
.1
Only data associated with actually installed systems should be included in Operating and
Maintenance manuals and, in the case of manufacturers' literature, only originals of
catalogues, etc., not photocopies, should be included. Any diagrams, as installed
drawings, etc., pertinent to the systems being described should, if larger than the page
size, be mechanically reduced or contained within a clear plastic wallet within the
associated manual.
.2
Include in operations and maintenance data:
1.3
.1
Details of design elements, construction features, component function and
maintenance requirements, to permit effective start-up, operation, maintenance,
repair, modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of
installation.
.2
Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations,
exploded views, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising or
sales literature is not acceptable.
.3
Wiring and schematic diagrams and performance curves.
.4
Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance
manuals.
.5
Copy of reviewed shop drawings. All stamps including contractor and general
contractor’s to be visible
.6
Copies of all certificates including:
1.
Hydro Final Certificate
2.
Life Safety Systems Verification Certificate
3.
Test reports.
4.
Emergency Lighting Level Testing Reports.
Equipment Tests
.1
Contractor shall conduct and carry in his Bid the costs for tests of the following systems:
.1
Power distribution systems;
.2
All circuits, including power; voltage readings;
.3
Lighting and associated controls;
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Section 16020
Page 4
February 13, 2013
.4
Motors, heaters and associated control equipment;
.5
All systems; including fire alarm, and its interface with the generator and building
management system;
.6
Emergency lighting levels.
.7
Multiple loss of power scenarios. (Minimum of three (3))
.8
Distribution metering system
.2
Give sufficient prior notice to the General Contractor so that he can advise the
Consultants of the proposed time of the tests, minimum ten (10) working days, so they
can be represented at the tests. Submit all test reports in triplicate to the Consultant for
his review and records. One set for General Contractor, one set for manuals.
.3
Submit test results with all operation and maintenance data.
.4
Test all systems in accordance with details in appropriate sections within this
specification.
.5
Testing methods and test results shall be in accordance with CSA, the Ontario Electrical
Code, regulations of the supply authority, authorities having jurisdiction and identified
within this specifications.
.6
Remove and replace with new material(s) all conductors that are found to be shorted or
grounded.
.7
Do dielectric tests, hi-pot tests (if applicable), insulation resistance tests and ground
continuity tests as required by the nature of the various systems and equipment.
.8
Provide all grounding tests and submit the Reports.
.9
With the electrical systems completely connected and lamped, the following tests shall
be made on the power system:
.1
The Contractor shall carry the costs for the following tests including premium time,
as some tests such as lighting will occur in the evening;
.2
Control and Switching: test all circuits for the correct operation of devices, switches
and controls.
.3
Polarity Tests: test all circuits for the correct operation of devices, switches and
controls.
.4
Voltage Tests: make a voltage test at the last outlet of each circuit. The maximum
drop in potential permitted will be 2% on 120V, and 208V branch circuits, 2% on
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Section 16020
Page 5
February 13, 2013
208V feeder circuits, and 5% on 600V feeder circuits. Correct any deficiency in
this respect.
.5
Phase Balance: measure the load on each phase at each switchboard, splitter,
distribution panelboard and lighting and power panelboard and report the results in
writing to the Consultant. Re-arrange phase connections as necessary to balance
the load on each phase as coordinated with the Consultant, with the
re-arrangement being restricted to the exchanging of connections at the distribution
points mentioned in this paragraph. After making any such changes, submit to the
Consultant Record drawings showing the modified connections. The above applies
to new equipment.
.6
Supply Voltage: measure the line voltage of each phase at the load terminals of the
main breakers and report the results in writing to the Consultant. This test shall be
carried out with the majority of the facility’s equipment in use.
.7
Motor Loading: measure the line current of each phase of each motor with the
motor operating under load and report the results in writing to the Consultant.
Upon indication of any imbalance or overload, thoroughly examine the electrical
connections and rectify any defective parts or wiring. If electrical connections are
correct, overloads due to defects in the driven machines shall be reported in writing
to the Consultant.
.8
General Operations: energize and put into operation each and every electrical
circuit and item. Make repairs, alterations, replacements, tests and adjustments
necessary for a complete and satisfactory operating electrical system.
.10
Tests covering "General Operation" shall be carried out at the time of acceptance of the
work.
.11
Test all systems and obtain written confirmation from the manufacturer of each system
that all components have been installed correctly and that the system is functioning
properly. Present separate certification for all systems: fire alarm, power distribution,
generator, etc., to the Consultant.
.12
Provide labour, instruments, apparatus and pay all expenses required for the tests. The
Consultant reserves the right to demand proof of the accuracy of all instruments used.
.13
When the tests are performed, the Consultant may require that equipment, outlets,
devices, etc., be opened and/or removed from their housings and/or outlet boxes in order
that the interior of the equipment and wiring terminations and connections may be
examined. Provide all labour and tools for this purpose.
.14
The testing of motors shall be co-ordinated with the trades providing the equipment
driven by the motors so that they are carried out at the time the driven equipment is put
on test. In addition to the tests called for in Motor Loading above, provide labour and
instruments to take and record all motor load readings required to supplement the tests
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Section 16020
Page 6
February 13, 2013
on the driven equipment through various load sequences, as required by the trades
involved.
.15
1.4
Tests may include the interfacing of other systems, for example, generator with fire alarm
and building automation, the Electrical Contractor shall ensure costs for each system
representative technicians are carried by the respective manufacturers.
Project Closeout
.1
Provide labour, material, tools, equipment (man lift/zoom boom) etc., required for project
closeout/commission of the electrical systems.
.2
Operate all systems and demonstrate to the Owner how they conform with
Electrical specification documents. Under supervision, make adjustments and fine tune
systems.
.3
Contractor shall carry with his Bid the costs to fill out all forms as provided by the
Owner’s Commissioning Agent and carry the labour for inspections and attending
meetings.
1.5
Care, Operation, Start-Up
.1
Instruct operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of equipment.
.2
Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise
start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components.
.3
Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put
equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with
aspects of its care and operation. Refer to Training Section.
1.6
Training Of Owner’s Personnel
.1
On project completion (all electrical systems tested and operating), and prior to Owner
assuming responsibility of regular maintenance and operation of the systems contractor
to instruct Owner’s representative in the care, operation and maintenance of the
equipment or systems installed.
.2
Demonstrate the complete sequence of operation to Owner’s representative for each
piece of equipment. Operating sequences shall be simulated if the conditions are not
present.
.3
Contractor shall simulate a full loss of power and a fire alarm situation. Simulations shall
be conducted independently. Contractor shall ensure proper representation of
manufacturers are present and their associated costs are carried. Contractor shall
coordinate all work with General Contractor and ensure all trades are notified. Tests
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Section 16020
Page 7
February 13, 2013
shall be coordinated and scheduled in advance. Simulations must be witnessed by
Prime Consultant, Consultant, General Contractor and Owner’s assigned forces.
.4
Supply certified personnel to instruct staff on operation of electrical equipment. Supply
maintenance specialist personnel to instruct operating staff on maintenance and
adjustment of mechanical equipment and any changes of modification in equipment
made under terms of warranty.
.5
Provide instruction during regular work hours prior to acceptance and turn-over to
Owner’s operating staff for regular operation. The amount of instructional time will be
determined by the Owner’s operational staff until satisfied. As a minimum, the contractor
shall carry one (1) week of demonstration time.
.6
Use operation and maintenance data manuals for instruction purposes.
1.7
Single Line Electrical Diagrams
.1
Provide single line diagrams in glazed frames as follows:
.1
.2
1.8
Electrical distribution system: locate in main Electrical Room, Diesel Generator
Room, Server Room and Manager’s Office. The single line diagrams shall be an
up-to-date drawing of the system distribution, use record drawings.
The drawings shall be a photograph of the single line diagram(s) measuring 36" x 30"
(914mm x 762mm) for each drawing. The photographic process used shall be
non-fading.
Warranty
.1
Refer to Electrical Specifications and Contract conditions.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16041
Page 1
February 13, 2013
DEMOLITION
1
GENERAL
1.1
General
.1
This section of the specification shall be read in conjunction with and be governed by the
requirements of Section 16010.
.2
The Contractor shall visit the site and record date of visit prior to Bid.
.3
Co-ordinate all work with the current use of the buildings.
.4
Maintain all electrical services to all parts of the building which are in use. The
Electrical Contractor shall schedule all work and inform the Owner in writing at least one
(1) week in advance for permission of power shutdown is necessary and state time(s)
and duration(s) of interruptions. The Contractor shall consult with the Owner to
determine the equipment required to be on-line 24 hours per day and shall provide
temporary services and wiring as necessary. Reschedule work accordingly when
requested by the Project Manager.
.5
Include cost of premium time in Bid Price for work during nights, weekends or other time
outside normal working hours necessary to maintain all electrical services in operation.
1.2
Scope of Demolition
.1
Work shall include for removal, relocation and reinstallation of electrical devices, feeds
and equipment in the noted areas as noted on the drawings, This shall include for, but
not to be limited to:
.1
Disconnecting, removal and/or reinstallation of all electrical devices, feeders,
conduit ad wiring to accommodate new work.
.2
Rework of conduits, wiring and cables to an appropriate point for re-connection or
abandonment (power, voice communication, etc.).
.3
Remove all existing lighting fixtures unless noted as existing to remain and/or reuse, and dispose of same as instructed.
.4
All unused wall mounted devices shall be removed by the Electrical Contractor and
make safe all wiring.
.5
All work and material disposal shall be done in accordance with the established
schedule and general conditions.
.6
All services passing through the area of work, but servicing other areas of the
building, shall be identified, protected and left in place, unless otherwise noted.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16041
Page 2
February 13, 2013
DEMOLITION
1.3
.7
All service conduits not directly associated with area lighting, small power, local
systems, etc., shall be traced and identified for review by the Owner’s Facility
Manager in order to determine if services are to remain or to be removed. Once
identified, the Contractor shall remove those directed by the Owner.
.8
Remove all conduit work which is abandoned except cut flush where embedded in
structure.
.9
Remove all redundant outdoor electrical works (ductbanks, conduit and wiring,
etc.).
.10
Disconnect and remove all existing services, devices and wiring materials which
are abandoned.
Disposal of Materials
.1
All material removed from the site shall be disposed of in accordance with all applicable
environmental legislation and regulations and as noted elsewhere in the specification.
.2
Separate and recycle materials to be disposed to the maximum extent possible.
.3
Remove electrical transformers, capacitors and lighting ballasts containing PCB’s and
store on site where directed by the Project Manager for removal and disposal unless
otherwise noted. Removal and transportation of equipment containing PCB’s must follow
the requirements of the Ministry of Environment. Storage on site must comply with PCB
storage regulations.
1.4
Hazardous Materials
.1
If at any time during the course of the work, hazardous materials are encountered or
suspected, cease work in area in question and immediately report, in accordance with
Ontario regulation 654/85 (Section 7) to the General Contractor. Do not resume work in
affected area without approval from the General Contractor.
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Nil
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Removal of Materials
.1
Turn over to the Owner, all existing equipment that is no longer required. Remove any
equipment from the site as decided by the Owner. All material to be removed shall
become the property of the Division 16 Contractor.
.2
No equipment may be burned or sold while on site.
.3
The building structures and exteriors are to be maintained. The Electrical Contractor
shall remove material in a manner so as to not destroy the structure or exterior on the
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16041
Page 3
February 13, 2013
DEMOLITION
project.
.4
3.2
Protect all removed (to be retained) equipment from damage. Repair or replace without
adjustment to the Contract Price all existing equipment which is damaged in the process
or relocation.
Systems To Remain
.1
All services and equipment not shown on drawings shall be maintained in operation
during the construction phase. This Contractor shall be required to provide new conduit
and wiring for all existing systems to remain so that the existing conduit and devices do
not interfere with new work. Contractor shall remove existing devices and reconnect to
new services accordingly.
.2
Where circuits which run into the renovated area are fed from panels outside of the area
remove wiring back to panel and make safe circuits.
.3
All existing panel directories on all panels affected by this Contract shall be retyped to
indicate existing services remaining, spares, spaces and new services connected to
same.
.4
Maintain operation of all systems outside of the renovated area which may be affected by
the renovation.
.5
Make safe all circuits which have been cut off.
.6
Any circuits which have been made inoperative as a result of this work but are not in an
area to be demolished shall be reactivated at no cost to the Owner.
.7
Trace out and catalogue all circuits within the renovated area and adjacent areas. Mark
this information on a set of drawings prior to any work commencing as these circuits will
be reused as part of this work as noted on the drawings or called for in the Contract
Documents.
.8
Clean and test existing equipment which shall remain and equipment being reinstalled in
areas being renovated for proper operation and repair as necessary before being put
back into service.
.9
Contractor to verify operation of all existing devices and report any discrepancies to the
Engineer prior to proceeding with the Work.
.10
Unless noted otherwise, provide additional equipment of the same type and manufacture
where required ton supplement existing equipment.
.11
Maintain life safety systems to all existing buildings at all times during construction.
.12
Clean and inspect all existing panels to be reused and report any defects to the Project
Manager prior to starting the Work. Perform thermographic survey of all existing panels
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16041
Page 4
February 13, 2013
DEMOLITION
to be reused and/or modified.
.13
3.3
Where existing services are abandoned, but outlet boxes are to remain, remove wiring
and provide blank coverplates of material as specified under Section 16141.
Interface With Existing Systems
.1
Provide interfacing components between new and existing systems as necessary for
proper performance and operation.
.2
Check and coordinate all systems in the renovated area and in the new building addition,
which are extended to existing systems to ensure their proper operation.
3.4
Underground Services
.1
Existing redundant underground services shall be removed or abandoned as noted on
drawings.
.2
Where existing ductbanks and conduits are abandoned, pull out existing cables and seal
existing duct openings in buildings and tunnels.
.3
Where existing ductbanks and conduits are to be retained as spare for future use,
provide pull ropes in existing ducts after existing cabling is removed.
3.5
Existing Drawings
.1
Reference drawings outlining the existing “As-Built” condition and extent of Scope of the
electrical systems as installed in the affected areas are available for Contractors review
at the Facility Manager’s Office.
.1
The drawings are for “Reference Only”. The Contractor shall be responsible to
verify the authenticity of the Documents relating to the existing services.
.2
All quantities, determination of prevailing conditions must be based on site visit.
No claims for extra for determination of prevailing conditions must be based on site
visit. No claims for extra for discrepancies between site conditions and reference
drawings will be permitted.
.3
The successful Contractor shall obtain for the Project Manager, a copy of the
original design drawings and the available “As-Built” drawings for reference, to
familiarize himself with the building and to assist in evaluating the exiting installed
systems.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16103
Page 1
February 13, 2013
BACKBOARDS
1
GENERAL
1.1
2
General
.1
Provide fire-retardant backboards for all electrical equipment mounted on all walls as
noted and for data/communication equipment.
.2
Contractor shall submit plywood shop drawings for review.
PRODUCTS
2.1
3
Backboards
.1
Construct plywood backboards from 0.76" (19 mm) thick fir plywood, good one (1) side.
.2
Use fire rated backboards, and shall be stamped.
.3
Fire rated stamp shall be visible and legible at all times for visual inspection.
.4
Plywood shall conform to CSA4-S114.
.5
Painted boards shall not be accepted.
.6
No drive pins shall be permitted for any electrical installation. All fasteners shall be
removable.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Construct each backboard in a rectangular shape of the size as indicated. Where no
size is indicated, provide a backboard a minimum 4" (100 mm) wider and 4" (100 mm)
higher than the equipment. Where more than one (1) piece of equipment is installed on
the backboard, construct the backboard of a size to suit the maximum vertical and
horizontal dimensions of the equipment. No drive pins. All fasteners shall be removable.
.2
Fastenings:
.1
Fasten each backboard to a wall or to a structure using reviewed hardware.
Provide a flat washer under the head of each fastener. Recess the head of the
mounting bolt where equipment, including future equipment, is to be installed.
.2
Use expansion shields, toggle bolts or other types of wall fastenings to suit the wall
type. Align the mounting bolts with the wall studs for stud type walls.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16103
Page 2
February 13, 2013
BACKBOARDS
.3
Install fastenings a maximum 20" (500 mm) apart in both the vertical and horizontal
directions.
.4
When installing equipment heavier than 50 kg, fasten the equipment through the
backboard directly to the wall or support structure.
.5
Where walls are fire rated, Contractor shall provide a stand-off assembly to mount
the plywood and minimize wall penetrations. Submit a proposal for the stand-off
assembly.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16104
Page 1
February 13, 2013
NAMEPLATES
1
GENERAL
1.1
2
General
.1
Comply with the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
.2
Provide similar nameplates as identified in the arc fault calculation study.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Nameplates
.1
Construct all nameplates from laminated plastic having a black core with a white top
lamination such that engraving through the top lamination will reveal black lettering on a
white background.
.2
Construct all warning nameplates from laminated plastic having a red core with a white
top lamination such that engraving through the top lamination will reveal red lettering on a
white background.
.3
Submit two (2) samples to the Owner’s project manager for review prior to
manufacturing.
2.2
Sizes
.1
Provide nameplates of the sizes indicated. Where a size is not given, provide a standard
size nameplate of sufficient size to contain the test indicated.
.2
Where a numerical size is indicated, provide a nameplate of a size as indicated in the
table below. Provide lettering of the height indicated below unless another size is
indicated.
.3
Size
Width in.
(mm)
Height in.
(mm)
First Line
Lettering Height
(mm)
Following Lines
Lettering Height
(mm)
1
2" (50)
1" (25)
.5" (13)
-
2
3" (75)
2" (50)
.5" (13)
.4" (10)
3
4" (100)
2" (50)
1" (25)
.4" (10)
4
8" (200)
4" (100)
1" (25)
.4" (10)
Provide lettering of the height indicated. Where no height is indicated, provide lettering
.4" (10 mm) high.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16104
Page 2
February 13, 2013
NAMEPLATES
2.3
Specific Nameplates
.1
For each switchgear and motor control centre assembly, provide a nameplate to indicate
the following information. The number in brackets indicates the lettering height in
millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
For each power transformer, provide a nameplate to indicate the following information.
The number in brackets indicates the lettering height in millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.3
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Rated KVA .4" (10);
Rated voltage current, phase, wires and frequency .4" (10);
Power source .4" (10);
Year and month of manufacturer .4" (10);
Shop order number .4" (10).
1.
Example: TX-6A1 750 kV-600/347V, 3-phase 4W 60HZ fed
from MS-6AP1, Date of Manufacturer 07-06, Shop Drawing Number
12-12345.
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Rated voltage, kVA, phase and frequency .4" (10);
Power source .4" (10);
1.
Example: TX-6A2 600V 208/120V, 112.5 kVA, 3-phase, 4-wire
60 Hz fed from MS-6A1.
For each panelboard, provide a nameplate to indicate the following information. The
number in brackets indicates the lettering height in millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
.5
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
Line 6:
For each distribution transformer, provide a nameplate to indicate the following
information. The number in brackets indicates the lettering height in millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Line 1:
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Line 2:
Rated voltage current, phase, wires and frequency .4" (10);
Line 3:
Power source .4" (10);
Line 4:
Year and month of manufacturer .4" (10);
Line 5:
Shop order number .4" (10);
1. Example: MCC-6A1 600V, 400A 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz fed from MS-6AP1,
Date of Manufacturer: 07-06 shop order number: 20-12345.
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Rated voltage, phase and wires .4" (10);
Power Source .4" (10);
1.
Example: LP-6A2 600/347V, 3-phase, 4-wire fed from MS-6A1.
For each disconnect switch, contactor and individual starter, provide a nameplate to
indicate the following information. The number in brackets indicates the lettering height
in millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Rated voltage, current, phase and wires .4" (10);
Power source .4" (10);Example: DS-2B4 208/120V, 100A, 3-phase,
4-wire fed from SP-P1.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16104
Page 3
February 13, 2013
NAMEPLATES
.6
For each fan control switch, provide a nameplate to indicate the following information.
The number in brackets indicates the lettering height in millimeters:
.1
.7
For each transfer switch, provide a nameplate to indicate the following information. The
number in brackets indicates the letter in height in millimeters:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.4
Line 1: "FAN SWITCH" + Equipment tag number .4" (10);
2. Example: FAN SWITCH EF-15.
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Equipment tag number 1" (25);
Rated voltage, current, phase and wires .4" (10);
Normal power source .4" (10);
Emergency power source .4" (10) (3/8);
1.
Example: ATS-6A1, 600V, 800A, 3-phase, 4-wire normal feed
from MS-6A1 emergency feed from Generator No. 1.
Warning Nameplates
.1
Type "A", width = 4" (100 mm), height = 4" (100 mm) (Text height in millimeters in
brackets).
.1
.2
DANGER
1" (25)
MORE THAN ONE (1) POWER SOURCE
CONTAINED WITHIN,
DISCONNECT ALL POWER
SOURCES BEFORE SERVICING
THIS EQUIPMENT
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
Type "B", width = 4" (100 mm), height = 4" (100 mm) (Text height in millimeters in
brackets).
.1
.3
Text:
Text:
DANGER
1" (25)
THIS EQUIPMENT IS UNDER
AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND
MAY START AT ANY TIME
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
Type "C", width = 4" (100 mm), height = 4" (100 mm) (text height in millimeters in
brackets).
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Text:
DANGER
1" (25)
CAPACITORS WITHIN
DISCHARGE THE
CAPACITORS BEFORE
SERVICING
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16104
Page 4
February 13, 2013
NAMEPLATES
.4
Type "D", width = 4" (100 mm), height = 4" (100 mm) (Text height in millimeters in
brackets).
.1
3
Text:
HIGH NOISE AREA 1" (25)
HEARING PROTECTION
MUST BE WORN IN
THIS AREA
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
.4" (10)
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install nameplates on the front of the equipment on a prominent flat surface. Attach the
nameplates with rivets.
.2
Warning nameplates type “A” to be provided for transfer switch, Type “B” to be provided
for generator, Type “C” for capacitor banks and Type “D” for the generator room.
.3
Other warning nameplates to be provided as per the latest ESA Code.
.4
Refer to Arc flash nameplate information. Reference Section 16479.
3.2
Commissioning
.1
Check all nameplates as part of commissioning.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16109
Page 1
February 13, 2013
WIRING METHODS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference
.1
1.2
2
Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010.
Related Work
.1
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Fittings: Section 16111.
.2
Wires and Cables up to 1000V: Section 16122.
.3
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: Section 16132.
.4
Wire and Box Connectors up to 1000V: Section 16151.
.5
Occupancy Sensors: Section 16561.
.6
Fire Alarm System: Section 16721.
PRODUCTS
NIL
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
General: All wiring shall be recessed when located in finished areas. Surface mounted
wiring may be used in mechanical rooms, service spaces. Provide protection to conduits
which may be subject to mechanical damage.
.2
Branch High Voltage Feeders: wire in conduits.
.3
Main 600/347V and 120/208 V, 3 Phase Wire Distribution:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.4
Type RW90 in conduits; busways, etc. above grade.
Main mechanical systems feed - wire in conduit; busways, etc.
All other feeders as detailed on drawings; wire in conduit.
Provide applicable insulation for the environment the feeder(s) shall be installed.
i.e. use RWU 90 for underground, in-ground under slab on grade, exterior etc. any
location where cables are possibly exposed to moisture.
General power and lighting distribution: Wire in conduit.
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Branch circuit wiring within drywall partitions; wire in conduit.
Branch circuit wiring for surface mounted devices; wire in conduit.
Final drops to luminaries in acoustic ceiling tile; limited length (10’ 0” max) may be
made with Type AC90 cable or wire in conduit;
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16109
Page 2
February 13, 2013
WIRING METHODS
.4
.5
All other power and distribution shall be wire in conduit;
Type AC90 and/or BX cables will not be used in vertical partitions.
.5
Fixture Wiring: Flexible wiring systems for all recessed ceiling mounted fixtures (all other
are wire in conduit). Refer to Item 3.1.5.2.
.6
Fire Alarm System:
.1
.2
.7
Telephone and Data Communication Systems:
.1
.2
.8
.3
Two pullstrings and in conduit.
Size of conduits as noted.
Occupancy Sensors:
.1
.11
Wire in conduit;
Flexible sealtite connection shall be made between all non flexible conduit
assemblies and vibrating parts (e.g. between motors and conduits).with a 180°
loop and watertight connections.
Refer to Appendix A.
Security Systems:
.1
.2
.10
Two (2) pullstrings in conduit.
Size of conduits as noted.
Motor and Control Wiring:
.1
.2
.9
Wire in conduits to ensure code fire rating.
Flexible watertight connections to supervised valves, pressure switches, flow
switches, smoke dampers, etc.
Wire in conduit.
Site Lighting (if applicable):
.1
Wire in PVC rigid conduit. Refer to plans.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
1
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
Reference
.1
Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010.
.2
Wiring Methods: Section 16109.
.3
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: Section 16132.
1.2
Location Of Conduit
.1
The drawings do not show all conduits. Those shown are in diagrammatic form only, but
show the general intent. The Electrical Contractor shall provide detailed conduit routing
drawings for coordination.
.2
Conduits are to be provided to create complete raceway systems.
.3
Refer to structural drawings for the extent of hollow-core slabs (if applicable). Openings
through hollow core slabs shall be limited and must be approved by structural engineer.
.4
Prior to any installation of recessed conduits in the slab, the contractor shall submit the
proposed routes to the structural engineer for approval prior to installation. All conduit
sizes to be labeled. Failure to submit conduit routing layouts prior to installation may
result in the removal of conduits at the cost of both the General and Electrical
Contractors.
1.3
Number And Sizes Of Conduits
.1
2
Section 16111
Conduits to be provided shall be as indicated in documents or as required to suit
requirements of systems installed as specifically noted within the documents.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Conduits
.1
Rigid, schedule 40, galvanized steel threaded conduit of the size as indicated and
required to CSA C22.2 No. 45.
.2
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2 No. 83.
.3
Rigid schedule 40 PVC conduit of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2
No. 136.
.4
Flexible liquid-tight flexible steel conduit of the sizes indicated and required to CSA C22.2
No. 56.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Section 16111
Page 2
February 13, 2013
.5
Electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT) is not permitted.
.6
Contractor shall not use conduits smaller than 3/4" (19 mm) unless specifically noted.
2.2
Conduit Fastenings
.1
One (1) hole malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized straps to secure surface mounted
conduits. Thomas & Betts Series 1275 for rigid, threaded conduit and Thomas & Betts
Series 4175 for EMT complete with properly sized flat head screw.
.2
Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel members.
.3
Provide 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” galvanized steel channel type supports for two (2) or more
conduits on a minimum 60" (1500 mm) centres. Use suitable conduit clamps in channel.
.4
Provide .2" (6 mm) dia. threaded rods to support the suspended channels.
2.3
Conduit Fittings
.1
Fittings manufactured for use with the conduit specified with the same coating as
conduit.
.2
Provide insulated bushings on all rigid, threaded conduits.
.3
Provide steel set screw concrete-tight connectors and couplings for EMT conduits.
Thomas & Betts TC-7 Series and TK-12 Series, diecast fittings are not permitted.
.4
Provide steel couplings and connectors for all EMT conduits, Thomas & Betts
Series 5123, and 5120.
.5
Provide double locknuts and a nylon insulated bushing for Schedule 40 conduit
connections to sheet steel boxes and enclosures.
.6
Rain tight, steel fittings shall be used for all Owner’s security conduit and backbox
installations.
.7
Rain tight, steel fitting shall be used on all surface mounted conduits and equipment with
or without the area being sprinklered. “O” rings shall be used where all connectors
penetrate any surface mounted equipment or back boxes, including but not limited to
switchgear, panelboards, etc.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
2.4
Page 3
February 13, 2013
Expansion Fittings For Rigid Conduit
.1
Weatherproof expansion fittings with an integral bonding assembly suitable for a 4"
(100 mm) linear expansion.
.2
Watertight expansion fittings with an integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion
and a .8" (20 mm) deflection in all directions.
2.5
Explosion Proof Conduit Fittings (if applicable)
.1
2.6
EYS Series fittings complete with Chico X Fire Dam and Chico 'A' sealing compound.
Fish Cord / Pullstring
.1
3
Section 16111
Fish lines to be standard industry practice for the size of conduit and cable pulling
requirements.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install all conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and to cause minimum
interference in the spaces through which they pass.
.2
Conceal all conduits except in unfinished areas unless otherwise indicated.
.3
Do not surface mount conduits on building exterior surfaces unless otherwise indicated
or approved by Prime Consultant.
.4
All equipment boxes and conduit on columns to be recessed.
.5
Bend conduit cold. Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original
diameter.
.6
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 3/4" (19 mm) dia.
.7
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.8
Install fish cord in all conduits.
.9
Run four (4) 1" (25 mm) spare conduits up to ceiling space and four (4) 1" (25 mm) spare
conduits down to accessible ceiling space from each recess mounted panel. Terminate
these conduits in 12" x 12" (305 mm x 305 mm) junction box respectively. Identify the
junction box and label. Pack and seal penetrations to maintain fire ratings.
.10
Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked section.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Section 16111
Page 4
February 13, 2013
.11
Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.12
Do not fasten conduits to metal roof decks.
.13
Use rigid, threaded Schedule 40, galvanized steel threaded conduit except where
specified otherwise.
.14
Use rigid PVC for conduit for underground and/or in slab installations.
.15
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) in all areas, unless specifically noted and not subject
to mechanical injury. EMT shall not be used under slab or in slab.
.16
Use liquid tight flexible conduit for connections to motors, connections for all exterior light
fixtures, connections for all exterior systems, connection to recessed incandescent
fixtures without a pre-wired outlet box, connection to surface or recessed fluorescent
fixtures and work in movable metal partitions.
.17
Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors, transformers etc.
.18
Type ENT flexible conduit is not acceptable for this project.
.19
Install conduits in accordance with the requirement of other specific sections of this
specification which may include Telecommunication, and Security.
3.2
PVC Conduits
.1
PVC conduits may be bent in the field using approved electrical heating devices or by
using the appropriate bends. Damaged or improper bends shall be replaced. All joints
shall be made using an approved coupling with solvent welds. Clean all joints with
solvent cleaner prior to applying the solvent. Liberally apply the solvent to the conduit
fitting, force the conduit into the fitting and rotate the conduit 45 degrees within the flange
to form a tight bond. Allow proper curing time.
.2
All scorched PVC conduit shall be removed.
.3
Rigid PVC conduits shall be used for only underslab or grade or in slab runs. Rigid PVC
conduits shall not be used in block or steel stud wall construction. Maximum size of
conduit to run in slab is ¾”, larger conduits shall be installed under slab. All PVC conduits
shall transition to rigid galvanized conduit when exiting slabs, floors, walls or ceilings.
Exposed PVC is not acceptable.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
3.3
Section 16111
Page 5
February 13, 2013
Surface Conduits
.1
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.2
Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 4.9' (1.5 m) clearance.
.3
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.
.4
Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels provided accepted by
Structural Consultant.
.5
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as permitted by Structural
Consultant.
.6
Do not locate conduits less than 2" (50 mm) parallel to steam or hot water lines with a
minimum of 1" (25 mm) at crossovers.
.7
Submit a drawing identifying route prior to installation.
3.4
Concealed Conduits
.1
Do not install horizontal runs in masonry or partition walls.
.2
Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
3.5
Conduits In Cast-In-Place Concrete
.1
Locate to suit reinforcing steel. Install in centre one-third (1/3) of slab – see Structural
Details.
.2
Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.
.3
Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.
.4
Where conduits pass through waterproof membrane provide oversized sleeve before
membrane is installed. Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
.5
Encase conduits completely in concrete.
.6
Where PVC conduits are installed in concrete floor slab, use PVC to steel conduit
adapter fittings for conduits emerging from the floor slab (this also applies to PVC
conduits terminating in junction boxes in the slab, where a steel adapter is also required).
.7
Where a section of slabs shall be installed in phases, provide sleeves between two
sections with a larger diameter, conduits to be embedded in the subsequent pours.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
3.6
Section 16111
Page 6
February 13, 2013
Conduits In Cast-In-Place Slabs On Grade
.1
Run maximum 1" (25 mm) conduit in slabs on grade.
.2
Run conduits 1" (25 mm) and larger below slab and encased in 3" (75 mm) envelope of
pea gravel.
3.7
Conduits Underground
.1
Slope conduits to provide drainage.
.2
Waterproof joints (PVC excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
.3
All conduits in-slab 1¼” or greater shall be approved by the Structural Engineer prior to
installation. Electrical Contractor shall submit conduit routing drawings for approval prior
to any rough-in.
3.8
Exterior
.1
All conduits to run to site security lighting and receptacles, etc., located on the below
grade shall be PVC. RGS conduits and boxes shall be provided above grade.
.2
All conduit runs to light standards shall be rigid PVC conduit or polyethylene. Minimum
size of PVC conduit is 1” in diameter.
.3
Provide minimum 3'-0” (1 m) cover on all conduits feeding site lighting. Locate
fluorescent plastic strip tape 20" (500 mm) above feeders. Provide a 30' (100 m)
envelope of granular 'B' fill around feeder and backfill with native materials.
3.9
Hazardous Locations
.1
All conduit runs in hazardous locations if exposed to the environment shall be rigid
galvanized steel.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
3.10
Section 16111
Page 7
February 13, 2013
Location Of Conduits
.1
Care shall be taken to indicate the routes in which conduits can be located within
concrete floor and below slabs.
.2
Locations, radius and numbers with dimensions indicate all conduits related to gridlines.
.3
Installation of conduits in slab on grade, and/or in slabs shall confirm to structural
requirements. Proposed routes shall be submitted to Structural Consultant for review
prior to any rough-in.
.4
Where conduits and boxes existing or new are embedded in concrete slabs and walls,
and the slabs and walls are finished with insulation, acoustical panels, etc., extension
boxes shall be provided to bring the devices to the same finished surface. Electrical
Contractor shall review architectural drawings prior to Bid Submission.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
rd
th
th
3 , 4 and 5 Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16112
Page 1
February 13, 2013
SURFACE AND LUMINAIRE RACEWAYS
1
General
1.1
RELATED WORK
.1
Luminaires: Section 16505
.2
Acoustic Requirements (If applicable): Refer to Architectural Document.
.3
Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010 and Section 16020.
.4
Interference drawings shall be submitted prior to installation.
1.2
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 16010 and Section 01340.
.2
The following type of raceway may be used:
.1
Surface raceway system, where not a code implication.
.2
Recessed lighting fixture raceway
2
Products
2.1
SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEM (WIRING PULLED IN)
.1
Provide one piece steel raceway assemblies free of sharp edges and manufactured so that
wiring may be pulled into the raceway.
.2
Provide corners, pull boxes, elbows, tees and two piece assemblies to facilitate site wiring.
.3
Provide raceways of the cross-section dimensions as indicated.
.4
Provide a buff enamel finish.
.5
Provide all necessary switches, receptacles, extension boxes, adapters and utility fittings as
required for a complete installation.
2.2
SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEM (WIRING LAID IN)
.1
Provide two piece steel raceway assemblies manufactured as lay-in type raceway.
.2
Provide raceways of the cross-section dimensions as indicated.
.3
Provide a buff enamel finish.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
rd
th
th
3 , 4 and 5 Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16112
Page 2
February 13, 2013
SURFACE AND LUMINAIRE RACEWAYS
2.3
RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURE RACEWAY
.1
Provide fluorescent luminaire support system using a channel type raceway recessed in
slab as indicated approximately 41.3 mm x 41.3 mm.
.2
Provide clamp hangers with fully threaded rod hangers and spring nuts.
2.4
FITTINGS
.1
Provide all elbows, tees, couplings, hanger fittings and accessories as required to make
complete raceway systems.
.2
Refer to specific details as noted on drawings.
3
Execution
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install all raceways as indicated before the installation of the wiring.
.2
Install all covers for the raceways and fittings after the installation of the wiring, paint and
label accordingly.
.3
Install all supports, elbows, tees, connectors, fittings, bushings, adaptors as required and
as indicated.
.4
Keep the number of elbows, offsets and connections to a minimum.
.5
Use wiring with mechanical protection in channel raceways.
.6
Install barriers in raceways where different voltage systems are indicated.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16122
Page 1
February 13, 2013
WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
1.2
2
Submit product data in accordance with Electrical Specifications.
Standards
.1
Provide Type TECK 90 cables in accordance with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 131-07.
.2
All cables installed in areas requiring fire rating shall conform to FT-6 Rating.
.3
Aluminum cable will not be accepted.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Building Wires
.1
Conductors:
.1
.2
.3
.4
Copper conductors, of the size as indicated, having a minimum conductivity of
98 percent.
Stranded conductors for wires sizes No. 8 AWG and larger.
Conductors shall be minimum No. 12 AWG, size conductor for maximum 2%
voltage drop to the furthest outlet on a fully loaded branch circuit.
Conductors shall be minimum No.10 AWG for home runs to panels which
exceed 24 m.
.2
Insulation: RW90 is specified. RW90 cable shall have thermosetting polyethylene
insulation rated at a minimum of 600V.
.3
RWU90 cable to be provided for underground, underslab and outdoor application or any
area where the cable is exposed to moisture.
.4
Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
.3
2.2
Canada Wire and Cable Limited
Pirelli
Phillips Cables Limited
Type Teck 90 Cable
.1
Insulation:
.1
Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated at a minimum
of 600V, Type RW 90.
.2
Inner jacket: Polyvinyl chloride inner jacket.
.3
Armour: Interlocking aluminum armour.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16122
Page 2
February 13, 2013
WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V
.4
Overall jacket: Thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride LFS/LGE overall jacket for fire protection
and low acid gas evolution, meeting the requirements of the Vertical Tray Fire Test to
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 0.3 with a maximum flow travel of 48" (1200 mm.)
(Conform to FT4).
.5
Fastenings:
.1
.2
.3
.6
Connectors:
.1
.7
Watertight TECK connectors, T & B 10464 Series.
Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
.3
2.3
One (1) hole malleable iron straps to secure surface mounted cables.
12 gauge galvanized steel channel type supports for two (2) or more cables at 60"
(1500 mm) centres.
1/4" (6 mm) diameter threaded rods to support the suspended channels.
Canada Wire and Cable Limited
Pirelli
Phillips Cables Limited
Armoured Cables
.1
AC90 Cable:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.4
Conductors: Copper conductors, of the sizes as indicated, having a minimum
conductivity of 98%.
Insulation: Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated at a
minimum of 600 V.
Armour: Interlocking armour fabricated from aluminum strip.
Maximum length of AC90 shall be run 10’-0”.
Contractor to coordinate ground and neutral requirements to suit specified
requirements.
AC90 must meet specialty grounding requirements. If grounding requirements are
not met the contractor shall reconsider wiring requirements. Assumptions prior to
Bid Submission shall not be accepted.
Control Cables
.1
300V/600V control cable: Stranded annealed copper conductors sized as indicated, with
TWH thermoplastic insulation with a shielding of 100% coverage of aluminum polyester
tape and drain wire over each group and over all conductors and an overall jacket
of PVC.
.2
300V/600V cables shall conform to latest CSA standards CAN 3-C21.2 M86 and
supplements.
.3
Custom control cables shall be designed and assembled in the configurations as
indicated.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16122
Page 3
February 13, 2013
WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V
.4
Each conductor shall be black and number coded, pairs shall be black and white and
number coded.
.5
Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
.3
3
EXECUTION
3.1
General
.1
Install grounding, grounded and neutral conductors without any fuses, switches or
breakers of any kind unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Ground the grounded or neutral conductor at the source of supply as indicated and
isolate the grounded or neutral conductor at all other locations.
.3
Do not use any grounded or neutral conductors as a grounding conductor.
.4
Do not use any grounding conductor as a grounded or neutral conductor.
.5
Do not splice any wiring in any raceway. Make splices only at junction boxes.
.6
Provide sufficient slack at the connection points of conductors to permit proper
connections to be made.
.7
Do not install any conductors in any raceway until the raceway is complete and cleared of
all obstructions. Contractor shall blow all lines prior to installation.
.8
Install all conductors in any one (1) conduit at the same time taking care not to twist the
conductors.
.9
Use wire pulling lubricants that will not shorten the life of the insulation.
.10
Do not install any wires or cables at temperatures above or below those which will cause
damage to the wires or cables.
3.2
Installation of Building Wires
.1
Install wiring as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
3.3
Belden;
Pirelli;
Carol.
In conduit systems in accordance with Section 16132.
In cable-troughs in accordance with Section 16114 (if applicable).
In underground ducts in accordance with Section 16107 (if applicable).
In surface and lighting fixture raceways in accordance with Section 16112.
Installation of Teck 90 1000 V
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16122
Page 4
February 13, 2013
WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V
.1
Install cables as indicated.
.2
Group cables wherever possible on channels.
.3
Lay cable in cable-troughs in accordance with Section 16114 (if applicable).
.4
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.
3.4
Installation of Armoured Cable
.1
Group cables wherever possible.
.2
Lay cable in cable-troughs in accordance with Section 16114 (if applicable).
.3
Terminate cables in accordance with Section 16151.
.4
Coordinate neutral and grounding requirements.
3.5
Installation of Mineral Insulated Cable
.1
Install cable in trenches in accordance with Section 16106 (if applicable).
.2
Install cable exposed, as indicated securely supported by straps.
.3
Make cable terminations by using factory-made kits.
.4
At cable terminations use thermoplastic sleeving over bare conductors.
.5
Install cable in cable-troughs in accordance with Section 16114 (if applicable).
.6
Where cables are embedded in cast concrete or masonry, provide a sleeve for the entry
or exit of cables.
.7
Do not splice the cables.
.8
Provide cable to maintain protection of life safety circuits.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16122
Page 5
February 13, 2013
WIRES AND CABLES UP TO 1000V
3.6
Installation Of Control Cables
.1
Install control cables in conduit or in cable-troughs.
.2
Ground individual pair control cable shields at the supply and only unless otherwise
indicated.
.3
Ground the overall control cable shields at both ends.
.4
Reference Appendix for Division of Responsibility.
3.7
Installation Of Security Cables
.1
Install cables in accordance to Owner’s Standards.
.2
Refer to 16744 for additional requirements (if applicable).
3.8
Installation Of Communication Cable
.1
Install cables in accordance to Section 16740 and 16741.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Section 16131
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
Page 1
DSAI
February 13, 2013
Project 0812
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
1
GENERAL
1.1
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 16131
1.2
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
2
Submit shop drawings and product data for cabinets in accordance with conditions of
Contract.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Splitters
.1
Sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in
closed position.
.2
Mains, branch lugs, and connection bars to match required size and number of incoming
and outgoing conductors as indicated.
.3
Provide at least three (3) spare terminals on each set of lugs in all splitters.
.4
Splitter to be to CSA C22.2 No. 76.
2.2
Junction And Pull Boxes
.1
Welded steel construction with screw-on flat covers for surface mounting.
.2
Covers with 1" (25 mm) minimum extension all around, for flush-mounted pull and
junction boxes.
.3
Junction boxes and pull boxes to be to CSA C22.2 No. 40.
.4
NEMA rating to suit environment.
2.3
Cabinets
.1
Type E: sheet steel, hinged door and return flange overlapping sides, handle, lock and
catch, for surface mounting.
.2
Type T: sheet steel cabinet, with hinged door, latch, lock, two (2) keys, containing 3/4"
(19 mm) G1S fir plywood backboard (fire rated) for flush mounting in finished areas and
surface mounting in service and mechanical spaces.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Section 16131
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
Page 2
DSAI
February 13, 2013
Project 0812
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Splitter Installation
.1
Install splitters as indicated and mount plumb, true and square to the building lines.
.2
Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.
.3
All splitters shall be mounted on fire rated plywood.
3.2
Junction, Pull Boxes And Cabinets Installation
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations.
.2
Mount cabinets with top not higher than 80" (2000 mm) above finished floor.
.3
Install terminal block as required in Type T cabinets.
.4
Drawings do not show all junction and pull boxes. Those shown are diagrammatic only.
Provide junction boxes and pull boxes as required by Code. Install pull boxes so as not to
exceed 98'-5" (30 m) of conduit run between pull boxes.
3.3
Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Electrical Specification.
.2
Install Size 3 identification labels indicating system name and voltage and phase.
Refer Nameplates Specification section.
.3
Label/paint boxes as per specifications.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
1
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
2
Section 16132
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Electrical Specification.
.2
Refer to Structural and Architectural Documents.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Outlet And Conduit Boxes General
.1
All boxes shall have pre-punched 3/4" (19 mm) knockouts.
.2
Do not use boxes with cable clamps.
.3
Provide 4" (100 mm) square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.
.4
Provide gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.5
Provide deep masonry boxes (MBS Series) for data communications outlets in dry wall
partitions, complete with the required support brackets and clips.
.6
Provide 347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices. Do not gang.
.7
Provide combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one (1) system are
grouped. Combination boxes shall be multi-ganged shallow masonry box (MBS Series),
complete with barrier and the required support brackets and clips.
.8
Outlet boxes, conduit boxes and fittings to be to CSA C22.2 No. 18.
.9
Provide blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices and label as “Future” Interior
of box shall note the respective system by paint and label on the interior and on the
coverplate.
2.2
Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes
.1
Provide single and multigang electro-galvanized steel flush device boxes as required for
flush installation, minimum size 3" x 2" x 1-1/2" (76 mm x 50 mm x 38 mm) or as required.
Provide 4" (100 mm) GSB Series outlet boxes when more than one (1) conduit enters one
(1) side. Add extension and plaster rings as required.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Section 16132
Page 2
February 13, 2013
.2
Provide 4" (100 mm) square or octagonal outlet boxes for luminaire outlets.
.3
Provide 4" (100 mm) square outlet boxes with extension and plaster rings for flush
mounted devices to suit wall finish, as required.
2.3
Masonry Boxes
.1
Provide single and multigang electro-galvanized steel masonry boxes as required for
devices flush mounted in concrete block walls.
.2
Electrical Contractor shall confirm prior to installation with Prime Consultant where
box and coverplate meet with mortar joints.
2.4
Concrete Boxes
.1
2.5
Provide deep cast iron concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching
extension and plaster rings as required. Boxes to be installed in concrete shall be
approved for this purpose. Refer to Section 16141.
Conduit Boxes
.1
2.6
Provide cast FS or FD aluminum boxes with factory- threaded hubs and mounting feet for
the surface wiring of switches and receptacles as required.
PVC Boxes
.1
2.7
All PVC boxes to have approved ground straps and shall be compatible with PVC
conduit used.
Floor Boxes (if applicable)
.1
Provide deep cast iron floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit the available depth
of concrete pour. Provide device mounting plates to accommodate receptacle and
communications outlets. Coordinate receptacle type with Section 16141. Coordinate
Data/Tel outlet with Owner.
.2
Provide floor boxes with performed conduit hubs suitable for conduit sizes of 3/4” (19 mm)
to 1” (25 mm) conduit.
.3
Boxes shall be supplied with necessary adjusting rings, divers plates and cover plates for
a complete installation.
.4
Boxes shall be Hubbel B24 or B42 Series. Refer to Section 16141.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Page 3
February 13, 2013
.5
Provide trim on floor boxes which are suitable to interface to floor finish. Coordinate with
Architectural documents.
.6
Coverplates shall be brass. SB3 Series.
.7
Coverplates shall be supplied with gasket covers to protect openings from dirt and debris
from entering unused openings.
2.8
3
Section 16132
Fittings - General
.1
Provide bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
.2
Provide knock-out fillers to close unused knock-outs.
.3
Provide conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 1-1/4" (32 mm) and pull boxes for
larger conduits.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Support all boxes independently of the connecting conduits. All boxes to be hung
independently of ducts, pipes, etc.
.2
Fill boxes with sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent the entry of foreign
material during construction.
.3
For flush wall installations, mount the outlet boxes flush with the finished walls using
plaster rings to permit the wall finish to come within 0.24" (6 mm) of opening. Coordinate
with Architectural drawings for wall construction and provide extender ring (s) to suit.
.4
Provide the correct size of openings in the boxes for the conduit, and armoured cable
connections. Reducing washers are not permitted.
.5
When using rigid PVC conduit, use approved boxes.
.6
For boxes mounted with in split-face block walls, the electrical contractor shall carry the
cost of The Mason Contractor to grind the block so as the box and coverplate sit flush.
Both contractors shall provide a mock-up for the Prime Consultant for review prior to
installation.
.7
All flush floor boxes shall be vacuumed and blown free of debris. Contractor shall provide
photographs of execution of task for Owner’s Records.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 1
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
Wiring and Cables up to 1000 V.
.2
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.3
General Provisions.
1.2
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
1.3
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Electrical Specifications.
Wiring Device Colours And Styles
.1
Division 16 Contractor shall submit a sample board of all combinations noted below for
review by the Architect and Owner prior to shop drawing submission.
.2
Provide wiring devices and coverplates colour combinations for this project as follows:
.1
All receptacles mounted in white painted type walls only to be white rectangular
face type and white rectangular rocker type switches complete with white
coverplate.
.2
All receptacles mounted in other painted walls to be grey rectangular face type
receptacles and grey rectangular rocker type switches complete stainless steel
coverplate.
.3
Standard white face receptacles and white toggle switches complete stainless
steel coverplate for service rooms, Electrical, Mechanical Rooms, Janitor Closets.
.4
Outdoor Areas: Standard grey face receptacles complete with gasketted hinged
weatherproof coverplate.
.5
Orange rectangular face type receptacle complete with stainless steel coverplates
on UPS circuits.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 2
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Switches
.1
Provide specification grade, line voltage light switches of the toggle type with the yoke
insulated from the silent operating mechanism. Provide large and well recessed binding
screws, suitable for No. 10 AWG wire, for easy wiring and with the operating mechanism
totally enclosed in a strong phenolic colour coded (with respect to current rating) housing.
Provide silver alloy contacts and use urea or melamine for those housing parts subject to
carbon tracking.
.2
Provide 20A, 120-277 V standard switches as indicated below in service areas:
.3
.4
.5
.1
Single-pole: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. CSB20AC1;
.2
Double-pole: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. CSB20AC2;
.3
3-way: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. CSB20AC3;
.4
4-way: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. CSB20AC4.
Provide 20A, 347V standard switches as indicated below in service areas:
.1
Single-pole: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. PS372010;
.2
3-way: Pass & Seymour Cat. No. PS372030.
Provide rectangular face type 20A, 120V switches as indicated below:
.1
Single pole: Pass & Seymour Series # 2621;
.2
3-way: Pass & Seymour Series # 2623;
.3
4-ways: Pass & Seymour Series # 2624.
Provide rectangular face type 20A, 347V switches as indicated below:
.1
Single pole: Pass & Seymour Series # 2621347;
.2
3-way: Pass & Seymour Series # 2623347;
.3
4-way: Pass & Seymour Series # 2624347.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 3
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
2.2
Receptacles
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Provide rectangular face specification grade duplex receptacles, CSA configuration
15R, 125V, 15A, U ground with the following features.
.1
Nylon moulded housing; colour as noted;
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG wire for back or side wiring;
.3
Break-off links for use as split receptacles;
.4
Pass & Seymour Series No. 26252.
5-
Provide rectangular face specification grade duplex receptacles, CSA configuration
5-20R (T-type) 125V, 15/20A, U ground with the following features:
.1
Nylon moulded housing; colour as noted.
.2
Suitable for No. 10 AWG wire for back or side wiring.
.3
Pass & Seymour Series No. 26352.
Provide ground fault circuit interrupting duplex receptacles, CSA configuration 5-15R,
125 V, 15 A, U ground with the following features:
.1
White nylon moulded housing;
.2
Pass & Seymour Series No. 1595.
Provide single straight blade receptacle CSA configuration 14-50R, 50A 125/250V
3-pole, 4-wire grounding with the following features:
.1
flush receptacle with black nylon face;:
.2
Pass & Seymour Series No. 3894.
Provide a single straight blade receptacle CSA configuration 14-30R, 30A 125/250V
3-pole 4-wire grounding with the following features:
.1
flush receptacle with black nylon face;
.2
Pass & Seymour Series No. 3864.
Provide a single straight blade receptacle CSA configuration 6-15R, 15A, 250V, 2-pole,
3-wire grounding with the following features:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Flush receptacle with black nylon face.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 4
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
.2
.7
Provide other outlets shown on drawings as required.
.8
Installation Provide cover plates for all wiring devices.
.9
Provide galvanized sheet steel utility box covers for wiring devices installed in
surface-mounted utility boxes.
.10
Provide vertically brushed stainless steel, cover plates 0.04" (1 mm) thick for wiring
devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet boxes.
.11
Provide sheet metal cover plates for wiring devices mounted in surface-mounted FS or
FD type conduit boxes.
.12
Provide weatherproof, double lift, spring-loaded, cast aluminum cover plates, complete
with gaskets for duplex receptacles as indicated.
.13
Provide vertically brushed stainless steel coverplate (blank) for future outlet. Provide
accessories to adapt to this requirement.
2.3
Identification
.1
3
Pass & Seymour Series No. 5671.
Provide Nameplates Indicate Panel, Circuit Number, Functions, etc. for each outlet and
switch as noted in Electrical Specification, and/or to suit Owner’s Standards.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
.2
Switches:
.1
Install single throw switches with the handle in the "UP" position when the switch is
closed.
.2
Install switches in ganged outlet boxes when more than one (1) switch is required
in one (1) location with the exception of dimmers.
.3
Mount toggle switches with the long dimension vertically at the height specified
unless otherwise indicated.
Receptacles:
.1
Install receptacles in ganged outlet boxes when more than one (1) receptacle is
required in one (1) location.
.2
Mount receptacles with the long dimension vertically at the height specified unless
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 5
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
otherwise indicated.
.3
.3
Where a split receptacle has one (1) portion switched, mount the long dimension
vertically and switch the upper portion.
Coverplates:
.1
Protect the stainless steel coverplate finish with paper or plastic film until the
painting and other work is finished.
.2
Install suitable common coverplates where wiring devices are grouped.
.3
Do not use coverplates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes.
.4
Install blank coverplates on all device outlet boxes for future systems.
.5
Refer to specifications for identification requirements.
.6
Provide brushed stainless steel coverplates throughout. Unless noted.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16141
Page 6
February 13, 2013
WIRING DEVICES
3.2
Commissioning
.1
3.3
Provide commissioning as per Electrical Specifications and Contract Documents.
Manufacturers
.1
Provide wiring devices and coverplates of one (1) manufacturer.
.2
Pass & Seymour Catalogue numbers are shown and indicate the quality of the wiring
devices and cover plates required. Equivalent wiring devices and cover plates of the
manufacturers listed below may be use. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
Pass and Seymour.
.2
Hubbell Canada Inc.
.3
Leviton
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16146
Page 1
February 13, 2013
MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
1
GENERAL
1.1
2
Product Data
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Electrical Specification.
.2
Indicate the type of multi-outlet assemblies with similar terminology to these documents.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Raceway For Wiring Devices
.1
2.2
Raceway Type 1 – Indoor:
.1
Wiremold 5400 Series.
.2
Provide a two (2) channel assembly manufactured for the mounting of wiring
devices and associated wiring with the cross-section dimensions as indicated.
.3
Provide a colour finish to suit the Architect. Specialty colour costs shall be carried
in bid.
.4
Raceway shall be 5-1/4” (133mm) wide by 1-3/4" (44 mm) deep.
.5
Provide device brackets for mounting standard devices.
.6
Provide internal barriers to separate normal power and communications wiring.
.7
Allow for fittings around columns and corners.
Wiring Devices
.1
2.3
Provide wiring devices in accordance with Section 16141 and Telecommunications
Requirements.
Grounding
.1
2.4
Ground the system through a separate insulated conductor.
Fittings
.1
Provide elbows, tees, couplings and hanger fittings support brackets supplied and shall be
compatible with the manufacturer’s multi-outlet assembly.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16146
Page 2
February 13, 2013
MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES
2.5
Manufacturers
.1
3
Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
Wiremold.
.2
Panduit
EXECUTION
3.1
Fittings
.1
Install all supports, elbows, tees, connectors and fittings.
.2
Keep the number of elbows, offsets and connections to a minimum.
.3
Install barriers where required.
.4
Refer to both architectural and electrical drawings for associated details. Contractor shall
ensure that the manufacturer has obtained all drawings prior to his Bid Submission.
Drawings shall be provided by Contractor.
3.2
Wiring
.1
Install the wiring as indicated.
.2
Manufacturer shall adhere to wiring and telecommunication requirements as specified and
shall be responsible to request all associated specification sections prior to Bid
submission.
.3
Contractor shall ensure manufacturer has reviewed all associated Specifications and
drawings.
3.3
On-Site
.1
Manufacturer shall visit the prior to fabrication and verify field dimension.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS UP TO 1000V
1
Nil
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Provide pressure type wire connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit
copper conductors as required.
.2
Provide fixture type splicing connectors with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit
copper conductors No. 10 AWG or less.
.3
Provide bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2-1961 to consist of:
.4
3
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
2
Section 16151
.1
A connector body and a stud clamp for stranded copper conductors.
.2
A clamp for stranded copper conductors
.3
Stud clamp bolts as required.
.4
Bolts for the copper conductors.
.5
Sized for the conductors as indicated.
Provide clamps or connectors for the armoured cable, flexible conduit, as required.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Remove the insulation carefully from the ends of the conductors and:
.1
apply a coat of zinc joint compound on the aluminum conductors prior to the
installation of the connectors;
.2
install the mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten the screws with an
appropriate compression tool recommended by the manufacturer. The installation
must meet the secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 65;
.3
install the bushing stud connectors in accordance with EEMAC 1Y-2.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16191
Page 1
February 13, 2013
FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
2
Electrical Specifications in its entirety.
PRODUCT
2.1
Support Channels
.1
U-shaped, steel channel, accurately cold rolled formed from 12 gauge, low carbon steel
with finished dimensions of 1-5/8" x 1-5/8" (3.1 mm x 3.1 mm), inturned clamping ridges
and a continuous slot along one (1) side for the insection of slotted nuts. Hot dip
galvanize the channel after fabrication with a zinc weight of 1.5 oz/ft sq.
.2
Nuts with 2 serrated grooves to engage the clamping ridges of the channel, a spring to
hold the nut in place during installation and threaded with Unified and American course
threads. Case harden and electrogalvanize after fabrication.
.3
Electrogalvanized bolts, threaded rod, flat and lockwashers as required.
.4
Angle, U, Z and special fittings, brackets, bases, clamps, hangers, couplings and other
fittings as required and galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
.5
Provide channel and fittings of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.6
2.2
.1
Unistrut of Canada Ltd;
.2
Burndy Canada Ltd.;
.3
Electrovert Ltd.;
All support channel supports are to be safe and installed to prevent injury. Including
support screws.
Concrete Anchors
.1
Drilled expansion anchors for anchors set in concrete block or poured concrete after the
concrete has set. Size the insert and number of anchors so that the maximum load per
anchor does not exceed 25% of the manufacturer's published maximum loading.
.2
Provide concrete anchors of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Hilti Canada Ltd.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16191
Page 2
February 13, 2013
FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
.3
3
U-channel concrete inserts shall be 12 gauge steel 1-5/8 in. square with insert anchors 1
3/8 in. long and 4 in. on centre. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
Unistrut
.2
Electrovert Limited;
.3
Burndy Canada Ltd.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Secure equipment to masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchor, drive pin
anchors are not permitted.
.2
Secure equipment and concrete inserts to poured concrete with expansion anchors.
.3
Secure equipment to suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.
.4
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps
designed as accessories to the basic channel members.
.5
Fasten exposed conduit or cables to the building construction or support system using
straps:
.6
.1
1-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 2" (50 mm) and smaller;
.2
2-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 2" (50 mm);
.3
beam clamps to secure the conduit to the exposed steel work.
Suspended Support Systems:
.1
Support individual cable or conduit runs with 0.24" (6 mm) diameter threaded rods
and spring clips.
.2
Support two (2) or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 0.24" (6 mm)
diameter threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to the building construction
is impractical.
.7
Use channels at a maximum 3m centres for surface mounting of two (2) or more
conduits.
.8
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures
where indicated or as required to support the conduit and cable runs.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16191
Page 3
February 13, 2013
FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
.9
Provide adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment
where there is no wall support.
.10
Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.11
Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support
except with the permission of other trade and the approval of Consultant.
.12
Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and
conduits, and in accordance with the manufacturer's installation recommendations.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Section 16440
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
Page 1
DSAI
February 13, 2013
Project 0812
FUSED AND NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES UP TO 1000V
1
GENERAL
1.1
Product Data
.1
1.2
Submit product data in accordance with Electrical Specifications.
Standards
.1
Design, manufacture and test all disconnect switches in accordance with good industry
practice and in accordance with the following Standards and Codes:
.1
.2
2
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 4 - Enclosed switches;
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 39 - Fuseholder assemblies.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Disconnect Switches
.1
Provide fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches in CSA Enclosure to suit the
environment where the switch is located. This means sprinkler proof enclosures inside
building and outdoor type enclosures for disconnect switches.
.2
Provide the provision for padlocking the switch in the "ON" and "OFF" switch position by
up to three (3) locks.
.3
Mechanically interlock the door with a voidable interlock to prevent the door opening when
the switch handle is in the "ON" position.
.4
Provide fuses as indicated in accordance with Section 16478.
.5
Provide fuseholders, suitable without adaptors, for the size of the fuses as indicated.
.6
Provide a Type A quick-make, quick-break switching action with arc chutes or arc snuffers.
.7
Provide a vertically moving handle with an "ON-OFF" switch position indication on the
switch enclosure cover with the "ON" position being the upper handle position.
.8
Provide solderless neutral terminals where indicated.
2.2
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide an equipment identification nameplate in accordance with
Electrical Specifications.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Section 16440
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
Page 2
DSAI
February 13, 2013
Project 0812
FUSED AND NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES UP TO 1000V
2.3
Manufacturers
.1
Provide disconnect switches which are the product of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable
manufacturers are:
.1
.2
3
Schneider Canada;
Cutler-Hammer Canada Inc.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the disconnect switches, complete with fuses, as indicated and required.
.2
Provide nameplates for all disconnects.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16450
Page 1
February 13, 2013
SECONDARY GROUNDING
1
GENERAL
1.1
Standards
.1
Provide the grounding in accordance with good industry practice and in accordance with
the following Standards:
.1
.2
2
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 41 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
Local authority having jurisdiction and ESA.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Material
.1
Provide grounding clamps for grounding conductors, of the sizes as required, on all
electrically conductive underground water pipes, T & B 3902 series.
.2
Provide systems circuit grounding conductors and equipment grounding conductors of
bare stranded copper, soft annealed, of the sizes as indicated.
.3
Provide a green RW90 insulated grounding conductors of the sizes as indicated. UPS
grounding conductor shall be green with a yellow line the full length of the conductor. The
conductor shall be RW90/RWU90 size as noted and to meet or exceed ESA code.
.4
Provide copper ground bus 0.24" x 2" (6 mm x 50 mm) complete with insulated supports,
fastenings and connectors. Length and routing of ground bus shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
.5
Provide all non-corroding accessories necessary for the grounding system of the type, size
and material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Grounding and bonding bushings;
Protective type clamps;
Bolted type conductor connectors;
Thermit welded type conductor connectors;
Bonding jumpers and straps;
Compression wire connectors.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16450
Page 2
February 13, 2013
SECONDARY GROUNDING
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation General
.1
Install a complete, permanent and continuous systems circuit grounding system and an
equipment grounding system including electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories as
indicated to conform to the requirements of these specifications and the local authority
having jurisdiction over the installation.
.2
Install the connectors in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
.3
Protect all exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.
.4
Extend and utilize existing grounding system.
.5
Use compression connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs.
.6
Soldered joints are not permitted.
.7
Install an insulated bonding conductor inside each flexible conduit, flexible liquidtight
conduit and conduit run with an expansion joint with the conductor connected at both ends
to grounding. Provide RWU90 and RW90 types to suit conduit.
.8
Install flexible ground straps, where such bonding is not inherently provided with
equipment, for the following:
.1
.2
.9
Install a separate grounding conductor in the following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.2
Cabletrough joints; cable tray and raceways.
Cabletrough expansion joints.
All EMT conduit runs;
All PVC conduit runs;
All underground or underslab runs;
All direct buried runs.
Provide tracer wire prior to backfilling #10 std. White.
.10
Connect the building structural steel and metal siding to ground.
.11
Make the grounding connections in a radial configuration only with the connections
terminating at a single grounding point at the street side of the water meter. Do not make
loop connections except as indicated.
.12
Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to the cabinet at the supply end, and
provide a non-magnetic entry plate at the load end and at the load end.
.13
Provide a grounding system with a maximum resistance to ground of 5 ohms.
System And Circuit Grounding
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16450
Page 3
February 13, 2013
SECONDARY GROUNDING
.1
3.3
Install system and circuit grounding connections to the neutral of the primary 600V system,
secondary 120/208V system.
Equipment Grounding
.1
Install grounding connections from the exposed, non- current carrying metal parts of
equipment included in but not necessarily limited to following:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
3.4
Service equipment;
Transformers;
Duct systems;
Frames of motors;
Motor control centres;
Starters;
Control panels;
Distribution panels;
Water piping.
Door frames where indicated.
Grounding Bus
.1
Install a copper grounding on the walls of the Electrical Room per ESA.
.2
Ground all items of electrical equipment in the electrical room to the ground bus with
individual No. 3/0 AWG bare stranded copper connections unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
Communication Systems
.1
3.6
Install grounding connections for life safety and all other systems, minimum #6 insulated
ground wires.
Grounding Data/Voice Communication:
.1
The grounding and bonding approach recommended in this specification shall meet the
requirements of CSA T527 and is intended to work in concert with the cabling topology as
specified in this document and installed in accordance with CSA T530 (telecommunication
pathways and spaces standard).
.2
This telecommunications grounding and bonding infrastructure supports a multi-vendor,
multi-product environment as well as the grounding practices for various systems that may
be installed on customer premises.
.3
The telecommunications system ground shall be tied into the building/electrical ground.
.4
Grounding to the conduit system or cold water pipes will not be permitted.
.5
The grounding and bonding of the telecommunications system shall meet all local,
provincial and national codes and bylaws and match existing.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16450
Page 4
February 13, 2013
SECONDARY GROUNDING
.6
The grounding and bonding of the telecommunications system shall meet BICSI
requirements for grounding and bonding.
.7
Ground racks and cabinets to the telecommunications grounding system using individual
green insulated stranded cooper ground wires.
.8
Ensure that metal-to-metal contact is made when grounding to paint or power coated
surfaces.
.9
All racks and cabinet grounding should be located at the bottom of the rack or cabinet.
.10
Ground the metallic sheath of all backbone cables using the appropriate manufacturer’s
bond clamp for the specified size of cable and a green #6 ground wire.
.11
Provide one (1) insulated ground wire from main electrical room ground bus to each bus
bar in communication rooms.
.12
Provide one (1) insulated ground wire from main electrical room ground bus to BELL
equipment.
3.7
Grounding Of Audio/Visual System (If Applicable):
.1
3.8
Provide one (1) #6 insulated ground wire from main electrical room ground bus to each
Audio/Visual closet(s)
Grounding Of Security System (if Applicable):
.1
3.9
Provide one (1) #6 insulated ground wire from the main electrical room ground bus to each
group of security panels/transponders.
Grounding Of Cable TV System (if Applicable):
.1
Provide one (1) #6 insulated ground wire from the main electrical room ground to cable TV
cabinet in main level communication room.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16471
Page 1
February 13, 2013
BREAKER TYPE PANELBOARDS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
Section 16103: Plywood Backboards.
.2
Section 16104: Nameplates.
.3
Section 16485: Contactors.
.4
Appendix B.
1.2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit and prepare shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010, 16020 and Division
0 Documents.
.2
Drawings must include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.3
Electrical details of the panelboards;
Branch breaker type and interrupting capacity;
Branch breaker quantity (including addenda);
Mains ampacity, voltage and number of poles and wires;
Surface or recessed mounting;
Main breaker and lugs description;
Enclosure dimensions;
Nameplate description and lettering (Including Section 16104).
Installation instruction.
Plant Assembly
.1
Install the circuit breakers in the panelboards before shipment.
.2
In addition to CSA requirements, the manufacturer's nameplate must show the fault
current that the panelboard including the breakers, has been built to withstand.
.3
If additional breakers are added during construction, the consultant reserves the right to
have the manufacturer review the installation.
.4
All panelboards shall have two complete nameplates with ratings, one inside and
one outside.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16471
Page 2
February 13, 2013
BREAKER TYPE PANELBOARDS
1.4
Standards
.1
Design, manufacture and test the panelboards in accordance with good industry practice
and the following Standards and Codes:
.1
.2
2
CSA Standard C22.1-Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1;
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29 - Panelboards and Panelboard Enclosures.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Panelboards
.1
All the panelboards must be the product of one (1) manufacturer.
.2
For 250 V panelboards, the bus, the main breaker and the branch breakers must be rated
for a minimum of 14000 A (symmetrical) interrupting capacity except as otherwise
indicated.
.3
For 600 V panelboards, the bus, the main breaker and the branch breakers must be rated
for a minimum of 22000 A (symmetrical) interrupting capacity except as otherwise
indicated.
.4
Sequence the phase bussing with the odd numbered breakers on the left and the even
numbered breakers on the right, with each breaker being identified by a permanent
number identification as to the circuit number and phase.
.5
Provide the panelboards with the mains ratings, the number of circuits, and the number
and size of the branch circuit breakers as indicated.
.6
Provide three (3) keys for each panelboard provided with a door and key all panelboards
alike. Contractor shall confirm in writing the Owner’s forces are in receipt.
.7
Provide a copper main bus of the voltage and ampere ratings as indicated.
.8
Provide a copper 200% rated neutral bus of the same ampere rating as the mains for all
250V boards.
.9
Provide bolt-on branch breakers.
.10
Hot dip galvanize the panelboard tubs after fabrication or acid etch, prime and apply two
(2) finish coats of air dried ASA 61 or ASA 49 grey enamel to the panelboard tubs unless
noted.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16471
Page 3
February 13, 2013
BREAKER TYPE PANELBOARDS
.11
Acid etch, prime and apply two (2) finish coats of air dried ASA 61 or ASA 49 grey enamel
to the panelboard trims and doors except as otherwise indicated.
.12
Provide doors with concealed hinges, locks and hardware for all panelboards including
main breakers and distribution panelboards unless otherwise indicated. For recessed
panelboards, provide chrome plated hardware where exposed.
2.2
Special Features
.1
Provide double section panelboards as indicated or as required. Wall depth dimension
shall be submitted and coordinated with Architect.
.2
Provide a Class A, Group 1, GFCI, 5 mA ground fault protection on those branch breakers
as indicated.
.3
Provide a 0.24" (6 mm) thick, laminated phenolic, cable entrance plate as indicated.
.4
Provide sprinklerproof shields on all surface mounted panelboards.
.5
Panelboards on UPS power shall be finished with Sherwin Williams No. F65E37
International Orange. Provide sample chip prior to equipment fabrication.
.6
Provide a contactor on the panel mains as indicated.
.7
Provide double lugs neutral for all panels and where double neutral feeders are shown.
.8
Provide power on pilot light indicator (green) and emergency shut off push button and
reset key switch as indicated. Provide parallel remote push button where indicated.
.9
Provide isolated and technical ground bus for all audio/visual panels identified as “AV” or
noted on drawings.
.10
Provide maximum height (92”) for all distribution type panel boards unless otherwise
noted.
2.3
Breakers
.1
Provide bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker, quick-make, quick-break type, for manual
and automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40o ambient as indicated.
.2
Provide multi-pole breakers with a common-trip device and a single handle.
.3
Provide a separately mounted main breaker, where indicated, at the top or the bottom of
the panelboard to suit the cable entry. When mounted vertically, the handle "DOWN"
position should be the "OPEN" position.
.4
Provide padlocking devices on all circuit breakers to lock the handle of a breaker in the
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16471
Page 4
February 13, 2013
BREAKER TYPE PANELBOARDS
"ON" or "OFF" position with the trip units to remain free to function and protect the circuit
from both overload and short circuit conditions.
.5
Provide lock-on devices for branch breakers controlling fire alarm, clock outlet, emergency,
door supervisory, intercom, stairway, exit, shunt trip and night light circuits and as
indicated.
.6
Provide moulded case circuit breakers to operate automatically by means of thermal and
magnetic tripping devices to provide an inverse time vs current tripping characteristic.
.7
Where a 15A or 20A circuit breaker at 347V and less is used as the only switching device
for luminaires, the circuit breaker shall be suitable for switching duty and shall be marked
"SWD".
2.4
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide a Size 3 nameplate for each panelboard engraved as per Section 16104.
.2
Provide a Size 2 nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards engraved as per
Section 16104. Provide a complete typewritten circuit directory with a clear plastic cover
showing the location and load of each circuit for all other panelboards.
2.5
Spare Breakers
.1
Provide five (5) spare breakers in addition to those noted on the Panel Schedules for each
size of breaker.
.2
Provide a cabinet to house all breakers and locate it in the Electrical Room. Location to be
confirmed by the Owner.
2.6
Manufacturers
.1
Acceptable panelboard manufacturers are:
.1
.2
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Schneider Electric;
Cutler-Hammer Canada;
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16471
Page 5
February 13, 2013
BREAKER TYPE PANELBOARDS
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Locate the panelboards as indicated and mount them securely, plumb, true and square, to
the adjoining surfaces.
.2
Install the surface mounted panelboards on fire rated plywood backboards. Where
practical, group panelboards, and other electrical equipment if present, on common
backboard.
.3
Mount the panelboards 60" (1500 mm) above the finished floor level to the panelboard
centreline unless otherwise indicated. Where two (2) or more different size panelboards
are installed adjacent to each other, align the tops of the panelboards to suit the tallest
panelboard.
.4
Connect the loads to the branch breakers as indicated.
.5
Connect the neutral conductors to the common neutral bus.
.6
Connect the isolated ground conductors to the isolated ground bus if provided.
.7
Connect the main feeder to the main lugs or to the main breaker and to the neutral bus
and the isolated ground bus if provided.
.8
Padlocking devices shall be factory installed on all circuit breakers.
.9
Provide two (2) spare 2” empty conduits for recessed panels for future renovations.
Terminate in corridor ceiling space.
3.2
Commissioning
.1
Provide commissioning as per the contract Documents.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16477
Page 1
February 13, 2013
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Standards
.1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 144: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
.2
CSA C22.2 No. 5: Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Moulded-Case Switches and Circuit
Breaker Enclosures
.3
CSA C22.1(Latest) -Canadian Electrical Code
.4
UL 489- Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker
Enclosures
.5
ANSI C37.17 (latest) American National Standard for trip devices for AC and general
purpose DC low voltage power circuit breakers
.6
NEMA-AB1-1993 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Moulded Case Switches
.7
ANSI C37.50 American National Standard for Switchgear – test procedures for low voltage
AC power circuit breakers used in enclosures
.8
IEEE Standard 1015- Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
.9
NETA–ATS -2005 Acceptance Testing Standard Electrical Distribution Equipment and
Systems.
.10
Ontario Electrical Safety Code and associated supplements.
.11
System Coordination and Short Circuit Study.
1.2
Product Documentation
.1
Submit and prepare shop drawings in accordance with the Electrical Specifications. They
shall include details such as dimensions, clearances required, cable entries, tabulation of
all devices including tags, wiring diagrams (power ,signals, control wiring). The notes will
identify field wiring and factory installed wiring)
.2
Include time-current characteristic curves for breakers with ampacity of 150A and over. In
some cases due to critical nature of the equipment smaller size breaker may have to be
verified for Time Current Coordination as well.
.3
Fabrication must suit coordination study.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16477
Page 2
February 13, 2013
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Breakers General
.1
Provide molded case circuit breaker, quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and
automatic operation with temperature compensation for 40 degrees C ambient as
indicated.
.2
The purpose of selecting right type of circuit breaker is to comply with Section 16479. It is
the responsibility of the supplier to ensure that a necessary study is carried out or
professional judgment is sought before offering the breakers. This includes inrush from
number of transformers that can be energized by single breaker.
.3
Provide multi-pole breakers with a common-trip device and a single handle.
.4
Provide magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers, to operate only when the
value of the current reaches the setting, as indicated. For breakers with adjustable trips,
provide a trip range of 3 to 10 times the rated current or as indicated.
.5
Provide circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.
.6
Provide pad locking devices on all breakers to lock the handle of a breaker in the "on" or
"off" position with the trip units to remain free to function and protect the circuit from both
overload and short circuit conditions.
2.2
Thermal Magnetic Breakers (TMB) ( A )
.1
2.3
Provide molded case circuit breakers to operate automatically by means of thermal and
magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping characteristic.
Solid State Trip Breakers Design –(LSI ,LSIG As Indicated) ( D )
.1
Provide molded case circuit breakers to operate by means of a solid-state trip unit with
associated current monitors and self-powered shunt trip devices to provide an inverse time
vs current trip characteristic under overload conditions, and long time short time
instantaneous tripping for phase ground fault short circuit protection. The trip unit shall be
fully adjustable current and time characteristics. All breakers 400 A above shall be solid
state type (LSIG).
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16477
Page 3
February 13, 2013
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.4
Optional Features
.1
Provide shunt trip devices, with 120 V AC coils as indicated, to provide remote tripping on
breakers 600A and up.
.2
Provide closing coils, with 120 V AC coils as indicated, to provide remote/automatic
closing where indicated.
.3
Provide auxiliary switches, rated at 5 A and 120 V as indicated, to operate remote devices
where indicated. Circuit breakers rated 800A or larger shall have contacts rated 10A
at 240V.
.4
Provide motor operated mechanisms, with 120 V motors as indicated, to provide remote
operation where indicated. This will be provided with electrical closing mechanism.
.5
Provide NEMA and UL rated enclosures for individual breakers as required.
2.5
Manufacturers
.1
Provide circuit breakers of one manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
3
Schneider Electric;
Cutler-Hammer Canada;
EXECUTION
3.1
Examination
.1
3.2
Examine the circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after satisfactory
compliance.
Installation
.1
Circuit breakers in panelboards shall be factory installed.
.2
Install individual breakers where indicated
3.3
Identification
.1
Identify all field installed conductors, wiring and components; provide warning signs as
required by manufacturer and also CEC. Install engraved nameplates and lamacoid
nameplates on enclosures.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16477
Page 4
February 13, 2013
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3.4
Connection
.1
3.5
Install grounding connections, power wiring and indication devices. Verify the torque
recommended by manufacturer.
Tests
.1
Test for continuity of phase and ground connections and insulation resistance (Megger) for
each phase to phase and phase to ground.
.2
Verify all acceptance tests as per NETA test procedure.
.3
Any malfunctioning of the units shall be corrected and retested to demonstrate
compliance.
3.6
Commissioning / Submittals
.1
Field test reports: Include the test procedures and instruments used. Record test results
for formal submission to consultant and owner for information.
.2
Final maintenance manual shall include all the routine maintenance requirements and
complete information about each circuit breaker settings.
.3
Provide in accordance to Commissioning Agent’s Requirements.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16478
Page 1
February 13, 2013
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
1.2
Submit the characteristics for each fuse type and size including the average melting time
versus current curve, (i*i)t (for fuse coordination), and peak let-through current.
Maintenance Materials
.1
Provide two (2) spare fuses of each type and size installed above 600 A.
.2
Provide two (2) spare fuses of each type and size installed up to and including 600 A.
.3
Provide a wall mounted cabinet in the main electrical room to house the spare fuses.
1.3
Delivery And Storage
.1
Ship the fuses in their original containers.
.2
Do not ship any fuses installed in equipment.
1.4
Standards
.1
Design, manufacture and test all fuses in accordance with good industry practice and in
accordance with the following Standard:
.1
2
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 106-M1985: HRC Fuses.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Fuses General
.1
Provide only HRC fuses having an interrupting rating of 200,000. A symmetrical and a
voltage rating of 600 V, unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Special equipment such as VFDs (variable frequency drives) require protection as per
manufacturer recommendations. This should be followed based on formal documents from
manufacturer.
.3
Time delay fuses must carry 500% of their rated current for a minimum of 10 s and be
marked "Time Delay".
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16478
Page 2
February 13, 2013
LOW VOLTAGE FUSES
2.2
Fuse Types
.1
Provide CSA designation HRCI-J fuses for lighting and general loads without inrush, 600 A
and lower.
.2
Provide CSA designation HRCI-J Time Delay fuses for motors, transformers and other
loads with an inrush, 600 A and lower.
.3
Provide CSA designation HRC-L fuses for lighting and general loads without an inrush
above 600 A.
.4
Provide CSA designation HRC-L Time Delay fuses for motors, transformers and other
loads above 600 A with an inrush.
.5
CSA designation HRCI-JY fuses are not permitted.
2.3
Fuse Storage Cabinet
.1
2.4
Provide a steel fuse storage cabinet 30" (750 mm) high, 24" (600 mm) wide, 12" (300 mm)
deep with a hinged, lockable front access door. Location to be confirmed by Owner.
Manufacturers
.1
Provide fuses of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
3
Gould Shawmut Company;
Bussmann Division of McGraw-Edison Company.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the fuses in the fuse clips immediately before energizing the circuit.
.2
Ensure that the fuse clips are physically matched to the fuse type and size.
.3
Ensure that the correct fuses are fitted to the assigned electrical circuits.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16485
Page 1
February 13, 2013
CONTACTORS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings
.1
1.2
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010: Electrical General Provisions
and Division 1 Document.
Standards
.1
Design, manufacture and test the contactors in accordance with good industry practice
and in accordance with the following Standards:
.1
.2
2
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 14 - 1973: Industrial Control Equipment for Use in
Ordinary (Non-Hazardous Locations).
EEMAC No. 1CS-1970.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Contactors
.1
Provide electrically held contactors controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for
the type of load controlled.
.2
Provide fused switch combination contactors as indicated.
.3
Provide 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
.4
Install the contactors in CSA Enclosure 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
.5
Include following cover mounted options:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.6
2.2
Red indicating lamp.
Stop-Start pushbutton refer to workshop panels.
Hand-Off-Auto selector switch.
On-Off selector switch.
Provide a 120 V control transformer within the contactor enclosure in accordance with
Section 16825: Control Devices.
Equipment Identification
.1
Provide equipment identification nameplates in accordance with Section 16104:
Nameplates.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16485
Page 2
February 13, 2013
CONTACTORS
2.3
Manufacturers
.1
Provide contactors of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
3
Schneider Canada;
Cutler-Hammer Canada Inc.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the contactors and connect the auxiliary control devices as indicated.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16501
Page 1
February 13, 2013
BALLASTS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Submit manufacturer's technical data for ballasts which are specified to be installed in
specified fixtures. Data shall include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.3
1.2
2
Operating watts;
Input voltage;
Power factor;
Temperature range for operation;
Regulation.
Generally, all ballasts shall meet or exceed latest requirements of CBM manufacturers.
Related Sections
.1
Refer to Section 16502 for lamp data.
.2
Refer to Section 16505 for luminaire information.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Electronic Ballasts: Instant Start Fluorescent (T8 Linear)
.1
Electronic ballasts shall be as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
CEL JOB NO. 12221
CSA approved and UL listed (Class P);
Shall maintain constant, full light output of all rapid start lamps over operating
ranges of plus or minus 10% of nominal;
Shall operate lamps in parallel.
Shall cause no reduction in lamp life as rated by lamp manufacturer;
Lamp shall have an average lamp current crest factor below 1.7;
Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not exceed 10%;
Shall be complete with Class P thermal protection;
Shall have a power factor of at least 0.98 lagging;
Shall have a ballast factor of at least 0.85;
Shall operate at a frequency of 20 kHz or greater and operate without visible flicker;
Shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission Rules
and Regulations, Part 18, Class A for EMI conducted and radiated.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16501
Page 2
February 13, 2013
BALLASTS
.12
.13
.14
Shall have Class A sound rating.
Shall have a minimum starting temperature of -18 degrees C;
Shall meet or exceed the following criteria:
.1
62 watts or less as input watts when servicing two FO32 lamps;
.2
Voltages shall be as indicated.
.3
Confirm compatibility of lamps and ballasts prior to proceeding with installation.
.4
Ballast shall have a 2 year warranty.
2.2
Electronic Ballasts: Rapid Start Fluorescent (Compact Fluorescent)
.1
Electronic ballasts shall be as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
CSA approved and UL listed (Class P);
Ballast shall maintain constant light output of all rapid start lamps over operating
ranges of plus or minus 10% of nominal;
Total harmonic distortion (THD) shall not exceed 15%;
Lamp shall have an average lamp current crest factor below 1.5;
Shall not reduce lamp life as verified by lamp manufacturer;
Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 25 KHz or greater and operate without
visible flicker;
Ballast shall have a power factor of at least .99 lagging;
Meets or exceeds ANSI, IEEE and FCC standards for lamp starting and operation
electromagnetic and radio interference suppression and line transient protection;
End of lamp life sensor.
.2
Voltages shall be as indicated.
.3
Confirm compatibility of lamps and ballasts prior to proceeding with installation.
2.3
Cold Temperature Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts
.1
Shall comply with the requirements above for T8 Linear ballasts except:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Shall be rated for starting at -29 degrees C.
Shall be program rapid start or instant start.
For 120V ballasts, shall have a ballast factor of at least 0.95 and no greater than
1.20. For 347V, shall have a ballast factor of at least 0.88.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16501
Page 3
February 13, 2013
BALLASTS
2.4
Metal Halide
.1
CSA approved and UL listed (Class P);
.2
Metal halide ballasts shall be rated to operate on voltages indicated in specification rated
at 60 hz.
.3
Ballasts shall be epoxy encapsulated with minimum power factor of .95 lagging at 95%
rated lumens and designed for 40 degrees C. ambient.
.4
All ballasts shall be auto transformer type; constant wattage with non PCB thermally
protected capacitor with mounting as specified elsewhere.
.5
Minimum starting temperature shall be -29 degrees at 90% line voltage.
.6
Ballast crest factor shall be maximum 1.8.
.7
Have a two (2) year warranty.
2.5
Temperature
.1
2.6
Provide ballasts which are suitable to operate in the environment where located.
Manufacturers
.1
The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals
made are for devices that meet or exceed the specifications included herein.
.1
.2
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Osram-Sylvania
Philips/Advance
Universal
Cold temperature electronic ballasts for linear fluorescent lamps shall be
manufactured by Osram Sylvania – Quicktronic T8 Instant Start QHE series ballast.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16501
Page 4
February 13, 2013
BALLASTS
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Ballasts shall be integral to the luminaire unless otherwise noted.
.2
Remote ballasts shall be installed in ventilated steel enclosures with minimum 105
degrees C. TEW cable between ballasts and fixtures.
.3
Provide racks and switches for all remote ballasts.
.4
Locate remote ballasts as close as possible to their luminaires. (Verify with the lamp
manufacturer as to the appropriate distance).
.5
Install remote ballasts in vertical orientation with capacitors at the bottom of the ballast.
.6
Identify all ballast secondary wiring.
.7
Provide ballasts suitable for the environment in which they are located.
.8
Where remote electronic ballasts are used, the maximum length of wiring between the
ballasts and socket shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications.
.9
Replace any ballasts that create noise and, in the opinion of Consultant, are not
acceptable to the environment they are located.
3.2
Spare Parts
.1
Provide four (4) spare ballasts of all types and voltages complete with plug connectors of
each type and hand over to the Owner prior to substantial completion of the project.
.2
Locate spare ballasts within cabinet suited for spare circuit breakers / fuses noted in
Section 16471.
.3
Location of equipment cabinet to be confirmed by Owner.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16502
Page 1
February 13, 2013
LAMPS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.
.2
Submit manufacturer's technical data for lamps which are specified to be installed in
fixtures. Data shall include:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.3
1.2
Operating voltage;
Wattage;
Rated lumens;
Rated life;
Colour temperature and colour rendering index;
Base type and lamp burning position;
Lamp shape.
Read lamp schedule in conjunction with fixture schedule.
Manufacturer
.1
Lamps shall be as manufactured by CGE, Osram-Sylvania, or Philips, or as specifically
noted otherwise.
.2
Where shatter-resistant lamps are called for, manufactures shall be CGE, Osram
Sylvania, or Shat-R-Shield.
.3
All lamps must be stamped with the approved vendor’s trademark.
1.3
Related Sections
.1
Refer to Section 16505 for luminaire information.
.2
Refer to Section 16501 for ballast information.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16502
Page 2
February 13, 2013
LAMPS
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
Provide lamps as indicated in the fixture schedule.
.2
Ensure that all lamp and luminaire manufacturers are coordinated for matching bases
and lamps.
2.2
Colour
.1
All lamps of a particular type shall have the same colour temperature and colour rendering
index.
.2
Unless noted otherwise, the following colour features must be provided for lamps:
.3
metal halide lamps shall have a colour temperature of 4000° K with a CRI of 85 up to
100W and CRI of 75 above 100W;
.4
ceramic arc metal halide lamps shall have a colour temperature of 3000° K with a
CRI of 81
.5
fluorescent T8, T5 and TT5 lamps shall have a colour temperature of 3500° K with a
CRI of 85; compact fluorescent lamps shall have a colour temperature of 3500° K with a
CRI of 82;
.6
Halogen lamps shall have a colour temperature of 3000° K.
2.3
Life
.1
All incandescent lamps shall be long life with a minimum rated life of 3000 hrs and
130 volt. (except as noted otherwise).
.2
Halogen a minimum of 4000 hours.
.3
Fluorescent a minimum of 24000 hrs.
.4
Compact fluorescent a minimum of 10000 hrs.
.5
Metal Halide a minimum of 20000 hours.
.6
Metal halide low wattage minimum of 9000 hrs.
.7
High Pressure Sodium a minimum of 24000 hrs
.8
All lamps provided on the site shall be new.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16502
Page 3
February 13, 2013
LAMPS
2.4
3
Environmental Impact
.1
All three (3) and four (4) foot, T8 fluorescent lamps shall pass Federal TCLP test for
evaluating solid waste and shall:
.2
Have low mercury content;
.3
Have welded bases or use lead-free solder;
.4
Have minimum initial luminous flux of 3000 lumens;
.5
Have a minimum 95% lamp lumen depreciation factor;
.6
Be Osram-Sylvania “Ecologic 800 XP”, GE “Ecolux XL” or Philips “Alto Advantage”
product only.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install all lamps in fixtures specified.
.2
Replace all lamps with new, if there is any rapid deterioration of lamps which the
Consultant views as excessive in terms of the project warranty, at no cost to the Owner.
.3
Replace all lamps with a colour shift which does not correlate to manufacturers
published data.
.4
Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps used with Lutron dimming ballasts shall be
burned in by operating at full light output for 100 hours prior to dimming operation.
3.2
Spare Lamps
.1
Provide spare lamps of each type as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.2
Quartz halogen (12 and 120 volt): 20%
Fluorescent T8: 10%
Shatter-resistant fluorescent T8: 10%
Fluorescent TT5: 20%
Compact Fluorescent: 20%
Metal Halide: 20%
Percentage noted above relates to the percentage of lamp types under this scope to be
handed over to the Owner.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16503
Page 1
February 13, 2013
LENSES
1
GENERAL
1.1
2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 and
Section 01340.
.2
All fixtures shall be complete with integral lenses as specified.
.3
Lenses for valences are provided under Division 09900.
PRODUCTS
2.1
3
Properties
.1
Lens shall be manufactured from injection moulded clear virgin acrylic.
.2
Generally, lenses shall be 0.125" (3.18 mm) thick overall with 0.084" (2.13 mm) maximum
penetration in a K-12 pattern unless otherwise noted.
.3
Provide ultraviolet inhibited lenses and shields over lamps as indicated.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Any fixtures which are located in a valance and have a louvre provided below the fixture
which is part of the valance and not part of the fixture shall have the louvre provided as
specified in Division 9; however, any louvres and lenses which are an integral part of the
fixture shall have all louvres and lenses provided by this contract.
.2
All lens framing angles in valances are by Division 9 and General Contractor.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
1
General
.1
Unless otherwise indicated, lighting fixture bodies shall be of minimum 20 gauge, cold
rolled prime steel of rigid construction with knockouts as required.
.2
Fixture rigidity shall permit any suspension method without sag. Fluorescent fixtures shall
be suitable for either individual or continuous mounting.
.3
Fixtures shall be finished in baked white enamel with exposed surfaces matching the
exposed tee-bars specified in other sections and shall resist chipping, corrosion, and
discolouration. Before finishing, all metal shall be chemically degreased and neutralized.
Finish shall not be less than two coats of enamel, sprayed and baked on. Reflecting
surfaces shall be white with an average reflectance of not less than 85%.
.4
Fixture lenses and diffusers shall be rigid enough to be self supporting without sag, easily
removable but not loose. Provide additional thickness of lens to prevent sag at no extra
cost to the Owner.
.5
Where the Architect is to select colours and finish of lighting fixtures after award of
Contract, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor for Division 16 to obtain this
information well in advance of installation schedule.
.6
Where fixtures are specified to have two separate power sources within, provide all
necessary barriers, etc., to isolate the two power sources as per the requirements of the
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide labeling in red and to read – “Caution, two power
sources in the fixture”. Label shall be visible when opening fixture.
PRODUCTS
2.1
3
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
2
Section 16504
Nil
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
All fixtures shall be installed accurately in line and level. Co-ordinate this work with other
trades to ensure that their work is not held up by the work of this contract and that the
fixtures are installed on schedule.
.2
All fixtures shall be installed in the standard manner for the type of fixture and in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Fixture studs or other equally secure
methods of attachment shall be used throughout or as called for in the Lighting
Fixture Schedule.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
LUMINAIRE CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION
Section 16504
Page 2
February 13, 2013
.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the ceiling finishes in all areas where
recessed fixtures are being installed to ensure that the fixtures which are ordered for these
areas are purchased with suitable ceiling trim for the particular ceiling finish. Fixtures
which are sent to the site with wrong ceiling trim or flanges shall be replaced with fixtures
having the correct trims without additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall notify
the Consultant if the ceilings are improperly installed and shall be guided by his decisions
before proceeding with the fixture installation.
.4
Plaster/drywall frames and rings shall be provided for fixtures recessed in plaster/drywall
ceilings. The installation of the ring shall be done by a Lathing Trade Contractor under the
supervision of the Contractor for Division 16 to ensure that they are located correctly.
.5
Fixtures shall be properly cleaned at the time of installation. Any fixtures showing marks
or scratches due to handling or tool marks, shall be replaced.
.6
Lighting fixtures in service areas, mechanical and electrical rooms shall be installed after
the mechanical and electrical equipment is in place. The fixtures shall be located on site
to clear all obstructions, and to facilitate lamp removal, to the approval of the Owner.
.7
Lighting fixtures and accessories shall not be fixed to or suspended in any way from
mechanical pipes, ducts or other components. If necessary, additional supports shall be
installed to bridge the equipment.
.8
All lighting fixtures which are located in suspended ceilings shall be supported by
approved wires or chains which will allow the fixture to be supported properly and
independent of the ceiling system. All supports shall be provided by this Contract.
.9
Install reflector in coves per manufacturer's instructions.
.10
Provide mocked up fixture as detailed in the fixture schedule. No fixture shall be put into
manufacture until Consultant's approval is received.
.11
Where fixtures are mounted on wiring channels or assemblies provide necessary barrier to
isolate dual power sources.
.12
This project may have a number of fixtures required for operation in special environments.
Clean environment will require special sealing and where noted specialized caulking and
silicone between various fixture parts, and between fixtures and walls or ceilings. A
number of fixtures are located in hazardous environments. Ensure all finishes are
designed to exist in the environment without deterioration. Also provide all fittings, hubs,
gaskets, plugs, restricters, etc. so that the fixture can exist in the level of hazard detailed.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 1
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
1
GENERAL
1.1
Shop Drawings And Product Data
.1
1.2
Lamp Data
.1
1.3
Refer to Section 16502 for lamp data.
Ballast Data
.1
1.4
Refer to Section 16501 for ballast data.
Lighting Fixture Construction And Installation
.1
1.5
Refer to Section 16504 for fixture construction and installation data.
Lenses
.1
2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010.
Refer to Section 16503 for lens data.
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
The following luminaire designations shall apply:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
CEL JOB NO. 12221
A single letter, other than X, followed by a digit: INCANDESCENT e.g: A1
The letter C followed by another letter and a digit: COMPACT FLUORESCENT
e.g: CA1
The letter F followed by another letter and a digit: FLUORESCENT e.g: FA1
The letter H followed by another letter and a digit: HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM
e.g: HA1
The letter M followed by another letter and a digit: METAL HALIDE e.g MA1
The letters LT followed by a digit indicates LIGHT TRACK e.g: LT1
A single letter X followed by a digit: EXIT SIGN e.g: X1
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 2
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.2
Fixture Type CA1
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Lamp: Compact Fluorescent
Watts: 26
Shape & Size: Double twin tube
Base: 4 Pin
Orientation: Horizontal
Lumens: 1800
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 2
.2
Voltage: 120
.3
Ballast Location: Integral electronic.
.4
Mounting: Project includes recessed in drywall and ACT. Refer to drawings for locations.
Ship with suitable kits.
.5
Type: Downlight
.6
IES Distribution: Direct.
.7
Shielding: None.
.8
Reflector Finish: Self flanged specular clear low iridescent.
.9
Opening Size: Nominal 7-3/8" dia. x 8" deep housing
.10
Finish: White trim
.11
Other: CSA approved.
.12
Manufacturers:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Lithonia: AF series
Halo:
Lightolier:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 3
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.3
Fixture Type CA2
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Lamp: Compact Fluorescent
Watts: 26
Shape & Size: Double twin tube
Base: 4 Pin
Orientation: Horizontal
Lumens: 1800
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 2
.2
Voltage: 120
.3
Ballast Location: Integral electronic.
.4
Mounting: Surface
.5
Type: Downlight
.6
IES Distribution: Direct.
.7
Shielding: None.
.8
Reflector Finish: Specular clear low iridescent.
.9
Size: Nominal 8" dia. opening x 11-1/2" deep housing
.10
Finish: White
.11
Other: CSA approved.
.12
Manufacturers:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Lightolier: CS8226
Lithonia:
Halo:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 4
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.4
Fixture Type X Series
.1
Stencil face aluminum exit lights with 150 mm high red letters reading "EXIT", L.E.D.
lamps, NRCan/CSA C860 approved, 25 year life and pre-specified chevrons as shown
on the drawings.
.2
Each fixture will have a face measuring at least 300 mm x 165 mm.
.3
Provide white exit light fixtures. Entire housing to be specified colour and confirmed by
the Architect.
.4
Provide exit light types as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
X1: Single face ceiling mounted.
X2: Double face ceiling mounted.
X3: Single face stem hung.
X4: Double face stem hung.
X5: Surface wall mounted.
X8: Double face endwall mounted.
X9: Recess wall mounted.
.5
Voltage: 120V
.6
Manufacturer's include:
.1 Lumacell: To match existing.
.2 Emergi-Lite: To match existing.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 5
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.5
Fixture Type FA1
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 32
Shape & Size: F32T8
Lumens: 2950
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 2
.2
Voltage: 120V
.3
Ballast:
.1
.2
.4
Instant start electronic.
Full light out.
Mounting:
.1
Surface, individual and continuous; tower offices. Provide hardware for
continuous row mounting.
.5
Type: 1 x 4 direct.
.6
Louvre Type:
.1
.2
.3
.4
20 gauge welded steel housing.
3" deep, semi specular alzak, 2 x 8 cell matrix.
Louvre to be hinged.
VCP not less than 85 in all viewing angles.
.7
Finish: White
.8
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
CFI: No. PVRA1G16LS240-120
Lithonia: PM3X series
Metalux: P3MX -232-S28I-120
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 6
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.6
Fixture Type FA2
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.2
Lamp: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 28
Shape & Size: F28T5
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 2
.3
Voltage: 120V
.4
Ballast:
.1
.2
.5
Program start electronic.
Number of Ballasts: 2
Mounting:
.1
.2
Suspended by aircraft cable at 2200mmAFF, individual and continuous;
conference room and meeting room.
Provide hardware for continuous row mounting.
.6
Type: 1 x 4 direct- indirect.
.7
Finish: to be specified by architect
.8
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Lightolier: Agili-T AGI
Lithonia:
Metalux
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 7
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.7
Fixture Type FA3
.1
Lamp Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 32
Shape & Size: F32T8
Lumens: 2950
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 1
.2
Voltage: 120
.3
Ballast: Instant start electronic
.4
Mounting: Within Cove in Conference Room 356.
.5
Type: 4' or lengths to suit, Staggered strip fluorescent cove.
.6
Manufacturers:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Peerless Envision Cove: 7 or 9 ECXM5 1 32 U4 120 GEB10 SCT LP730
CFI
Metalux
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 8
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.8
Fixture Type FA4
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 32
Shape & Size: F32T8
Lumens: 2950
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 1
.2
Voltage: 120V
.3
Mounting: Surface mount in washroom valences.
.4
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
CFI: SB Series
Lithonia:
Metalux:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 9
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.9
Fixture Type FA5
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.2
Lamp: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 32
Shape & Size: F32T8
Lumens: 2950
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 2
.3
Voltage: 120V
.4
Ballast:
.1
.2
.5
Instant start electronic.
Full light out.
Mounting:
.1
.2
Surface, individual and continuous.
Provide hardware for continuous row mounting.
.6
Type: 4' Wraparound fluorescent
.7
Diffuser: Acrylic prismatic
.8
Finish: White
.9
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
CFI: TX series
Lithonia: SB series
Metalux:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 10
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.10
Fixture Type FA6
.1
Family: Fluorescent
.2
Lamp: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
T8U6
31W
Number of Lamps: 2
.3
Voltage: 120V
.4
Ballast:
.1
.2
.5
Instant start electronic.
Full light out.
Mounting:
.1
Surface, individual
.6
Type: 2 x 2 wrap direct.
.7
Diffuser: Frameless acrylic
.8
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CEL JOB NO. 12221
CFI: Lumiplex
Lithonia:
Metalux:
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16505
Page 11
February 13, 2013
LUMINAIRES
2.11
.1
Fixture Type FA7
Family: Fluorescent
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Lamp: Linear Fluorescent
Watts: 32
Shape & Size: F32T8
Lumens: 2950
Colour: 3000q K, 82 CRI
Quantity: 1
.2
Voltage: 120V
.3
Ballast:
.1
.2
.4
Instant start electronic.
Full light out.
Mounting:
.1
Recessed, individual
.5
Type: 1 x 4 direct.
.6
Lens: Prismatic acrylic
.7
Manufacturer:
.1
.2
.3
CFI: AA248 Troffer
Lithonia:
Metalux:
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 1
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
Electrical General Provisions: Section 16010
.2
Operating Maintenance: Section 16020
.3
Wiring Methods: Section 16109
.4
Luminaire Specifications: Section 16505.
1.2
Work Included
.1
Contractor's work shall include all labour, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware,
sensor, wire junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery,
installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control
system, as described herein.
.2
The Contractor shall ensure the Manufacturer has reviewed all specifications and
drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 16 prior to
Bid submission. The Contractor shall ensure the manufacturer has reviewed Architectural
documents and shall be reviewed for glazing locations that may affect sensor locations.
.3
Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans
and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, structural, mechanical
systems and building management systems.
.4
Manufacturer shall review all documentation and shall assist the Contractor in providing a
detailed sensor layout prior to Shop Drawing Submission. Contractor shall provide all
documents for manufacturer.
1.3
Equipment Qualification
.1
Products supplied shall be from a manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the
manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years.
.2
All components shall be U.L. listed and CSA approved, offer a five (5) year warranty and
meet all Provincial and local applicable Codes.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 2
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1.4
System Description
.1
The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor
based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after a reasonable
time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area
and provide individual office control override as requested by the occupant.
.2
The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space
utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.
.3
The Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this Specification to
be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with
the Specifications.
.4
The manufacturer’s obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without
charge to the Owner, all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged,
defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier.
.5
The warranty shall commence upon the Owner's acceptance of the project.
1.5
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance to the Electrical Specifications and Contract
Documents.
.2
The manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the
necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this
specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted.
.3
The manufacturer shall submit a copy of the latest lighting plan clearly marked showing
proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. Failure to provide a layout shall be
the responsibility of the contractor if modifications are required.
.4
The manufacturer shall submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem
showing proper wiring.
.5
The manufacturer shall submit standard catalog literature which includes performance
specifications indicating compliance to the specifications.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 3
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
1.6
System Operation
.1
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all proper field/site adjustments to assure
the Owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system, and;
.2
Factory Commissioning:
.1
1.7
2
It shall be the manufacturer's and Contractor’s responsibility to verify all proper
adjustments and train the Owner’s personnel to ensure Owner's satisfaction with
the occupancy system.
Acceptable Manufacturers
.1
The Watt Stopper;
.2
Pass and Seymour;
.3
Hubbell;
PRODUCTS
2.1
General
.1
All products listed below reference Watt Stopper product numbers:
.1
Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of motion at desk top level up to
300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet.
.2
Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0
to 1200 watts at 347 volts and shall have 180q coverage capability.
.3
Bi-level wall switch sensors shall accommodate up to two (2) loads from 0 to 800
watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 347 volts, for each load.
.4
The manufacturer shall review the Architectural layout and advise the Electrical
Contractor the optimum location for the sensor.
.5
Contractor shall carry the cost for additional four (4) devices per floor if required
and the associated conduit and wiring within his Bid.
.6
Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a
multiple-tier configuration, with groves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 4
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
2.2
.7
Where specified, passive infrared and dual technology sensors shall offer
daylighting footcandle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level
lighting.
.8
All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with any electronic ballast, PL
lamp systems and rated motor loads.
.9
All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay
and sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering.
.10
In the event of failure, a bypass manual "override on" shall be provided on each
sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly until sensor is
replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.
.11
Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled to within plus or minus
0.005% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk.
Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable.
.12
All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being
detected during testing and that the unit is working.
.13
Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with
Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control,
and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components to achieve this
function are not acceptable.
.14
All sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for
safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.
.15
All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.
.16
Manufacturer shall provide all wiring diagrams to both Electrical Contractor and
BMS Contractor for coordination purposes.
Circuit Control Hardware - CU
.1
Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be
able to externally mount through a 3/4" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and
be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching
control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer shall provide
power to a minimum of three (3) sensors.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 5
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
.2
.3
2.3
Relay Contacts shall have ratings of:
.1
13A - 120 VAC Tungsten
.2
20A - 120 VAC Ballast
.3
15A - 347 VAC Ballast
Control wiring between sensors and control units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded
U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable approved for use in plenums,
where applicable.
Sensor Types
.1
.2
The following sensors are to be provided, complete with associated power packs and
accessory hardware:
.1
OS1
DT-305
Dual Tech Ceiling Mounted
.2
OS2
WT-2255
Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted
Set timer for all occupancy sensors initially at 5 minutes. Adjust timer during
commissioning upon request of Owner.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16561
Page 6
February 13, 2013
OCCUPANCY SENSORS
3
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location
required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of
controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90)
to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover the controlled area to
accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within
the room(s). The locations shown on the drawings are diagrammatic. The manufacturer
shall provide a detailed location.
.2
It is the Contractor's responsibility to arrange for a pre-installation meeting with the
manufacturer's factory authorized representative on site to verify placement of sensors
and installation criteria with the Consultant and Owner’s site representative to determine
operation programming.
.3
Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best
possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space
limitations or interference of structural components. The Contractor shall also provide, the
Owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of
the occupancy sensing devices and systems and include in maintenance manuals.
.4
Coordinate sensor locations with HVAC diffusers.
3.2
Factory Commissioning
.1
Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the
manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor
placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system.
.2
The Electrical Contractor shall provide both the manufacturer, General Contractor and the
Consultant within thirty (30) working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning
date.
.3
Upon completion of the systems fine tuning a factory authorized technician shall provide
the proper training to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the
sensors. Allow for a minimum of 8 hours of training.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16721
Page 1
February 13, 2013
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
1
GENERAL
1.1
Related Work
.1
Fire Protection General: Section 15300.
.2
Sprinkler Systems: Section 15330.
1.2
System Description
.1
The existing Life Safety Fire Alarm System is a Simplex voice communication type and is
remaining. Some devices such as fire alarm speakers, smoke detectors, etc. have been
relocated to suit the new layout. Extend wirings and conduit to suit new location.
Maintain the existing fire alarm zones as they are.
.2
Additional devices such as duct smoke detectors to be provided, each on a separate fire
alarm zone.
.3
Prior to Bid Submission the contractor shall have the manufacturer review the site to
ensure all incidentals and costs have been captured.
1.3
Final Testing
.1
2
In addition to the verification tests to all relocated and existing devices in the areas
shown at the completion of the work, provide maintenance for one year with and an
inspection by the manufacturer at the end of the year at no additional cost. The
inspection tests must conform to ULC-S536. Submit the final inspection report to the
Project Manager.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Duct Smoke Detectors
.1
2.2
Duct smoke detectors complete with housing, suitable for air plenum, remote alarm
indicator, field adjustable, low current, voltage 24 D.C. each duct on a separate zone.
Additional Zones
.1
2.3
Additional devices such as duct smoke detectors for return fan one and two to be
supplied and installed.
Additional Simplex Zone Module
.1
Provide additional Simplex zone modules and required and four (4) spare modules in the
existing Simplex main fire alarm control panel located in the Electrical Room 006T.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16721
Page 2
February 13, 2013
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
2.4
Additional Annunciator Windows
.1
3
Additional annunciator windows to be supplied and installed in all the four (4) tower
annunciator panels by Stair #1T, Stair #2T, Vestibule #107T and Control Room
#008-Basement.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install duct mounted products of combustion detectors as indicated and the number of
detectors shall be as follows:
.1
Mounted at a suitable location in the return air stream prior to exhausting from the
building or being diluted by outside air.
.2
Mounted at a suitable location in the supply air stream on the downside of the
filters, and also downstream of the fan motor if the motor is enclosed in the air
stream.
.3
Mounted readily accessible for maintenance.
.4
Each duct detector mounted near bends in the duct shall be located at least twice
the duct width away from the bend.
.2
All wiring to be in conduit. The contractor shall be responsible for the supply and
installation of the conduit, wire, wire pulling, junction boxes, electrical boxes, and terminal
cabinets in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
.3
A fire alarm terminal cabinet is located in the Penthouse.
.4
All existing fire alarm annunciator panels have to be updated to include for additional
zones:
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16721
Page 3
February 13, 2013
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
3.1
Tests
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 16020, ULC Standard S536 and
CAN4-S536-82.
.2
Fire Alarm System:
.1
Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure that the manual stations, thermal,
smoke, and photoelectric detectors sprinkler system transmits an alarm to the fire
alarm control panel and actuates an alarm and ancillary devices.
.2
Simulate open, ground and short circuit faults on the alarm and signaling circuits
to ensure the proper operation of the trouble signals.
.3
Existing main panels, and devices shall be tested and verified. Test reports shall
be submitted to the Owner/Engineer.
.4
If space prohibits mounting, the manufacturer shall inspect, test and report in
writing stating the device is sensing properly and fully functional.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEMS
1
Page 1
February 13, 2013
GENERAL
1.1
System Description
.1
1.2
2
Section 16741
Provide a complete empty telephone and data communication raceway system that shall
consist of outlet boxes, cabinets, conduits, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, backboards,
pullstrings, service fittings, required to make a complete and operative system.
Related Work
.1
Electrical General Conditions: Section 16010.
.2
Plywood Backboards: Section 16103
.3
Conduits, Conduit Fastenings & Conduit Fitting: Section 16111.
.4
Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets: Section 16131.
.5
Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings: Section 16132.
.6
Interference Drawings: Refer to Section 16010.
.7
Work in conjunction with the Owner’s Telecom Contractor.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Material
.1
Contractor shall provide:
.2
Conduits: In accordance with Section 16111 - Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit
Fittings and document.
.3
Junction boxes and cabinets: In accordance with Section 16131 - Splitters, Junction, Pull
Boxes and Cabinets.
.4
Outlet boxes, conduit boxes and fittings: In accordance with Section 16132 - Outlet
Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.
.5
Pullstrings: minimum two (2) per conduit.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEMS
3
Section 16741
Page 2
February 13, 2013
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the empty raceway system, including pullstrings, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes,
pull boxes, conduit, sleeves and caps, miscellaneous and positioning material to
constitute a complete system. Co-ordinate with other services.
.2
Conduits shall not have more than 3-90 deg. or equivalent bends in each run, with the
bending radii not less than ten (10) times the conduit dia. Pull boxes shall be provided in
each conduit run of over 108.3' (33 m) at not less than 108.3' (33 m) intervals.
.3
All material raceways, terminal boards, etc. shall be to the size and number shown and
shall also suit the telecommunications requirements.
.4
Electrical Contractor shall submit all plans to the Telecommunications Contractor.
.5
In some instances, conduits may have to leave the slab. Co-ordinate with structural
details.
.6
Maintain the following clearances from electrical and heat sources when installing
conduits for data/telephone cables.
Item
Minimum Clearance
Motor
1.2 m (4'-0")
Transformers
1.2 m (4'-0")
Conduit and cables used for electrical distribution less than 1kV
0.3 m (1'-0")
Fluorescent Luminaires
1.0 m (3'-0")
Pipes (gas, oil water, etc.)
0.3 m (1'-0")
HVAC (equipment, ducts, etc.)
15 cm (6")
This table shall be read in conjunction with Owner’s Requirements. Maximum condition
shall govern and be carried in Contract.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
TELECOMMUNICATION RACEWAY SYSTEMS
3.2
Section 16741
Page 3
February 13, 2013
Record (As-Built) Drawings
.1
Contractor is required to maintain one (1) set of correct and accurate as-built drawings
on-site at all times. These drawings are to be made available to the Consultant for
periodical review over the course of the project.
.2
The Contractor is required to provide as-built drawings of the conduit installation. All
drawings shall be provided to the Consultant at the end of the project complete with
changes due to on-site conditions.
.3
The as-built drawings are to include, but not limited, to the following:
.1
.2
.3
Riser diagram updates.
Changes on the floor plans.
Conduit routing.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 1
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
1
GENERAL
1.1
Reference
.1
Electrical General Provisions and Division 0 and 1.
.2
Control Devices: Section 16825.
.3
Equipment Schedules. Contractor shall be responsible to provide drawings to
manufacturer prior to Bid submission.
1.2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 16010 and Division 1
Documents.
.2
Indicate:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.3
Mounting method and dimensions.
Starter size and type.
Layout of identified internal and front panel components.
Enclosure types.
Wiring diagram for each type of starter.
Interconnection diagrams.
Fire alarm interface.
Two (2) spare contacts.
Operation And Maintenance Manuals
.1
Data shall be incorporated into maintenance manual.
.2
Include operation and maintenance data for each type and style of starter.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 2
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
2
PRODUCTS
2.1
Materials
.1
Starters in accordance with CSA Standard C22.2 No. 14: Industrial Control Equipment
for Use in Ordinary (Non- Hazardous) Locations.
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.2
Half size starters are not acceptable.
Minimum starter size: size 0
All starters shall be EEMAC rated. IEC rated starters are not acceptable.
All starters shall be complete with red and green indicating lights for run trip and off
indication
All motor starter servicing motors 25 HP and larger shall be fitted with a door
mounted ammeter.
All starters shall have adjustable overload devices.
Manual Motor Starters
.1
Single-phase manual motor starters of size, type, rating, and enclosure type as indicated,
with components as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
2.3
Switching mechanism, quick make and break;
One (1) overload heater per ungrounded line;
Manual resets with a trip indicating handle.
Toggle switch, standard duty labelled as indicated;
Indicating light: standard duty and colour as indicated;
Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.
Combination Magnetic Starters
.1
All magnetic starters to be the combination, circuit breaker, magnetic type unless
otherwise indicated.
.2
Combination type starters to include disconnect switch with a vertically moving operating
lever on the outside of enclosure to control disconnect switch and provision for:
.1
.2
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Locking in OFF position with up to 3 padlocks;
Locking in ON position;
Independent locking of enclosure door;
A voidable interlock to prevent the starter door from being open when the
disconnect switch is in the ON position and to prevent switching the disconnect
switch to the ON position when the starter door is open.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 3
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
.3
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.4
Hand-off-auto selector switches: heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: heavy duty and colour as indicated.
2 normally open and 2 normally closed spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Full Voltage Magnetic Starters
.1
Full voltage magnetic starters of the size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated
with the following components:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.5
Rapid action solenoid operated contactor;
Motor overload protective device in each phase, manually reset from outside
enclosure;
Power and control terminals;
Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in visible location;
Identify each wire and terminal for the internal and external connections within
starter, with permanent number markings identical to the wiring and
schematic diagram.
Hand-off-auto selector switches: heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: heavy duty and colour as indicated.
2 normally open and 2 normally closed spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Full Voltage Reversing Magnetic Starters
.1
Full voltage magnetic starters of the size, type rating and enclosure type as indicated
with the following components:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Two (2) - 3-pole magnetic contactors mounted on common based;
Mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent both contactors from operating at
same time;
Three (3) overload relays with heater elements. Manual reset.
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Hand-off-auto selector switches: heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: heavy duty and colour as indicated.
2 normally open and 2 normally closed spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 4
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
2.6
Multi-Speed Starters
.1
2 speed starters of size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated. Starter suitable for
constant torque, variable torque or constant kW type motor as indicated and with
components as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.7
One (1) - 3-pole contactor for each winding for separate winding motors;
One (1) - 3-pole and one (1) - 5-pole contactor for each reconnectable winding for
Consequent pole type motors;
Three (3) overload relays with three (3) heater elements and manual reset for each
speed.
Selector switches: Heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: Heavy duty type and colour as indicated.
Auxiliary control devices as indicated.
Low speed compelling relay and automatic sequence accelerating, decelerating
relays for each speed.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Magnetic Starter Reduced Voltage Star-Delta
.1
Reduced voltage star-delta closed transition starter of size, type, rating and enclosure
type as indicated with components as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.2
Two (2) - 3-pole delta contactors with auxiliary relay and interlocks;
One (1) - 3-pole star contactor with auxiliary relay and interlocks;
One (1) - 3-pole transition contactor;
One (1) set of transition resistors;
Mechanical interlock to interlock one (1) delta contactor and the star contactor.
One (1) timing relay;
3-pole manual reset overload relays.
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Hand-off-auto selector switches: heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: heavy duty and colour as indicated.
2 normally open and 2 normally closed spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 5
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
2.8
Multi-Speed Reversing Starters
.1
2-speed reversing starters of size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated. Starter
suitable for constant torque, variable torque or constant kW type motor as indicated and
with components as follows:
.1
.2
.3
.2
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.9
Two (2) - 3-pole magnetic contactors mounted on common based;
Mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent both contactors from operating at
the same time;
Three (3) overload relays with three (3) heater elements and manual reset for each
speed.
Hand-off-auto selector switches: heavy duty, labelled as indicated.
Indicating lights: heavy duty and colour as indicated.
2 normally open and 2 normally closed spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise
indicated.
Contacts for fire alarm interface.
Low speed compelling relay and automatic sequence accelerating, decelerating
relays for each speed.
Timing relays to permit motor deceleration prior to reversing direction.
Reduced Voltage Starters – Autotransformers Type Starter
.1
Autotransformer starters are provided with a NEMA rated medium duty autotransformer
with taps to provide 50%, 65%, or 80% of line voltage to start the motor.
.2
Three NEMA rated contactors (1S, 2S and RUN) and a pneumatic timing relay (TR) as
required to achieve the start and run connections.
.3
In the start mode, the 1S and 2S contactors are energized. The 1S contactor is
energized from and instantaneous contact on the timing relay following a start command.
A normally closed interlock on the 1S contactor then picks up the 2S coil making the
connection across the autotransformer.
.4
After a preset time delay, the timed contacts on TR change states and the 1S contactor
drops out. With the 1S contactor open, the windings of the autotransformer temporarily
act as a reactor through the 2S contactor.
.5
After the 1S contactor has dropped out, the RUN contactor then closes. For maximum
safety, the RUN and 1S contactors are mechanically and electrically interlocked. The
RUN contactor then shorts out the autotransformer windings and the 2S contactor is
dropped out.
.6
Reset overload devices.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 6
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
.7
Accessories:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.10
.1
2.11
.1
2.12
.1
2.13
.1
Thermistor Relay
Thermistor overload protection relay for starters size 2 and larger, supplied under
Division 16, shall be Siemens Electric Limited Cat. No. 3UN8 or equivalent, complete with
door mounted reset button and amber pilot light on door to indicate thermistor trip unit trip
condition.
Finishes
For all painted surfaces, acid etch, prime coat and apply finish coats of the
manufacturer's standard finish.
Equipment Identification
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Electrical Specification.
Manufacturers
Provide starters of one (1) manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturers are:
.1
.2
.3
3
Selector switches: Heavy duty labeled.
Indicating light: Heavy duty type.
Auxiliary control devices.
Stop/start control.
Fused CPT.
Schneider Canada;
Cutler-Hammer Canada Ltd.;
Allen-Bradley Canada Limited;
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the starters and connect the power and control wiring per shop drawings.
.2
Ensure that the correct fuses and overload devices and elements are installed.
.3
Coordinate all installations with the Owner’s Facility Management.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16811
Page 7
February 13, 2013
MOTOR STARTERS UP TO 600V
3.2
Tests
.1
Perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
Electrical specifications.
.2
Operate all switches and contactors to verify correct functioning.
.3
Perform starting and stopping sequences of the contactors and relays.
.4
Check that the sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters,
equipment and control devices operate as indicated.
.5
Perform all tests with the Owner’s Facility Management team and Commissioning Agent.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16825
Page 1
February 13, 2013
CONTROL DEVICES
1
GENERAL
1.1
2
Shop Drawings
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 16010 Electrical General Provisions,
and Division 1 Document.
.2
Shall include schematics, wiring, and interconnection diagrams.
PRODUCTS
2.1
Standards
.1
2.2
Provide control relays designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 14: Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Ordinary
(Non-Hazardous) Locations.
Manufacturers
.1
Provide control devices of one (1) manufacturer (except thermostats). Allen-Bradley
catalogue numbers are indicated to indicate the quality of the control devices required.
Equivalent products of other acceptable vendors may be used. Acceptable
manufacturers are:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.3
Allen-Bradley Canada Limited;
Schneider Canada;
Cutler-Hammer Canada Ltd;
Coordinate with existing Motor Centres.
AC Control Relays
.1
Electrically held with field convertible contact cartridges and the following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Coil rating: 120 V;
Contact rating: EEMAC A600 & P300;
4-contacts;
Allen-Bradley 700-P series.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16825
Page 2
February 13, 2013
CONTROL DEVICES
.2
Double voltage, electrically held with a sliding barrier to permit access to the only the
contact compartment or the coil compartment at any one (1) time, field convertible
contact cartridges and the following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
2.4
Coil rating: 120 V;
Contact rating: EEMAC A600 & P300;
4-contacts in the contact compartment and 2 contacts in the coil compartment;
Allen-Bradley 700-BRD Series.
DC Control Relays
.1
Electronically held with field convertible contact cartridges, economizing coil and the
following characteristics:
.1
.2
.3
.4
.2
Selector switches:
.1
.3
Coil Rating: 24 V DC;
Contact Rating: EEMAC A300 & P300;
4-Contacts;
Allen-Bradley 700DC-N Series.
Type A:
.1 Duty: Standard;
.2 Operator type: Standard;
.3 Operator colour: black as indicated;
.4 Nameplate type: metal, engraved with contrasting letters as indicated;
.5 2-position, maintained;
.6 3-position, maintained;
.7 One (1) normally open and one (1) normally closed contact
.8 Contact rating: EEMAC A600
.9 Enclosure: CSA enclosure 1
.10 Allen-Bradley 800S series
Pilot Lights:
.1
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Type A:
.1 Heavy duty
.2 Push to test full voltage type for operation in a 120 V circuit.
.3 Lens colours: Red, green, amber, as indicated.
.4 Nameplate: Metal, engraved with contrasting letters, as indicated.
.5 Enclosure: CSA enclosure.
.6 Allen-Bradley 800 Series.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16825
Page 3
February 13, 2013
CONTROL DEVICES
2.5
Relay Accessories
.1
Standard contact cartridges field convertible between normally-open and normallyclosed.
.2
Sealed contact cartridges, normally open and normally closed as indicated.
.3
Overlap contact cartridges supplied in pairs having a normally open contact that closes
before the normally closed contact opens and vice versa.
.4
Indexed mounting strips easily cut to the required length and bolted or rivetted in place.
The relays are installed in rows on the strips with captive mounting screws.
.5
Adder contact decks to add contacts in multiples of 4 contacts to the maximum of
12 contacts.
.6
Mechanical latch attachment to convert an electrically held relay to a mechanically
held relay.
2.6
Control And Relay Panels
.1
Sheet steel CSA sprinkler-proof enclosure with hinged padlockable access door to
accommodate all relays timers, terminals labels, wiring and all other components as
indicated to the factory installed and wired to identified terminals
.2
Provide sprinkler protection.
2.7
Solid State Timing Relays
.1
Construction: AC operated electronic timing relay with a solid-state timing circuit to
operate output contact. The timing circuit and output contact to be completely
encapsulated for protection against vibration, humidity and atmospheric contaminants.
.2
Operation: On-delay or off-delay.
.3
Potentiometer: Self contained to provide time interval adjustment.
.4
Supply Voltage: 120 V, 60 Hz.
.5
Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°C.
.6
Contact rating: EEMAC B300 and P300.
.7
Timing ranges: Continuously adjustable over the range 0.1 s. to 30 s. or as required.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16825
Page 4
February 13, 2013
CONTROL DEVICES
2.8
Control Circuit Transformers
.1
Single-phase, dry type.
.2
Primary voltage: to match the equipment line voltage.
.3
Secondary voltage: 120 V unless otherwise indicated.
.4
Rating: 50 VA or the actual load plus 20%, whichever is the greater unless otherwise
indicated.
.5
Secondary fuse: size for the actual load x 2.5 or the next largest standard size unless
otherwise indicated. Provide an integrally mounted fuse holder.
.6
Close voltage regulations as required by magnet coils and solenoid valves.
2.9
Operator Control Stations
.1
Pushbuttons:
.1
3
Type A:
.1 Duty: Standard;
.2 Operator type: recessed;
.3 Operator colour: red and green as indicated;
.4 Nameplate type: metal, engraved with contrasting letters as indicated;
.5 Provision for padlocking in the depressed position;
.6 1 normally open and 1 normally closed contacts;
.7 Contact rating: EEMAC A600;
.8 Enclosure: CSA sprinkler-proof enclosure;
.9 Allen-Bradley 800S Series.
EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
.1
Install the pushbutton stations and control devices as indicated or required and
interconnect them as indicated.
CEL JOB NO. 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
Section 16825
Page 5
February 13, 2013
CONTROL DEVICES
3.2
Tests
.1
Perform tests to ensure a complete operational system.
.2
Depending upon the magnitude and complexity, divide the control system into convenient
sections, energize one (1) section at a time and check out the operation of the section.
.3
Undertake the group testing upon completion of the sectional tests.
.4
Check out the complete system for operational sequencing.
.5
Submit one (1) copy each of the test results to:
.1
.2
.3
General Contractor;
Prime Consultant;
Electrical Consultant.
- END -
CEL JOB NO. 12221
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
ALTERATIONS RESEARCH OFFICES
TORONTO, ONTARIO
APPENDIX “B”
PANEL SCHEDULES
April 25, 2013
CROSSEY
ENGINEERING
LTD.
CEL JOB NO.: 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Panel Schedule
12221
Job No.
Voltage:
/
120
Ph/Wire:
208
3/4
REFER TO DISTRIBUTION
Fed from:
Panel:
PP-3C
Date:
February, 2013
Panel Mains:
225A
Mounting:
Surface
amps
Trb Type:
Double
Location:
ELEC./JAN. 374
Main Breaker:
NO
DIAGRAM
BRKR
GFI
DESCRIPTION
C [W] d.f. D [W] cct
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 368
900
0.6
540
1
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 368,366
900
0.6
540
3
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 366
900
0.6
540
5
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 364
900
0.6
540
7
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 364,362
900
0.6
540
9
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 362,360
900
0.6
540
11
bus
b
c
a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 360
900
0.6
540
13 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, CONF 356, 340
900
0.6
540
15
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, 377,378
600
0.6
360
17
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 354,352
900
0.6
540
19 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 352,350
900
0.6
540
21
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 348,344
900
0.6
540
23
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 344,342
900
0.6
540
25 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 342
900
0.6
540
27
15A-1P
REC (1), COMP, MTG RM 342
300
0.6
180
29
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 302,304
900
0.6
540
31 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 304,306,308
900
0.6
540
33
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 301,312,314
900
0.6
540
35
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 316,318,320
900
0.6
540
37 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 322,324
900
0.6
540
39
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 326,328
900
0.6
540
41
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 328,330
900
0.6
540
43 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 332,334
900
0.6
540
45
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 334,336
900
0.6
540
47
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 338
900
0.6
540
49 a
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 338
900
0.6
540
51
15A-1P
REC(3) COMP, OFFICE 338
200
0.5
100
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
20A-1P
DO, MENS WC
400
0.6
240
57
REC(2) GFI, WC
400
0.3
120
59
15A-1P
REC(2), WC
300
0.6
180
61 a
20A-1P
DO, WOMENS WC
400
0.6
240
63
REC(1) IT RM
900
0.6
540
65
15A-1P
REC(1) IT RM
900
0.6
540
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
67 a
69
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
71
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
73 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
75
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
77
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
79 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
81
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
83
b
b
b
600
REC(4) 368,366,364
15A-1P
4
360
0.6
600
REC(4) OFFICE 362,360,358
15A-1P
6
360
0.6
600
REC(4) OFFICE 356,354
15A-1P
8
390
0.6
650
REC(4) OFFICE 350,348,344,342
15A-1P
10
180
0.6
300
REC(1) OFFICE 368
15A-1P
c 12
540
0.6
900
REC(3) OFFICE 354,352,350
15A-1P
14
360
0.6
600
REC(2) OFFICE 348,344
15A-1P
16
360
0.6
600
REC(2) OFFICE 344,342
15A-1P
c 18
480
0.6
800
REC(4) 304,306,308,310,312
15A-1P
20
480
0.6
800
REC(4) 314,316,318,320
15A-1P
22
480
0.6
800
REC(4) OFFICE 302,304,306
15A-1P
c 24
480
0.6
800
REC(4) OFFICE 310,314,316
15A-1P
26
480
0.6
800
REC(4) OFFICE 320,322,326
15A-1P
28
480
0.6
800
REC(4) OFFICE 328,330,332
15A-1P
c 30
480
0.6
800
REC(4) OFFICE 334,336,338
15A-1P
32
180
0.3
600
IG REC(1) O/H PROJ. MEETING 340
15A-1P
SPARE
15A-1P
600
REC(2) OFFICE 377
15A-1P
34
0
1.0
360
0.6
38
270
0.6
450
REC(3) IT RM 373, CORR 301
15A-1P
40
180
0.3
600
IG REC(1) O/H PROJ. CONF. 356
15A-1P
IG REC(1) O/H PROJ. MEETING 370
15A-1P
AC-7, A/C RM 322
30A-3P
c 42
180
0.3
600
44
1664
0.8
2080
46
1664
0.8
2080
c 48
1664
0.8
2080
50
112
0.8
140
TF-3.1, MEETING RM 340
15A-1P
52
176
0.8
220
TF-3.2, MEETING RM 356
15A-1P
SPARE
15A-1P
140
TF-3.3, I.T. RM 373
15A-1P
AC-10, STORAGE 356a
30A-3P
0
1.0
112
0.8
58
1664
0.8
2080
c 60
1664
0.8
2080
62
1664
0.8
2080
64
540
0.6
900
REC(1) IT RM
15A-1P
c 66
540
0.6
900
REC(1) IT RM
15A-1P
68
120
0.6
200
AV IG REC, 356c
15A-1P
70
180
0.6
300
AV IG REC, 356c
15A-1P
c 72
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
74
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
76
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 78
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
80
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
82
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
c 84
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
CONNECTED 'A'
18440 W
11772 W
DEMAND 'A'
CONNECTED 'B'
18180 W
11604 W
DEMAND 'B'
CONNECTED 'C'
17960 W
11288 W
DEMAND 'C'
Notes: COMPLETE PANEL WITH ISOLATED GROUND BUS BAR.
SEE NOTE(S) ON DRAWINGS. STACKED TUBS.
TOTAL DEMAND AMPS
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD
USE AS GUIDE ONLY
BRKR
0.6
56
b
GFI
360
c 54
b
DESCRIPTION
2
c 36
53
15A-1P
Remarks:
b
55 a
15A-1P
cct D [W] d.f. C [W]
a
TOTAL DEMAND LOAD
96.2
54.6
34.7
A
kW
kW
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Panel Schedule
12221
Job No.
Voltage:
/
120
Ph/Wire:
208
3/4
REFER TO DISTRIBUTION
Fed from:
Panel:
PP-4C
Date:
February, 2013
Panel Mains:
225A
Mounting:
Surface
amps
Trb Type:
Double
Location:
ELEC./JAN. 462
Main Breaker:
NO
DIAGRAM
BRKR
GFI
DESCRIPTION
C [W] d.f. D [W] cct
15A-1P
REC (2), MTG RM 458
600
0.6
360
1
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 456
900
0.6
540
3
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 436,454
900
0.6
540
5
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 452,450,448
900
0.6
540
7
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 446,444,442
900
0.6
540
9
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 440,438
900
0.6
540
11
bus
b
c
a
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 436,434,432
900
0.6
540
13 a
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 430,428
900
0.6
540
15
15A-1P
REC (3), 426,424
900
0.6
540
17
15A-1P
REC (3), 424,465
900
0.6
540
19 a
15A-1P
REC (3), 402
900
0.6
540
21
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 402,404
900
0.6
540
23
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 404,406
900
0.6
540
25 a
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 406
900
0.6
540
27
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 408,410,412
900
0.6
540
29
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 408,410,412
900
0.6
540
31 a
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 414,412
900
0.6
540
33
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 418,416
900
0.6
540
35
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 418
900
0.6
540
37 a
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 420
900
0.6
540
39
15A-1P
REC (3), OFFICE 422,420
900
0.6
540
41
15A-1P
REC(2), 422
600
0.6
360
43 a
20A-1P
DO, WOMENS WC
400
0.6
240
45
15A-1P
REC(2) GFI, WC
400
0.3
120
47
15A-1P
REC(2), WC
300
0.6
180
49 a
20A-1P
DO, MENS WC
400
0.6
240
51
15A-1P
LCD SCREEN, 458
200
0.5
100
53
15A-1P
REC(3) 306,312,316
900
0.6
540
55 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
57
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
59
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
61 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
63
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
65
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
67 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
69
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
71
SPACE
1.0
0
73 a
SPACE
1.0
0
75
SPACE
1.0
0
77
SPACE
1.0
0
79 a
SPACE
1.0
0
81
SPACE
1.0
0
83
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
DESCRIPTION
BRKR
540
0.6
900
REC(6) 456,452,448,444,442,440
15A-1P
4
450
0.6
750
REC (5) OFFICE 426,432,436,438
15A-1P
6
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 456,454,452
15A-1P
8
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 450,448,446
15A-1P
10
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 444,442,440
15A-1P
c 12
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 436,434,432
15A-1P
14
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 430,428,426
15A-1P
16
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 426
15A-1P
c 18
480
0.6
800
REC(1) 438
15A-1P
20
480
0.6
800
REC(1) 438
15A-1P
22
540
0.6
900
REC(3) 402,404
15A-1P
c 24
540
0.6
900
REC(3) 406,408
15A-1P
26
540
0.6
900
REC(3) 408,410,414
15A-1P
28
540
0.6
900
REC(3) 416,418
15A-1P
c 30
540
0.6
900
REC(3) 420,422
15A-1P
32
540
0.6
900
REC(6), 404,406
15A-1P
34
270
0.6
450
REC(3), 408
15A-1P
c 36
540
0.6
900
REC(6), 418,420
15A-1P
38
180
0.6
300
REC (3) I.T. ROOM 461, CORR 401
15A-1P
40
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 461
15A-1P
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 461
15A-1P
AC-8, A/C RM 420
30A-3P
c 42
540
0.6
900
44
1664
0.8
2080
46
1664
0.8
2080
c 48
1664
0.8
2080
50
112
0.8
140
TF-4.1, 424
15A-1P
52
112
0.8
140
TF-4.3, I.T. RM 461
15A-1P
c 54
176
0.8
220
TF-4.2, MEETING RM 458
15A-1P
56
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 461
15A-1P
58
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 461
15A-1P
c 60
180
0.3
600
IG REC (1) O/H PROJ. MEETING 370
15A-1P
62
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
64
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 66
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
68
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
70
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 72
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
74
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
76
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 78
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
80
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
82
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
c 84
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
CONNECTED 'A'
16520 W
10356 W
DEMAND 'A'
15920 W
9996 W
DEMAND 'B'
CONNECTED 'C'
16000 W
9740 W
DEMAND 'C'
TOTAL DEMAND AMPS
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD
USE AS GUIDE ONLY
GFI
2
CONNECTED 'B'
Notes: COMPLETE PANEL WITH ISOLATED GROUND BUS BAR.
SEE NOTE(S) ON DRAWINGS. STACKED TUBS.
Remarks:
cct D [W] d.f. C [W]
a
TOTAL DEMAND LOAD
83.5
48.4
30.1
A
kW
kW
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Panel Schedule
12221
Job No.
Voltage:
/
120
Ph/Wire:
208
3/4
REFER TO DISTRIBUTION
Fed from:
Panel:
PP-5C
Date:
February, 2013
Panel Mains:
225A
Mounting:
Surface
amps
Trb Type:
Double
Location:
ELEC./JAN. 578
Main Breaker:
NO
DIAGRAM
BRKR
GFI
DESCRIPTION
C [W] d.f. D [W] cct
15A-1P
REC (3) 574,572,570
900
0.6
540
1
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 568,566,564
900
0.6
540
3
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 562,560,558
900
0.6
540
5
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 558
900
0.6
540
7
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 556
900
0.6
540
9
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 556,554
900
0.6
540
11
bus
b
c
a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 552,550,548
900
0.6
540
13 a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 548
900
0.6
540
15
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 548,546
900
0.6
540
17
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 546
900
0.6
540
19 a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 544
900
0.6
540
21
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 544
900
0.6
540
23
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 544,542
900
0.6
540
25 a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 582,581
900
0.6
540
27
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 502,504
900
0.6
540
29
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 506,508,510
900
0.6
540
31 a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 512,514,516
900
0.6
540
33
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 518,520
900
0.6
540
35
20A-1P
DO, WOMENS WC
400
0.6
240
37 a
20A-1P
DO, MENS WC
400
0.6
240
39
15A-1P
IG REC (1) O/H PROJ. MEETING 572
250
0.3
75
41
15A-1P
TF-5.2, MEETING RM 572
220
0.8
176
43 a
15A-1P
LCD SCREEN, 572
200
0.5
100
45
15A-1P
REC(2) GFI, WC
400
0.3
120
47
15A-1P
REC(2) WC
300
0.6
180
49 a
15A-1P
FAX, 520
800
0.6
480
51
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 522,524,526
900
0.6
540
53
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 528,530,532
900
0.6
540
55 a
15A-1P
REC (3) OFFICE 534,536,538
900
0.6
540
57
15A-1P
REC (2) OFFICE 540
600
0.6
360
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
59
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
63
SPARE
1.0
0
65
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
67 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
69
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
71
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
73 a
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
75
15A-1P
SPARE
1.0
0
77
SPACE
1.0
0
79 a
SPACE
1.0
0
81
SPACE
1.0
0
83
b
b
b
b
DESCRIPTION
BRKR
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 572,570,568
15A-1P
4
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 566,564,562
15A-1P
6
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 560,554,552
15A-1P
8
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 550,544
15A-1P
10
540
0.6
900
REC (6) OFFICE 572,568,564,560
15A-1P
c 12
450
0.6
750
REC (5) OFFICE 556,552,548
15A-1P
14
360
0.6
600
REC (4) OFFICE 546,582,585
15A-1P
16
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 502,504,506
15A-1P
c 18
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 508,510,512
15A-1P
20
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 514,516,518
15A-1P
22
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 524,526,528
15A-1P
c 24
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 530,532,534
15A-1P
26
540
0.6
900
REC (3) OFFICE 536,538,540
15A-1P
28
540
0.6
900
REC (6) 508,510,512,514,516,518
15A-1P
c 30
540
0.6
900
REC (6) 520,522,528,530,532
15A-1P
32
270
0.6
450
REC (3) 534,536,538
15A-1P
34
135
0.3
450
REC (3) 577,501,
15A-1P
c 36
112
0.8
140
TF-5.1, MEETING RM 42
15A-1P
AC-9, A/C RM 579
30A-3P
38
1664
0.8
2080
40
1664
0.8
2080
c 42
1664
0.8
2080
44
180
0.3
600
IG REC (1) O/H PROJ. MEETING 542
15A-1P
46
100
0.5
200
LCD SCREEN, MTG RM 542
15A-1P
c 48
112
0.8
140
TF-5.3, I.T. RM 577
15A-1P
50
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 577
15A-1P
52
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 577
15A-1P
c 54
540
0.6
900
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 577
15A-1P
56
540
0.6
900
58
0
1.0
REC (1) I.T. ROOM 577
15A-1P
SPARE
15A-1P
c 60
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
62
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
64
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 66
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
68
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
70
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
c 72
0
1.0
SPARE
15A-1P
74
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
76
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
c 78
0
1.0
SPARE
20A-1P
80
0
1.0
SPACE
82
0
1.0
SPACE
c 84
0
1.0
SPACE
CONNECTED 'A'
16350 W
10090 W
DEMAND 'A'
15830 W
9739 W
DEMAND 'B'
CONNECTED 'C'
15160 W
9373 W
DEMAND 'C'
TOTAL DEMAND AMPS
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD
USE AS GUIDE ONLY
GFI
2
CONNECTED 'B'
Notes: COMPLETE PANEL WITH ISOLATED GROUND BUS BAR.
SEE NOTE(S) ON DRAWINGS. STACKED TUBS.
Remarks:
b
61 a
15A-1P
cct D [W] d.f. C [W]
a
TOTAL DEMAND LOAD
81.1
47.3
29.2
A
kW
kW
BAYCREST BRAIN HEALTH CENTRE
ALTERATIONS RESEARCH OFFICES
TORONTO, ONTARIO
APPENDIX “C”
DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
April 25, 2013
CROSSEY
ENGINEERING
LTD.
CEL JOB NO.: 12221
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DIVISION 15 AND 16 – DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
1
General
1.1
DIVISION 15 / DIVISION 16 WORK
Appendix “C”
Page 1
February 13, 2013
.1
Division 16 to provide all lugs and terminals for line and load power wiring terminations.
.2
Packaged units will have integral starters and only power feeders need be provided. The
packaged unit starters will be by Division 15.
.3
Division 16 to provide all remote and isolation disconnect switches.
.4
All control wiring except fire alarm shall be by Division 15 including circuits deemed as
120V Building Operation Control Wiring. Fan shutdown connection shall be by Division 16.
.5
For 120V Building Operation Control Wiring, the Division 15 Contractor may acquire the
services of the Division 16 Contractor as necessary under the Division 15 Scope Costs.
.6
Voltage for motors 1/2 HP and larger will be either 208V or 600V 3-phase. Under 1/2 HP
will be 120 or 208V/1 phase or 3-phase.
.7
All multi-speed motors to be consequent pole.
.8
All motors shall be by Division 15.
.9
No 2-speed double winding motors to be used unless prior notice is given by the
Consultants.
.10
Thermistor protection to be provided in motors 20 HP and larger using approved
thermistors. VSD applications thermistor not required.
.11
Thermistors imbedded in the motor will be provided by Division 15.
.12
Division 16 to provide manual reset devices for motor starters for thermistor interface.
.13
Division 15 to provide wiring from the motor thermistor to motor starter (resettable).
.14
Division 16 shall provide line and load wiring for chiller starter. (if applicable)
.15
Division 15 shall provide one (1) set of reviewed shop drawings to the Division 16
Contractor for review of Division 15 shop drawing electrical content.
.16
Division 16 to wire smoke dampers with end switches.
.17
All end switches will be by Division 15.
.18
Division 16 to wire EP switches for smoke damper control.
.19
All relays required for Division 15 will be by Division 15.
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DIVISION 15 AND 16 – DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
Appendix “C”
Page 2
February 13, 2013
.20
Division 15 to provide all pressure switches, supervisory valves, flow switches, dry pipe
alarm valves, etc. for interface to fire alarm system. All wiring of these items shall be by
Division 16.
.21
All electric pipe tracing will be by Division 15 with power connections by Division 16. All
electric tracing will be 208 V single-phase. All electric tracing will be self-limiting type of
cable.
.22
All electric heating units including unit heaters, force flows will be supplied by Division 15
and installed by Division 16 as per Division 15 layout. Contractors shall coordinate on site.
.23
All low voltage controls (60 volts and below) shall be provided by Division 15. All 120V
control transformers shall be supplied by Division 15, installed and connected by
Division 15, except for control transformers built into starters being provided by Division 16.
If not a building management circuit the Division 16 Contractor shall provide primary side
termination.
.24
All level switches conduit and wiring for sump pumps shall be provided by Division 15.
.25
Provide power wiring connection and, fittings external to all motors, machines, starters,
control panels, etc., supplied under this and all other contracts except Division 15.
.26
Power wiring will include but not be limited to all raceways, conduits, lugs, and fittings,
disconnect switches, auxiliary devices for 3-phase, 600 V, and 3-phase 208 V motors and
1-phase 208 V, 1-phase 120 V motors. All wiring to be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
.27
All starters, motor control centers, etc., along with input and output power wiring will be by
Division 16. This is with the exception of packaged units.
.28
Packaged units will have integral starters and only power feeders need be provided. The
packaged unit starters will be by Division 15 and/or Division 11. The main disconnect
switch will be provided by Division 16.
.29
Where control devices are line voltage, receive these devices from the Contractor
providing that system, install all power wiring to the devices and install the devices.
.30
The use of "lock off stop" devices will not be permitted. Provide disconnect switches for all
motors that are 25' (7.5 m) or greater away from the motor starter or, if the distance is less,
provide disconnect switches for the motors where the motor starter is not visible. For airconditioning or refrigeration equipment, the disconnecting means shall be within the line of
sight and 3m or less from the equipment.
.31
All two (2) speed and delta wye motors shall have an adequate number of properly sized
feeders between the starters and motors to allow for operation. Note that all remote
disconnect switches located adjacent to 2-speed motors and delta wye shall be 6-pole with
an auxiliary contact.
.32
Control wiring shall be provided by this contract for the work of all contracts other than
Baycrest Brain Health Centre
Alterations Research Offices
3rd, 4th and 5th Floors
DSAI
Project 0812
DIVISION 15 AND 16 – DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY
Appendix “C”
Page 3
February 13, 2013
Division 15 contracts as noted on the drawings and called for herein. Control wiring
includes the wiring of all control devices that are connected into control circuits of motor
starters and into motor power feeders. Wiring shall be in accordance with manufacturers
wiring diagrams and instructions.
.33
All motor starters, control wiring, etc., shall conform to Section 16811, 16825 and 16830.
.34
All conduit and installation procedures shall adhere to the Division 16 specification.
.35
Should the Mechanical Contractor change or modify motor sizes from what is reflected on
the Bid Documents during any stage of this project, Division 15 Contractor will be
responsible to cover all associated electrical costs for the Division 16 Contractor. Such as
revised motor starter and feeds etc.
.36
All control conduit installations for mechanical systems shall adhere to Division 16
Specifications.
End of Section